JP7313691B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on winning of a game medium in a starting area, and to execute a game effect according to the result of the determination (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, there is a game machine in which a game is played by switching the aim between the first start opening and the second start opening.

JP 2019-033816 A

If the game machine does not allow the game ball to enter the starting hole according to the game state or the like, it may result in a disadvantage for the player and reduce the interest in the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of games.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and based on the determination, when the variation display of the symbols (special symbols) executed on the first display means (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61) becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. ), the game state has a normal game state and a specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and based on the establishment of the first start condition to the first starting means (first winning port 45), or based on the establishment of the second starting condition to the second starting means (second winning port 47), a second display means (first image display device 70) different from the first display means. It is possible to execute a variable effect of the pattern 70a), and it is possible to execute a first specific notification (e.g., right-handed display) that suggests the specific game state, and a second specific notification (a display or notification different from the right-handed display) that is performed in addition to the first specific notification (right-handed display) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the first specific notification (right-handed display) is being executed., a predetermined that is executed over one or more of the variable effectsProduction can be executed, and the second specific notificationDuring the variable performance based on the first start condition in the specific game state, which can be executedis thePredeterminedIt is configured to be able to limit the execution of the productionThe variable effect can be executed with the effect symbol of the first mode and the effect symbol of the second mode displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable effect, the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the normal game state is easier to display the effect symbol of the second mode than the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific game state, and the second mode in the normal game state is more likely to be displayed than the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific game state. The variable performance based on the starting condition of 1 is easier to execute the linked performance performed in conjunction with the appearance of the performance symbol of the second mode.It is characterized by

According to the present invention, the player's interest can be improved.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1 step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-stage change pattern determination table for the said icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the occurrence frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing, (b) is a view showing the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, (c) is a view showing the occurrence frequency relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) is a view showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an advance notice scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit advance notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the change production|presentation at the time of winning. 1 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of normal change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of normal change pattern 01; 1 is a timing chart 1 of a character effect change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of character effect change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the character action change pattern 01; FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 42; It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 46; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 49; It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 58; It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/drive control part. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing origin return processing in a lamp/drive control unit; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp/drive control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of restarting power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 84; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 86; It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/drive control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 2 to 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 5 to 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 10 to 12 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 10 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 11 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 12 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 13 to 15 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 13 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in Concrete Example 14 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 15 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally; It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 1 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 2 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 3 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 4 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 5 of a main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 1 of image change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of specific example 1 of an image change effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 2 of image change effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering of a specific example 2 of image change rendering; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 3 of image change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering of a specific example 3 of image change rendering; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 4 of image change effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering of specific example 4 of image change rendering; It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation when conditions are not met in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 3 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of specific example 4 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 6 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 7 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 8 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 9 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 10 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 11 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of production; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the production|presentation by a color effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of zone production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of change notification sound production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a pending|holding icon change production. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a ramp change production. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the operation|movement production|presentation of a 1st movable member. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the production example 1; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a light-guide plate display effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the normal game state in the specific example 2 of production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the normal game state of the specific example 2 of production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific game state in the production|presentation example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific game state of the specific example 2 of production|presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of production; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of production; It is a figure which shows the relationship of fluctuation time. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of preparation operation|movement. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of stop operation|movement. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a fluctuation|variation stop pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a fluctuation start pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the mode change production|presentation of the production|presentation design. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the display size change production|presentation of the production|presentation design. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the display size change production|presentation of reach production|presentation. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 5 of effect; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a specific example 5 of production; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a specific example 6 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of information production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of vibration production|presentation. 1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to this embodiment; FIG. It is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the state which assembled|attached each unit to the base frame. FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 197; It is explanatory drawing of various random numbers acquired in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing in a main control board; 4 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing of the main control board; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by a CPU of a main control board; It is the flowchart which showed an example of the starting opening SW process which CPU of a main control board performs. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of gate detection SW processing executed by a CPU of a control board; It is the flowchart which showed an example of the special design process which CPU of a main-control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the customer waiting setting process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the special game determination process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the variation pattern selection process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the process during stop which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the auxiliary|assistant design process which CPU of a main-control board performs. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of the number of rounds/operation pattern; It is the flowchart which showed an example of the game state setting process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the 2nd starting opening opening process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the timer interrupt processing which CPU of a production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the command reception process which CPU of a production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the production|presentation selection process which CPU of a production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the processing during the end of fluctuation production|presentation which CPU of an production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the hit production|presentation selection process which CPU of an production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the ending production|presentation selection process which CPU of a production|presentation control board performs. It is a figure explaining the main board|substrate protection case which concerns on an example of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a main board protection case including a pedestal; It is a side view which shows the aspect at the time of attaching a main board|substrate protection case to a base. It is a figure explaining the main board|substrate protection case which concerns on the other example of this embodiment. 226 is a rear perspective view of the main board protective case of FIG. 225; FIG. It is a figure explaining the state which removed the main board|substrate protection case of FIG. 225 from the base. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms an identification mark in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms an identification mark in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of a main board|substrate case. It is the figure which looked at the seal|sticker part and main ROM from the rear diagonal upper direction. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main-control board. It is the figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for a main control board. FIG. 237 is a view showing a main board case that accommodates the main control board shown in FIGS. 235 and 236; FIG. 217 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal of the main board case of FIG. 216; FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a procedure for assembling a cutting member, an unsealing seal, and a cap to the sealing base, centering on the protruding piece of the upper case piece. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before the cutting member, the unsealing seal, and the cap are assembled to the sealing base portion 310; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which an unsealing prohibition seal is adhered to the sealing base; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to the unsealing prohibition seal; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cap is detached and the unsealing prohibition seal is broken; FIG. 4 is a surface view and a partially enlarged view of an example of an unsealable seal. It is a figure which shows the components layout of the payout control board in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of a payout control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of a payout control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of a payout control board case. 4 is a diagram for explaining the structure of an image control board; FIG. It is the figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for an image control board. It is the figure which expanded and showed a part of printed wiring board used for an image control board. It is a front view explaining the structure of a production|presentation control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of a production control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of a production control board case. It is a figure for demonstrating the other structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board explained in FIG. 255 is housed. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 255; It is a figure explaining another structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 259 is a front view of the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board described in FIG. 258 is accommodated; FIG. 260 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 259; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when RWM is cleared; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when confirming settings in a case where the gaming machine includes the performance display unit that also serves as the setting display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a game machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The game machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, and a game board 5 having a game area 5a where game balls flow down.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade via fixing members (for example, nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be maintained.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is attached so as to block the opening 8 from the rear, and the game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4 are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later without entering the upper plate 11, and a shooting operation device 13 that can be operated to shoot game balls. and are provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two positions above the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice) effects. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The top plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a that slopes downward toward the shooting operation device 13 (toward the right), and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1), which function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later, are arranged side by side on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11.

The production button device 16 is provided with a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the production button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the production button 17, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 can emit effect light by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is possible to perform an effect operation, and a button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing operations such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 2) connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending/returning operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the game machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game ball, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a receiving tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and while the receiving tray full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the game ball payout by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emitting device 15c for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, a lock mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the game machine 1 through this opening.

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the shooting member 28, a shooting rail 29 that slopes upward from the shooting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a shooting position that is the lower end of the slope of the shooting rail 29. When the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member 37 for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5. - 特許庁A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-like decorative frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the interior, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device 41 for introducing the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the interior of the decoration frame 40 is provided on the side of the decoration frame 40, and a stage portion 42 for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior of the decoration frame 40 by the warp device 41 to flow down the decoration frame 40 is provided in the lower part of the decoration frame 40.例文帳に追加

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win (enter) are provided at intervals. 1 is paid out.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal pattern gate 44 (normal pattern starting area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, respectively. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start hole 45 (special figure start area) in which a game ball can always win (enter). When a game ball that has won (entered) the first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are paid out from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. . In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) for a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, there is provided a variable starting part 46 for converting from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win (entering a ball) to an open state (special mode) in which it is possible or easier to enter a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a winning lottery for a normal symbol).

The variable starting unit 46 is provided with a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can win (entrance), a second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2) that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 47, a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 2) for opening and closing the movable member 48. It is When the second starting port 47 is in a closed state, winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult, and when the second starting port 47 is in an open state, winning of the game ball (entering a ball) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three balls) are paid out from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Between the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting part 46, there is provided a prize winning hole lamp NR (not shown) for causing the surroundings of the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting part 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform light emission effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal figure gate 44 on the right side, there is provided a variable winning part 49 which is changed from a closed state (basic mode) in which a game ball cannot win a prize (entering a ball) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win a prize (entering a ball) based on establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of a jackpot lottery with a special pattern).

The variable winning section 49 is provided with a large winning opening 50 capable of winning (entering a ball) a game ball, a large winning opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 2) for detecting the winning (entering of a ball) of a game ball into the large winning opening 50, an opening/closing member 51 for changing (variable) between a closed state and an open state of the large winning opening 50, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening/closing the opening/closing member 51. When the big prize winning port 50 is closed, the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult, and when the big winning port 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (entering the ball) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has entered a big winning hole 50 is detected by a big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are paid out from the game ball putting out device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is provided an out ball flow path that receives and collects the game balls that enter the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 and are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, and the game balls that flow into the out opening 39, collects them, and makes them flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, and so on. A normal pattern holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, a right hitting display 67 (see FIG. 2) that encourages shooting a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a during a jackpot game (special game) or during a time-saving game state, and a state confirmation display 68 (see FIG. 2) that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. An information display device 59 is provided.

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45, and the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifies) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. The pattern display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery for the normal pattern, which is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the normal pattern gate 44 (entering the ball).

The jackpot lottery with the first special pattern corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination (judgment information) when a game ball wins (entrance) in the first start port 45, and comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". When the jackpot lottery for the first special pattern is performed, the first special pattern display device 60 performs the variable display of the first special pattern, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the stop display of the first special pattern indicating the result of the lottery is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The jackpot lottery with the second special pattern corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot judgment (judgment information) when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot judgment with the jackpot judgment value to judge whether or not it is a "jackpot". When the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs the variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are respectively composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big win lottery.

In the present embodiment, "jackpot" refers to a state in which the right to execute a jackpot game (special game) is acquired in the first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination) or the second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination). The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 50 in each round game are predetermined, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) enter the big winning hole 50 even before reaching the maximum opening times and the maximum opening time. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery for the normal pattern corresponds to obtaining a random number value for hit determination when a game ball passes through a normal pattern gate 44, comparing the obtained random number value for hit determination with the hit determination value, and determining whether or not there is a "win". When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) enter the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be established). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol reservation display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rights (first reservation storage) for performing the jackpot lottery (variation display of the first special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the first reservation storage. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rights (second reservation storage) for performing a jackpot lottery (variation display of the second special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47, and lights up or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reservation memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal pattern holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rights (normal pattern holding storage) for performing a winning lottery (variation display of the normal pattern) of the normal pattern which is stored when the game ball wins (passes) the normal pattern gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of the normal pattern holding storage. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, ``7'' is stop-displayed when winning a jackpot lottery of special symbols, and ``--'' is stopped-displayed when losing, and extinguishing and ``--'' are repeated during variable display. Before starting the variable display of the special pattern, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so that the start of the variable display can be easily grasped by starting the variable display from extinguishing the LED.

A round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big winning state (special game state) occurs, starts lighting of the LEDs in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the big winning game, keeps lighting the LEDs during the big winning game, and extinguishes the LEDs at the end of the big winning game. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying a right-handed display prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right handed) during the big win state (special game state) and the time saving game state, and the LED lights up during the big win state (special game state) and the time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode to be described later or a setting confirmation mode to be described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is extinguished. Since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front face (surface) of the game machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

It should be noted that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be displayed so that it can be recognized which one is set. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the state confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the state confirmation display 68 may be blinked, or when the setting change mode is set, either the state confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, only the state confirmation display 68 may be lit.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or all the LEDs of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on.

At the lower right part inside the game area 5a, there is provided a sub-first variation display 81, a sub-second variation display 82, a first sub-holding display 83, a second sub-holding display 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-hand hitting display 87 that encourages shooting a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-hand hitting). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, and the second sub-variation display 82 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, each of which is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED flashes (variably displays) at a predetermined interval, and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, the result of the big win lottery (lights up in the case of a big win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

The first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 may blink during the variable display of the special symbols and turn on or off when the special symbols are displayed in a stopped manner so that only whether or not the special symbols are being variable-displayed can be grasped.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories, and the second sub-reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of second reservation memories, each of which is composed of two left and right LEDs. When the number of reserved memories is '0', the left and right LEDs are extinguished, when the number of reserved memories is '1', the left LED is lit and the right LED is extinguished, when the number of reserved memories is '2', the left and right LEDs are lit, when the number of reserved memories is '3', the left LED is blinked and the right LED is lit, and when the number of reserved memories is '4', the left and right LEDs are blinked.

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, it may be possible to blink during the normal pattern fluctuation display and turn on or off when the stop display is performed so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being fluctuated display can be grasped.

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storages, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. The left and right LEDs are extinguished when the normal-pattern reservation memory number is '0', the left LED is lit and the right-hand LED is extinguished when the normal-pattern reservation memory number is '1', the left LED blinks and the right LED is lit when the normal-pattern memory number is '2', and the left and right LEDs blink when the normal-pattern reservation memory number is '4'.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a, a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display formed with a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a first movable member 73 imitating the face of a character is provided in the upper part of the effect space 40a. A circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the performance display, there are a customer waiting demo performance executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and a variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed during the variable display of the special pattern.

A display portion (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area, and the variable display of the effect symbols 70a is performed by scrolling the effect symbols 70a displayed in the respective variable display regions in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment).

Incidentally, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from '1' to '9', and the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in correspondence with (synchronously with) the variability display of the special design executed by the first special design display device 60 and the second special design display device 61.例文帳に追加That is, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the temporary stop display (swing display) of the performance pattern 70a is performed before the stop of the variable display of the special pattern, and the stop display (stationary display) of the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is performed in response to the stop display of the variable display of the special pattern. Incidentally, as the effect pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns indicating numbers, patterns indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

The ``temporary stop display'' means a mode in which the performance pattern 70a shakes slightly or is slightly deformed to give the player the impression that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (not completely stopped).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance patterns such as '777' or a combination of performance patterns with regularity such as '357', and the losing mode is other modes. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as ready-to-win performance, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) according to the result of the big win lottery, so that the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is increased.

Here, the ``ready-to-win performance'' means a variation mode in which a part of the combination of the performance patterns 70a reporting the big win is temporarily stopped and the other performance patterns 70a fluctuate, making the player expect the execution of the big win game. For example, when a combination of three-digit performance symbols 70a of ``777'' is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for reporting a big win, two performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at ``7'' in the left and right regions, and the remaining performance symbols 70a fluctuate in the central region.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are five types of ready-to-win effects, ie, "normal ready-to-win effects", "SP ready-to-win effects", "SPSP ready-to-win effects", and "full-rotation ready-to-win effects".

The ``normal ready-to-win performance'' is a ready-to-win performance executed in a state where a ready-to-win state is formed in which two performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in the left and right regions and one remaining performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region in a state where the background image before the normal ready-to-win performance is displayed.

The ``SP ready-to-win performance'' is executed after the normal ready-to-win performance, the performance pattern 70a in the state of forming the ready-to-win state is reduced and displayed at the corner of the screen, and a movie (moving image, animation, etc.) having a higher performance effect than the normal ready-to-win performance (high expectation for a big win) flows.

The ``SPSP ready-to-win effect'' is a ready-to-win effect that is executed after a normal reach effect or an SP ready-to-win effect, and a movie (animation, animation, etc.) with a higher effect (higher expectations for a big win) than the normal reach effect or SP ready-to-win effect.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In the present embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is executed only when winning in the jackpot lottery.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, in the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved (U1) which is the number of the current first reserved memories, a second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the number of second special symbol reserved (U2) which is the number of the current second reserved memories, and a special pattern being executed (effect pattern 70a). An icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and each display section 70B1 to 70B4 displays a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reserved number (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 first displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first displayed, the second display portion 70B2 displays the first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is secondly displayed, and the third display portion 70B3 displays the first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is thirdly performed. is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70B4 displays the first suspension icon H14 indicating the first suspension storage in which the variation display of the first special symbol is fourthly executed.

The second reserved icon display area 70D is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed in each display section 70D1 to 70D4. That is, the number of second reserved icons is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays a second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first displayed, the second display portion 70D2 displays the second pending icon H22 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed second, and the third display portion 70D3 displays the second pending icon H23 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed third. is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays a second suspension icon H24 indicating the second suspension storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed fourth. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "first reserved number" and the "second special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "second reserved number".

In the icon display area 70C, the icon TH is displayed when the first suspended icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first suspended icon display area 70B or the second suspended icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the second suspended icon display area 70D moves (shifts) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a), and the icon T when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) ends. H disappears (erases). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first reserved icon", the "second reserved icon", and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

The first movable member 73 is capable of performing effect light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is detected that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 is capable of effecting light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. omitted) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the performance positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not operate simultaneously so as not to collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, the other movable member may be moved to the performance position after one movable member moves to the performance position and returns to a position not overlapping the performance position of the other movable member.

Behind the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5 are a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores game balls supplied from island facilities and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a main control device 110A (not shown). A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the board 110, an effect control device 130A (not shown) incorporating the effect control board 130 for controlling the effect in response to the effect control command from the main control board 110, a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside.

The main controller 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for housing the main control board 110, a sealing seal 104 for restricting the opening of the board case, and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the board case so as to cover the sealing seal 104.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or updating the set value which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game (which makes the degree of advantage of the game different), and a signal for shifting to a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting keys are input. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the game machine 1 to be grasped, are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP side by side. Two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits constitute a numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

The substrate case includes a recessed lower case member whose portion facing the back side of the main control board 110 is open, and a recessed upper case member whose portion facing the front side of the main control board 110 is open.

A model name sticker printed with the model name (model name) of the game machine 1 and a management number sticker printed with the management number of the main control board 110 are stuck on the upper surface of the upper case member so as not to overlap the information display device 113 in the front and rear direction. At a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, an operation member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted. When the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

An insertion portion (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a. The insertion portion has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a tubular portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. When the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned rightward from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on so that the setting key cannot be removed from the keyhole, and when it is turned leftward and returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key is removed from the keyhole.

The control number seal has an opener entry part for entering the name of the person opening the main control board 110 and an opening date entry part for entering the opening date of the main control board 110 side by side on the surface of a colorless and transparent base seal.

The opener entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and a transparent window area is provided between each entry area for visual recognition (visual confirmation) of the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and a transparent window area is provided between each entry area for visual confirmation of the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110.

The first to fourth entry areas of the opening person entry area are adjacent to the first to fourth entry areas of the opening date entry area with a space therebetween, and a transparent window area is provided between the entry areas for visual recognition (visual confirmation) of the electronic components mounted on the surface of the main control board 110.

As the information display device 113, a performance display unit formed by unitizing a circuit section composed of four 7-segment displays and substrates may be mounted on the main control substrate. Even in that case, it is desirable to displace them so that they do not overlap in the front and back so that the model name sticker and control number sticker do not restrict (shield) the visibility.

In addition, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 may be mounted on a dedicated board, and board-to-board connection may be made to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

In addition, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but may be provided on the power supply board 160, provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or provided on the back side of the glass frame 4 if it is in a position where the player cannot operate. Even in this case, it is preferable to input the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a to the main controller 110m.

Further, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, a dedicated setting switch for inputting a signal for updating the set value may be provided separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or may be provided on the power supply board 160 as a position where the player cannot operate, provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or provided on the back side of the glass frame 4.

Also, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set values on the information display 113, another display may be provided on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, so that one of the displays displays the performance information and the other displays the set values.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing (corresponding to a volatile storage means). The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays) and transmitting predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow command (data) to be communicated bidirectionally, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is configured to allow the command (data) to be communicated only in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 is connected to the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the gate detection switch 44a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the out ball detection switch 52a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 113, and the payout control board 120. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 is connected to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information to be notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) are output via the output port.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b include a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, a vector table area in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set, and HW parameters in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibition area are set. The areas are arranged in order.

In the game ROM area, a game program area storing a program relating to the progress of the game, a first unused area in which "0" is stored while access is prohibited, a game data area in which data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and a second unused area in which "0" is stored while access is prohibited are arranged in this order.

In the information ROM area, an information program area storing a program relating to the performance display of the game machine, an unused area storing "0" while access is prohibited, and an information data area storing data relating to the performance display of the game machine are arranged in this order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the information program are arranged in this order.

In the game RWM area, a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, a game stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are sequentially arranged.

In the game work area, a set value area for storing set values, a determination information area for storing determination information (a checksum to be described later) for determining an abnormality in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses are arranged in this order.

In the information RWM area, an information work area used as a work by the information program, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and an information stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the information program are arranged in this order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

The relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program will be described below.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. Further, when performing processing based on the information program, the information data area is basically referenced, and the contents of the information RWM area are referenced and updated while using the information RWM area as a work.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after returning to the game program after the processing based on the information program is completed.

Immediately after starting the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all the registers used in the game program are saved in the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all the registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when the processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience does not occur when the information program returns to the game program.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 for driving the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 for driving the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, controls the game ball payout device 100, and transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the performance control board 130, and the like.

An input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected with an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball existence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, etc., and an output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected with a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100.

When a payout command is received from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to perform control to put out a predetermined number of game balls.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the shooting control unit 122 allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When the detection signal from the firing volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the firing control unit 122 drives the ball feeding solenoid 11b and also drives the firing solenoid 28b so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. It is designed to shoot balls.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a hitting member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft. Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the number of game balls shot per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The production control board 130 includes a production control unit 130m having a sub CPU 130a for performing arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b storing a production control program, a sub RAM 130c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, a display/audio control unit 140 for controlling the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the steering wheel light emitting device 15c, and the button driving device 17b. A lamp/driving control unit 150 for controlling the lighting device 76 for the board, the driving device 75 for the board, etc., and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and uses the sub RAM 130c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. command).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. When a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a or a cross key detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a, the performance control board 130 performs processing for executing performance according to the detection signal.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image, or controls the sound output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 having an overall CPU 142 for arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 storing an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 comprising a VDP (Video Display Processor) as an image processor, a CGROM 146 storing image data, etc. A VRAM 147 having a frame buffer or the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the VRAM 147, an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 storing audio data and the like, input/output ports, and the like.

The supervising CPU 142 receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the display control program stored in the supervising ROM 143, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the supervising RAM 144 as a work area, thereby controlling the image control unit 145 and the sound control unit 148 to execute various effects (output data and commands) according to the effect instruction commands received from the effect control unit 130m.

The overall ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and stores a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, animation patterns for displaying animation of effect patterns, animation scene information, and the like.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the image presentation, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes various information such as weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method, duty ratio, which is a parameter of brightness of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and generates drawing data that is the source of video signals (RGB signals, etc.) based on commands (display lists, drawing commands, etc.) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and image data stored in the CGROM 146. The image data is material data representing an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect pattern image, a background image constituting the background of the effect pattern, a character image, and an individual image such as a dialogue image. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 146 also stores palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. This VRAM 143 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), reads out the drawing data from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the read drawing data, and generates the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and Various images are displayed by outputting to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) generate synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and output them to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second.

A general-purpose substrate 72 that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the converted image data is connected between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). General -purpose board 72 has a bridge function that converts the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) 70 (main liquid crystal) that displays the image data, and the image format that supports the performance of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Absorbs the difference in resolution from when the device is connected and when the XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) 17 -inch LCD display device is connected.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the output of audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to the effect instruction command received from the effect control unit 130m, the lamp CPU 150a performs control (outputs data and commands) to cause the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects.

Input/output ports of the lamp/driving control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80. Based on the various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 is performed. , the button drive device 17b, and the drive source such as the motor and solenoid of the board drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the game machine from power supplied from the outside of the game machine, and supplies the main power supply to the game machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the power failure (power failure), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 when power failure (power failure) occurs.

The power supply board 160 is provided with a power switch for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping the supply of main power to the gaming machine 1 so that it can be operated by a store clerk. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and supplies the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 when a power failure (power failure) occurs. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage), and the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power cut off (blackout) after recovery from the power cutoff (blackout). A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability game state" and a "high probability game state" as states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and a "non-time-saving game state" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state" (2) Low-probability short-time gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "short-time gaming state" (3) High-probability short-time gaming state that is "high-probability gaming state" and "short-time gaming state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state", and this game state is referred to as the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the odds of winning a jackpot are set as low as about 1/300 in a special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, for example, when the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the degree of advantage of the game, is "1". On the other hand, the ``high-probability game state'' refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a big win is improved compared to the state of a low-probability game, and when the set value is ``1'', the probability of winning a big win is set as high as about 1/60.

Concretely, there are 4 kinds of set values, 1 to 4. When the set value is 1, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/60. In the case of , the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/290, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/58, and when the set value is ``4'', the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". In addition, the change from the low probability game state to the high probability game state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variable jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the ``non-time-saving game state'' refers to a game state in which the average variation time of normal patterns corresponding to the lottery result is set longer than the ``time-saving game state'' in the winning lottery of normal patterns performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through a normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for normal patterns is performed, and the normal patterns are variably displayed on a normal pattern display device 62, but the normal patterns are stopped and displayed, for example, 30 seconds after the start of the variable display. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the ``time-saving game state'' means a game state in which the average fluctuation time of the normal patterns corresponding to the lottery result is set shorter than that of the ``non-time-saving game state'' in the winning lottery of the normal patterns performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and the opening time of the second start port 47 is set longer than the ``non-time-saving game state'', for example, 2.5 seconds when the winning is won. Further, in the ``non-time-saving game state'', the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is set as low as 1/128, and in the ``time-saving game state'', the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is set as high as 127/128. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In the embodiment, the ``time-saving gaming state'' is set so that the normal pattern fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the normal pattern lottery winning probability are more advantageous than the ``non-time-saving gaming state''. However, the ``time-saving gaming state'' may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the high-probability game state is five times the probability of winning a big win in the low-probability game state (common regardless of the set value).

Also, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot lottery, a small win which is less advantageous to the advantageous player than the big win is not won, but the small win may be won with a probability of about 1/100, for example. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of big win), but conversely, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of big win).

In addition, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and / or the high probability game state may be the same for all the set values (1 to 4), or for example, two or three set values (1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.) The probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and / or the high probability game state may be the same.

Also, the set values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, but are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

(Types of jackpot games)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, there are "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "third jackpot game" as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and "first jackpot game" and "second jackpot game" as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47. .

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is closed for 2 seconds after the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the high-accuracy short-time game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

"Second jackpot game" means that the round game is executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability short working hours game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

"Third jackpot" means that the round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

In addition, the number of times of fluctuation display (in the present embodiment, 100 times or 10000 times described above) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the jackpot game may be expressed as “high probability number” or “time-saving number”.

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot games is three, but the number is not limited to three, and may be less or more than three. In addition, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds in any jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game), but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, and the opening time may be different depending on the round game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of hits will be explained.

In this embodiment, there are ``first winning game'' and ``second winning game'' as types of winning games that can be won in winning lotteries based on the passage of game balls to the normal figure gate 44, and if the winning lottery is executed in a non-time-saving game state, it becomes a "first winning game", and if a winning lottery is executed in a time-saving gaming state, it becomes a "second winning game".

The "first winning game" is to open the second starting port 47 up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

"Second winning game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened until 2.6 seconds, then closed until 1.5 seconds, and then opened again until 2.6 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enters the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

Thus, in the ``time-saving game state'', game balls are more likely to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can proceed with the game more favorably without consuming the game balls than in the ``non-time-saving game state''.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply substrate 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is shifted to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is shifted to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or set is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the current set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113, and a setting change designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED. When the setting key switch 112a is set to OFF from the ON state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value. and perform processing for terminating the setting change mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting change. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. When the checksum is normal (no abnormality in the data in the RWM area for game), the process is moved to step S11, and when the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area for game is abnormal), the process is moved to step S12 assuming that the control state before power interruption cannot be normally restored.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). When the set value in the set value area is determined to be within the proper range, the process is shifted to step S13, and when the set value in the set value area is determined to be out of the proper range, the process is shifted to step S12.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display device 113, and after transmitting an unrecoverable error specifying command indicating the occurrence of the unrecoverable error to the performance control board 130, interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt is set, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of the unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 after clearing the output port, and processing is performed to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply substrate 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the setting, the power switch is not canceled, and the power switch must be turned on with the setting changing operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (e.g., red) until the power is turned off, and an unrecoverable error sound ("recoverable error" + buzzer sound) is emitted from the audio output device 9 to indicate that an unrecoverable error has occurred. It is to output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state) to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130, and shifts the processing to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. The initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (eg, red) for a predetermined period (eg, 60 seconds), and a power-on notification sound from the voice output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. When there is a setting confirmation operation, the processing is shifted to step S17 assuming that the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and when there is no setting confirmation operation, the processing is shifted to step S18 to restore the control state of the game to the state before power-off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the RWM area for game is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113, and a setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state by a confirmation end operation, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is ended, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended, and processing for ending the setting confirmation mode is performed.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting confirmation. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power restoration is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (“Power has been restored” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), a normal symbol storage designation command indicating the normal symbol reservation number (G), etc.) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved normal symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value and the special symbol determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25 performs an initial value random value update process of updating the initial value random number value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24, and if the power failure detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, performs processing to calculate the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the game RWM area in step S29, and saves the backup flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S30. Then, in step S31, processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the system waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so that cheating can be suppressed and the security of the game machine can be improved.

Further, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation, it is possible to increase the security of the setting change, which is the most likely to be fraudulent, and effectively prevent the fraud.

In addition, when the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine does not cause trouble to the game parlor and the players due to the unexpected operation of the game machine, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, when the value in the set value area is out of the proper range, that is, when there is a possibility that the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, thereby preventing the progress of the game with a set value unintended by the game parlor side and improving the reliability of the game machine.

During setting change (in setting change mode) or setting confirmation (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back (back). That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, when it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, the initial value "1" may be saved in the set value area, and the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, when it is determined that there is a backup flag (recovery of the power supply) and it is determined that no setting change operation has been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, the initial value "1" may be saved in the set value area, and the process may be moved to step S13.

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including the information indicating the current game state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the game state designation command indicating the current game state may be transmitted.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the checksum may be calculated by the information program. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of all the RWM areas may be calculated, or the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either one of the checksums is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed, but the setting change start designation command may be transmitted instead of the setting change designation command, and the setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as processing for updating the special symbol time counter, processing for updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, processing for updating the normal symbol time counter, processing for updating the opening/closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process for updating the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for determining a special symbol, the random number for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number for determining a hit, the random number for determining a normal symbol, and the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding initial value random value is set as a new cycle initial value to newly update the random value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial value random value update processing for updating the initial value random value for judging a big win, the initial random value for determining a special symbol, the initial random value for determining a hit, and the initial random value for determining a normal symbol, in the same way as in step S30.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc., and performs an input control process of setting predetermined data when there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol special electric control process for performing special symbol memory determination (jackpot determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening/closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), game state control, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal pattern memory determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electrical control process, the type of loss normal pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing for transmitting to the payout control board 120 a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, referring to later-described prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) and transmitting to the payout control board 120 a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and performs magnetic/radio wave anomaly determination processing for transmitting a magnetic anomaly error designation command or radio wave anomaly error designation command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, large winning opening opening/closing data to be output to the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol display device 60 and second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 62, and first special symbol. A data creation process for creating data such as special symbol reservation display data to be output to the reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 and normal symbol reservation display data to be output to the normal symbol reservation display 65 is performed.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, start opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Processing and an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 are performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, processing is performed to count the number of normal payouts, which is the number of payouts of prize balls based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, big winning opening starting opening) during the normal game state, the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a during the normal game state, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected by changes in the set values (irrelevant to the set values).

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number)×100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of the base storage area set in the RWM area for information.

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The base storage area includes a first area for storing the normal base value for the current game interval, a second area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the three previous game intervals. A base value will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, a process of setting performance display data to be displayed on the information display device 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every five seconds is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, so that the number of payouts and the number of outs are not counted, the performance information of the game machine is not calculated, and the performance information of the game machine is not displayed.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the winning ball counter (10 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for the winning balls is updated by adding the data indicating 10 winning balls, and the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and then the general winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When a detection signal from a big winning hole detecting switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to a winning ball counter (15 winning ball counter) for a big winning hole used for winning balls to update it, '1' is added to a winning ball counter (D) showing the number of game balls entering the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and it is determined whether or not a big winning game (special game) is currently being performed. When a jackpot game is currently being played, ``1'' is added to a round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls winning the jackpot 50 to update (C←C+1), and the jackpot detection switch input processing is terminated.

When the current game state is not the special game state, the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) indicating the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific prize winning port (second starting port 47, big winning port 50) outside the winning period is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is larger than a specified number (e.g. 10), and the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is determined to be the specified number. In the following cases, the big winning hole detection switch input process is terminated.

When the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is larger than the prescribed number, it is determined that the fraudulent winning (illegal winning) in which a game ball wins (enters a ball) outside the winning possible period occurs, and an error designation command for fraudulent winning is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening detection switch input processing is completed. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting port detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting port detection switch input processing shown in FIG. 6, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

When the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, the normal pattern reservation number is updated by adding "1", normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random number for normal pattern determination, random number for normal pattern variation pattern determination) is acquired, an empty storage part is searched in order from the first storage part in the normal pattern reservation storage area, the acquired normal pattern determination information is stored in the empty storage part, and the input control process is completed.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first starting port detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, acquires special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for determination of special figure variation pattern).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area is less than four in step S230-4. When the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is less than 4, the process is shifted to step S230-5, and when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) to update (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the updated first special symbol reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and stores acquired special symbol determination information in the empty storage units.

As described above, in the predetermined storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area, special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, and random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-determination processing, a pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, the special figure determination information (first reserved memory) acquired this time is determined before the special symbol variation display based on the determination information is performed, and a scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening prize designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the current first start opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start win-win designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start win-win designation command analyzes the first start win-win designation command, and can execute a pre-reading notice effect that executes a predetermined notice effect over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before and before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start win-win designation command. . Note that the pre-reading preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76.

Regarding the second start opening detection switch input process, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), the first special symbol storage designation command, the first pre-determination process, the first start opening winning designation command are respectively changed to the second start opening detection switch 47a, the second special design reservation storage area, the second reservation memory, the second special design reservation number (U2), the second special design storage designation command, and the second. The pre-determination process may be read as the second starting opening winning designation command.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special symbol processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special symbol processing data loaded in step S302, moves the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing (step S310) if the special symbol processing data = 0, moves the processing to the special symbol variation processing (step S320) if the special symbol processing data = 1, and moves the processing to the special symbol variation processing (step S320) if the special symbol processing data = 2, special symbol stop processing (step S3). 30), if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is moved to the jackpot game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game end processing (step S350).

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of special figure special electric control processing as will be described later, necessary subroutines are appropriately processed in the game.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing for determining a big hit, processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and processing for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more (is "0"), the special symbol fluctuation display and the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not a customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not a customer waiting state (a waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which is not executed is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is ``0'', a customer waiting state specifying command is set in a performance transmission data storage area assuming that the customer waiting state has already started, and the current special symbol memory determining processing is finished while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=0, and when the customer waiting state determining flag is not ``0'', the current special symbol storing determining processing is finished while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=0 assuming that the customer waiting state has already started.

When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, various random numbers (special figure determination information) stored in the first storage part to the fourth storage part in the second special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage part, and the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the second special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a big win determination (big win lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a big win game. Specifically, the special pattern determination of various random values (special map judgment information) shifted from the first memory portion of the second special pattern holding memory area (special map judgment information), the set value remembered in the set value of the RWM area for the RWM area for the game RWM area (here is 1 to 4), and the current probability gaming status, height. Based on the probability gaming status, determine whether it is a "jackpot" or "losing" that runs a jackpot.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage parts in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage part, and the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after subtraction. Set the symbol memory designation command in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a big win determination (big win lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a big win game. Specifically, the special patterns of various random values (special map judgment information) shifted from the first memory part of the first special pattern holding memory area (special map judgment information), the set value remembered in the set value of the RWM area for the RWM area for the RWM area for play (here, 1 to 4), and the current probability gaming status, highly gaming state, high. Based on the probability gaming status, determine whether it is a "jackpot" or "losing" that runs a jackpot.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol determination processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when a big winning decision is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage part of the second special symbol reservation storage area, a special big winning symbol or a losing special symbol is determined based on the random number value for big winning symbol stored in the 0th storage part, and a performance symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for performance. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when a big win determination is made based on the random number value for determining the special pattern stored in the 0th storage part of the first special symbol reserve storage area, a special pattern (special pattern for big win, special pattern for losing) is determined based on the random number value for the big win pattern stored in this 0th storage part, and a performance pattern designating command corresponding to the determined special pattern is set in the transmission data storage area for performance. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols. Specifically, when the big hit is determined based on the random number for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage part of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for the special symbol variation stored in the 0th storage part, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In addition, when a big hit is determined based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage part of the first special symbol reserve storage area, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation stored in the 0th storage part, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of special symbols in a predetermined processing area.

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700, so that the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=0 is set to special symbol electric processing data=1, preparations are made to move to a subroutine of special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing for determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=1.

When the fluctuation time has passed, the big winning special pattern or the losing special pattern determined in step S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 60 or the second special pattern display device 61, and the predetermined special pattern stop time (0.5 seconds) is set in the special pattern time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the big hit determination.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=1 is set to special symbol electric processing data=2, preparations are made to move to a special symbol stop processing subroutine, and this special symbol variation processing is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing to determine whether or not the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). When the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=2.

When the stop time elapses, when the number of times of reduced working hours>0, the counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the number of times of reduced hours, when the number of times of reduced hours=0, the time reduced game flag is cleared, when the number of times of high probability>0, 1 is subtracted from the counter of high probability and updated, and when the number of times of high probability=0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. When it is a jackpot special pattern, a time saving game flag, a high probability game flag, a time saving frequency counter and a high probability frequency counter are cleared, special symbol special electric processing data is set from 2 to special special electric processing data=3, preparations are made to shift to a subroutine of big winning game processing, and this special symbol stop processing is finished.

On the other hand, when the special pattern is lost, the special pattern special electric processing data is set from 2 to 0, preparations are made to move to a subroutine for special pattern storage determination processing, and the current special pattern stop processing is completed.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process for executing a first jackpot game, a second jackpot game, or a third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in step S310 (stopped symbol data).

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of round games (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls are won during this opening, or when the opening time of the big winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), output of drive data of a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening/closing member 51.例文帳に追加This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game for a predetermined number of times (4 or 16 times in this embodiment) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, the special figure special electric processing data = 3 is set to special figure special electric processing data = 4, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and this jackpot game processing is finished.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines a high-probability game state or a low-probability game state, and performs jackpot game end processing for determining either a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special pattern (stopped pattern data) set in step S310, a high probability game flag setting, a high probability number setting, a time saving game flag setting, and a time saving number setting are performed, the special pattern special electric processing data is set from 4 to 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the present big winning game end processing is completed.

(Description of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

The ``first special symbol storage specification command'' indicates the first special symbol reserved number (U1), and when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) increases or decreases, it is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130.

A ``second special symbol storage specification command'' indicates a second special symbol reservation number (U2), and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) increases or decreases, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" may be collectively referred to as "special symbol memory designation command".

A ``performance design designation command'' indicates the type (kind) of special designs to be stopped and displayed, and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when various special designs are determined and variable display of the special designs is started.

In addition, since the type of the special symbol ultimately determines the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends, the production pattern designation command can be said to indicate the jackpot type and the game state after the jackpot ends.

The "first special symbol variation pattern specifying command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the special symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 60.

The "second special symbol variation pattern specifying command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 61, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the special symbol variation display is started on the second special symbol display device 61.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern specification command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern specification command" may be collectively referred to as "variation pattern specification command".

A ``special symbol determination command'' indicates that a special symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set in a transmission data storage area for performance of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when a special symbol is stopped and displayed on a first special symbol display device 60 or a second special symbol display device 61.例文帳に追加

The 'normal pattern determination command' indicates that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal pattern display device 62 stops and displays the normal pattern, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加

The ``starting opening winning designation command'' is for notifying the result of big hit determination (lottery) to the performance control board 130 in advance, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47.例文帳に追加

A 'big win opening designation command' indicates the start of a big win game (special game), is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when various kinds of big win games are started.

A 'round designation command' indicates the number of rounds of a jackpot game, is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when a round game of a jackpot game is started.

The ``jackpot ending specifying command'' indicates the end of the jackpot game, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 when various kinds of jackpot games are finished.

A ``normal pattern storage specification command'' indicates a normal pattern reserved number (G1), and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when a value stored in a normal pattern reserved number (G1) storage area increases or decreases.

The ``normal pattern designation command'' indicates the type of normal patterns stopped and displayed on a normal pattern display device 62, and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when various normal patterns are determined and variable display of the normal patterns is started.

A ``normal pattern variation specification command'' indicates a normal pattern variation time in a normal pattern display device 62, is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when variable display of a normal pattern is started.

The ``opening designation command for winning'' indicates the start of a winning game (auxiliary game), is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when the winning game is started.

The ``winning ending specifying command'' indicates the end of various auxiliary games, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the winning game ends.

A ``game state designation command'' indicates whether or not it is a time-saving game state and whether or not it is a high-probability game state, and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 at the start of variation of special symbols, the end of variation of special symbols (at the start of a big win game), and the end of a big win.

The 'power-on designation command' and 'power-restoration designation command' indicate whether power-on of the game machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command corresponding to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game state is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

A 'customer waiting state specifying command' indicates that a customer waiting state in which variable display of special symbols is not performed is set, and when the customer waiting state is reached, it is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c and transmitted to a performance control board 130.例文帳に追加

The “error designation command” indicates that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 1 and the type of error. When the occurrence of a magnetic or radio wave abnormality is determined in the above-described magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process, the “error designation command” is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 when it is determined that a fraudulent prize has occurred in the above-described big winning hole detection switch input process or the above-described second start hole detection switch input process.

Also, when the payout control board 120 detects the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the fullness of the lower tray 12, or the payout abnormality, it is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c and transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加

An 'error cancellation designation command' indicates that an error occurring in the game machine 1 has been eliminated, and is set in a performance transmission data storage area of a main RAM 110c or a payout RAM 121c and transmitted to a performance control board 130 when the resolution of various abnormalities is detected.

A 'set value designation command' indicates a set value set in the game machine 1, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, specifically, after a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is transmitted.

(Main processing of production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and if various commands have been transmitted, stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. If a setting change designation command has been received, the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command has been received, the processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen, and to output a power-on sound from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a power restoration screen, or output a power restoration sound from the audio output device 9. note that,

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and when the customer waiting state designation command has been received, a process for performing a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output a customer waiting demonstration sound from the audio output device 9. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 12 .

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a game state designation command has been received, and if received, the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to determine whether or not the special symbol memory designation command or the normal symbol memory designation command is received, and when the command is received, the first special symbol reservation number, the second special symbol reservation number, the normal symbol reservation number, etc., stored in the sub-RAM 130c are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs look-ahead effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to determine whether or not a start-up winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received, and if received, processing relating to icon change performance, continuous advance notice performance, and lamp change performance as look-ahead system performance is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 .

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the reserved icon and the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing advance notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
"Lamp change effect" is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a performance design designation command, a special design variation pattern designation command, a special design determination command, a big winning opening designating command, a round designating command, a big winning ending designating command, etc. are received or not, and if they are received, a process for executing a performance corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a normal pattern designation command, a normal pattern variation designation command, a normal pattern determination command, an opening designation command for winning, an ending designation command for winning, etc. are received, and processing for executing performance corresponding to the received command is performed when they are received.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command is received, and if received, the processing for executing the error notification performance corresponding to the received error designation command or the processing for ending the error notification performance corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. When the customer waiting state designation command is not received, the processing is shifted to step E300-4, and when the customer waiting state designation command is received, in step E300-2, a demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 13) for determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is selected. Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is referred to, and one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is waiting for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect will not be executed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. When the demonstration standby timer is not 0, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed yet, and when the demonstration standby timer is 0, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is set in a transmission buffer in step E300-7, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. Four types of demonstration standby time of 30 seconds to 70 seconds are set as the demonstration standby time in the normal game state, and four types of demonstration standby time of 35 seconds to 75 seconds are set as the demonstration standby time in the specific game state.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored, the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the variation display of the performance symbols is completed (the variation time has elapsed), and the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the customer waiting demonstration performance is completed are different. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the performance symbols is finished (the fluctuation time has passed) and the performance symbols are statically displayed is longer than the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the performance pattern on the image display device immediately after power recovery is longer than the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the performance pattern is completed (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the performance pattern is statically displayed. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after statically displaying the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after power is restored is longer than the demonstration standby time after statically displaying the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that each demonstration waiting time in the specific game state (low-probability short-time playing state, high-probability short-time playing state) is longer than each demonstration waiting time in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 14, the look-ahead effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 .

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for executing the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changing the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the relevant icon). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lights the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode is changed), and ends the current look-ahead system effect process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the contents of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-8.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning to the first starting opening 45, it is in the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning to the second starting opening 47. It may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the pre-determination results of advance suspension (suspension storage corresponding to the previously received start-up winning designation command) are all normal reach or less, that is, all the pre-determination results of advance suspension are normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach. If all are equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if none is equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires the icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6, selects the final icon display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, and determines one final icon display mode from among a plurality of final icon display modes based on the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the starting opening prize designation command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-10, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of pending memories of the special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for the winning icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination processing. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the preliminary determination results of the precedent suspension are equal to or less than the normal ready-to-win state, but the icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the precedent hold is not to perform the ready-to-win effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed to be to perform the ready-to-win effect. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable performance corresponding to the preceding suspension in which the ready-to-win performance is executed, and the change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the variable performance corresponding to the preceding suspension in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the ready-to-win performance is not hindered by the icon change performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, even if the result of preliminary determination of the preceding suspension includes the ready-to-win performance, the icon change performance may be executed, but the icon-changing performance may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) when the preliminary determination result of the preceding suspension does not include the ready-to-win performance than when the ready-to-win performance is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

The final icon display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of the final display mode of each icon, and the final display mode of the icon to be selected.

A CD icon as a normal icon and a blue character icon, a red character icon and a rainbow character icon as special icons suggesting the possibility of a big win (a big win game is executed) are set in the final icon display mode.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to the special icon increases in the order of (CD icon<) blue character icon<red character icon<rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms a big win.

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach.

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode in the event of a big win, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the reserved memory number of the special symbols corresponding to the start-point winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated with each other, and for reference, the advance change in each change scenario and the update state of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command.

The change scenarios include a scenario (for example, scenario 01) in which the icon display mode does not change during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is not executed) but changes during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is executed), a scenario in which the icon display mode changes (the pending icon change effect is executed) but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is not executed) (for example, the scenario 02), a scenario in which the icon display mode is during the preliminary change, and A scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) that changes during execution of the change (in which the pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the icon display state is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (which may be a ready-to-win state other than the normal ready-to-win state) is executed in the preliminary change. When such a change scenario determination table is used, it is preferable to set various scenarios so that the icon display mode does not change during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed, and the icon display mode changes during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, but the change in the icon display mode occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed than during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed.

(Icon display mode update processing of effect control unit)
The icon display mode update processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing icon display mode update processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3 determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored. When the icon change scenario is not stored, the process is shifted to step E520-10 assuming that the power supply restoration which clears the change scenario from the sub RAM 130c occurs, and when the icon change scenario is stored, the process is shifted to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a pending icon that changes (updates) the display mode in the current variable effect. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-5, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 19) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-6. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19, one pending icon change pattern is determined from among a plurality of pending icon change patterns based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect and the selection rate (%).

In step E520-7, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed or a predetermined effect sound (change sound) is output according to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon display mode updating process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the icon corresponding to the stage of change of the icon in the current variation effect from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the corresponding icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22) for power failure for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, a change pattern determination table for the selected icon is referred to, and one icon change pattern is determined from among the plurality of icon change patterns based on the icon change mode in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern.

In step E520-12, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed or a predetermined effect sound (change sound) is output according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing.

As described above, according to the icon display mode updating process shown in FIG. 18, when the power is restored during execution of the icon change performance, the icon change performance may be executed again in the fluctuation performance started after the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the termination of the icon change effect due to the occurrence of power restoration, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even if the icon change effect is to be executed again in the variation effect that is started after the power supply is restored, the effect mode of the icon change effect is newly determined based on the current variation pattern, so that the change scenario before the power supply is restored (the stage suggested before the power supply is stopped) is not executed from the continuation. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when power recovery occurs during the execution of the icon change performance, in the variable performance started after the power recovery, the icon change performance may not be executed in the variable performance corresponding to the pending memory (special figure determination information) prior to the pending memory (special figure determination information) that triggered the execution of the icon change performance, and the icon change performance may be executed in the variable performance corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change performance.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

In the change pattern determination table for the pending icon, the mode of change of the pending icon in the current variable performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected are associated, and for reference, the pending icon change performance occurrence timing and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the disappearance of the icon, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during variation accompanied by the output of the sound effect, a character action change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the icon changes as an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point when the character appears, and the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the change effect. A pattern action change pattern 01 is set in which a change notification pattern indicating that the icon is to be set is temporarily stopped and displayed, and an action performance acting on the reservation icon is performed with the change notification pattern as a starting point to change the display mode of the reservation icon.

The change performance generation timing of the reserved icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable performance, and includes when the variable performance is started (at the start of the variation), when the variation performance is being executed (during fluctuation), and when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

As the stage of change of the reserved icon, 1UP for changing the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot to a display mode one step higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, or from a blue character icon to a red character icon) and 2UP for changing the degree of expectation to win a big win to a display mode two steps higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) are set.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
20 and 21 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, FIG. 20 is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by one step, and FIG. 21 is a table to be referred to when the display mode of the icon is to be changed by two steps.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon, the manner of change of the icon in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and for reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

As the icon change pattern, there are set a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of variation accompanied by the output of sound effect, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of sound effect, and a character action change pattern 01 in which action presentation acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point and the display mode of the icon changes when a character appears.

The change performance generation timing of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the variable performance, and includes when the variable performance is started (at the start of variation), when the variable performance is being executed (during fluctuation), and when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

As the change stages of the icon, 1UP for changing the degree of expectation for winning the big win to a display mode one step higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, or from a blue character icon to a red character icon) and 2UP for changing the degree of expectation for winning a big win to a display mode two steps higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, or a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) are set.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo-continuous effect" is to make it appear as if the variable display of the performance symbols has been executed multiple times for the jackpot determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. It is a variable display of a special mode of effect symbol that performs re-variable display once or multiple times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relevant icon change pattern determination table for power failure)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an icon change pattern determination table for power failure, which is referred to when determining the icon change pattern.

In the icon change pattern determination table for power failure, the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the final display mode of the icon to be selected, and the icon change pattern to be selected are associated with each other.

Note that the icon change pattern, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon, and the stage of change of the icon are the same as those described in the change pattern determination table for the icon described above, so descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

(Relationship between change effect occurrence frequency between pending icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the appearance frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of change performance is higher at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the prescribed command than at the prescribed frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change performance is lower at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command.

That is, it can be said that the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon more easily when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change performance is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of change presentation is lower at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the prescribed command than at the prescribed frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

That is, it can be said that the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon more easily when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is the change effect (win-time change effect) of displaying the hold icon with a special icon at the timing when the game ball wins the start hole (the first start hole 45, the second start hole 47) and the hold icon is displayed, and the normal change pattern 01.
In addition, the change effect that occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command is the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the timing of occurrence of the change performance has the relationship as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change performance of changing to a red character icon with a higher expectation of winning the big win than the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the change performance generation timing, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, since the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the prescribed command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change performance of changing to the blue character icon than the prescribed frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, it is difficult to change to the red character icon with high expectation of winning the jackpot in the early stage of the variation performance, but it is easy to change to the blue character icon.

(Relationship 1 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the changing effect occurrence frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher for the pending icon change effect than for the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the pending icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change performance generation frequency and the change performance generation timing has the relationship as described above, the reserved icon is likely to change at an early stage of the variation performance, so that the player's expectation for the big win game can be pulled over a long period of time, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the changing effect generation frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect generation timing.

When the change effect occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the frequency of occurrence of the icon change effect is higher than that of the pending icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change performance generation frequency and the change performance generation timing has the relationship as described above, the icon is likely to change in the period when the variation performance is late, so that the interest of the game can be improved by drawing the player's expectation for the big winning game until the time when the variation performance is late.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 23D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, when the hold icon and the blue character icon as the icon are generated (changed), the second generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed), and when the hold icon and the red character icon as the icon are generated (changed), the third generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). is output, and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of icon change.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of a plurality of icon display modes (four types). However, two types of notification sounds may be used, namely, the notification sound generated when the CD icon is generated and the change notification sound when the icon changes to the blue character icon, the red character icon, and the rainbow character icon. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types of special change notification sounds may be provided.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E530-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is during the period in which the continuous announcement performance can be executed, the process is shifted to step E530-4, and if it is not in the period during which the continuous announcement performance can be executed, the process is moved to step E530-6 assuming that the continuous announcement performance is not executed.

The "executable period of continuous advance notice effect" means that the jackpot game is not being executed, the continuous notice effect is not being executed, and the continuous notice effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning to the first starting opening 45, it is in the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning to the second starting opening 47. It may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the announcement scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect. Details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later. This advance notice scenario indicates the transition of the advance notice effect over one or more variable effects.

In step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the announcement scenario, sets it in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current continuous announcement effect determination process. Specifically, referring to the notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 25, one notice scenario is decided from among a plurality of notice scenarios (including non-announcement scenarios) based on the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the start win prize designation command, the type of the start win prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario. Details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario in which the continuous announcement effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current continuous announcement effect determination process.

(Advance scenario determination table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an advance notice scenario determination table referred to when deciding an advance notice scenario for continuous advance notice effects.

In the notice scenario determination table, the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the starting opening prize designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the starting opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the notice scenario to be selected are associated, and for reference, the advance change in each notice scenario and the performance mode of the notice performance in the change are described.

The advance notice scenarios include a non-announcement scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the notice effect is not executed in which an effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a at the start of the variable effect, a scenario in which no effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a at the start of the preliminary change, but an effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a at the start of the change (for example, scenario 01), and a scenario in which the effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a at the start of the preliminary change and at the start of the change (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) are set.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the variation pattern specification command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E540-3 determines whether or not the announcement scenario is stored. When the change notice scenario is stored, the process is shifted to step E540-4, and when the notice scenario is not stored, the process proceeds to step E540-6 assuming that the power restoration has occurred in which the notice scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines a continuous announcement pattern (effect mode) corresponding to the announcement scenario in step E540-4, and sets a continuous announcement effect command corresponding to the determined continuous announcement pattern in the transmission buffer in step E540-5. Thereby, a continuous notice performance command is transmitted to a display/sound control part 140 and a lamp/driving control part 150, a continuous notice performance is executed according to the continuous notice pattern, and an effect image is displayed around the performance pattern 70a or a prescribed effect sound is output at the start of the variable performance.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a selects an alternative notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 27) for determining whether or not to execute the alternative notice effect as compensation for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration, and determines the notice pattern. Specifically, a selected alternative notice pattern determination table is referenced, and one alternative notice pattern is decided from among a plurality of alternative notice patterns based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern. Details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

The 'alternative advance notice effect' is an effect for compensating for a continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect that the big win game will be executed by displaying any one of a plurality of mini-characters with different expectations for the big win on the image display device.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice performance is not to be executed, the present continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated as the substitute notice performance is not executed, and if the alternative notice performance is to be executed, the substitute notice performance command corresponding to the substitute notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the current continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated. As a result, an alternative notice performance command is transmitted to a display/audio control part 140 and a lamp/driving control part 150, an alternative notice performance is executed according to the alternative notice pattern, and a mini-character is displayed on the first image display device 70 or a prescribed effect sound is output.

As described above, according to the continuous announcement performance execution processing shown in FIG. 26, when the power supply is restored (power cutoff) during execution of the continuous announcement performance, the alternative announcement performance different from the continuous announcement performance may be executed without restarting the continuous announcement performance in the variable performance started after the power recovery. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous announcement effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding an alternative notice pattern.

In the alternative notice pattern determination table, the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern are associated with each other, and the performance mode in each alternative notice pattern is described as a reference.

As alternative notice patterns, there are set a pattern 00 in which no alternative notice performance is executed, a pattern 01 in which a mini character A is displayed on an image display device, a pattern 02 in which a mini character B is displayed in the image display device, a pattern 03 in which a mini character C is displayed in the image display device, and a pattern 04 in which a mini character D is displayed on the image display device.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to mini-characters is higher in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is sure to win a big win.

A first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that an alternative notice pattern for executing an alternative notice performance is more likely to be decided for a variation pattern with a high jackpot winning expectation than a variation pattern with a low jackpot winning expectation. By doing so, the alternative notice performance is executed when the possibility that the continuous notice performance has been executed before the restoration of the power supply is more likely to be executed, the dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous notice performance can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that the alternative notice pattern for executing the alternative notice performance is more likely to be determined when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggers the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension that triggers the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous advance notice performance after the restoration of the power source, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the variable performance to be executed after the power supply is restored, it is determined whether or not to execute the later-described big-hit foretelling performance (speech foretelling performance, step-up foretelling performance), so the execution probability of the big-hit foretelling performance may be increased more than usual, so that the alternative foretelling performance may not be executed.

Also in this case, it is preferable that the big hit notice performance is more likely to be executed when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggers the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed than the case where the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension that triggers the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed. In this way, after the power is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance corresponds to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous advance notice performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Ramp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. When the icon change scenario is stored, the process is shifted to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change performance is executed, and when the icon change scenario is not stored, the process is shifted to step E550-6 assuming that the power supply restoration for clearing the change scenario from the sub RAM 130c has occurred.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp performance command is transmitted to a lamp/driving control part 150, and a lamp change performance is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the color change of the icon.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp changing performance execution processing is ended, and when the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp changing performance execution processing is ended.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c in step E550-7, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step E550-8, and ends the current lamp change effect execution process. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

Thus, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 28, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the icon change in the icon change effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by synergistic effect with the icon change performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change performance execution processing shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change performance and the continuous notice performance, even if the power source is restored during the execution of the lamp change performance, the lamp change performance is not executed again or the alternative notice performance is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to secure the rarity of the ramp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power recovery. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the prize winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. may be determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance may be executed.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 29, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variation effect pattern determination process (the process of determining the variation effect pattern based on the variation pattern designation command) in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

At step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and at step E650-2, selects a big hit notice determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the notice pattern of the big win notice performance making the player expect the big win game to be executed, and decides the notice pattern. Specifically, one notice pattern is determined from a plurality of notice patterns (including non-prediction patterns) based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern by referring to a jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. Details of the jackpot announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a forewarning pattern for executing a dialogue forewarning effect. If it is the announcement pattern for executing the speech announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-4, and if it is not the announcement pattern for executing the dialogue announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-6.

The ``word foretelling performance'' is a kind of big hit foretelling performance in which a speech image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed on an image display device in response to operation of a performance button 17 during an effective period occurring during a variable performance, and a voice corresponding to the speech image is output from a voice output device 9. - 特許庁Specifically, when a big win game is executed (higher expectation for a big win) than when the big win game is not executed, a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, and when the line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the performance button 17 is vibrated, for example, for one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview effect, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, a speech pattern determination table is referred to, and one speech pattern is decided from among a plurality of speech patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each speech pattern.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the speech pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a speech advance notice performance command is transmitted to a display/audio control part 140 and a lamp/driving control part 150, and a speech advance notice performance corresponding to the speech pattern is executed, so that the speech image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the voice corresponding to the speech image is output from the speech output device 9.例文帳に追加

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is shifted to step E650-7, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination processing is terminated.

A ``step-up notice performance'' is a kind of jackpot notice performance in which step performance is executed in a predetermined order until one of a plurality of steps (stages) from a first step (first stage) to a final step (final stage). Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the big win game is executed (higher expectation for the big win) than when the big win game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, one step-up pattern is determined from among a plurality of step-up patterns by referring to a step-up pattern determination table and based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current jackpot notice effect determination process. Thereby, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to a display/audio control part 140 and a lamp/driving control part 150, a step-up notice performance corresponding to a step-up pattern is executed, a step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an effect sound corresponding to the step image is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

(Jackpot notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a big-hit announcement effect determination process referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the big-hit announcement effect.

The jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected are associated with the big win notice determination table.

The notice patterns are set with a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which a dialogue notice performance is executed, and a notice pattern in which a step-up notice performance is executed, and the degree of expectation for jackpot winning is higher when the step-up notice performance is executed than when the speech notice performance is executed.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141 .

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the supervising CPU 142, and the supervising CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, in step T1, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step T2, performs initialization processing. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step T3, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission for permitting timer interrupt, and in step T4, refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 to determine whether or not a performance instruction command is received from the performance control unit 130m.If not, the process proceeds to step T7.

The production instruction commands include a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

An animation group is a group formed by bundling one or a plurality of animation patterns, which are defined (specified) information such as the type of object that constitutes an effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) for displaying the effect image, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), the drawing method, information specifying the image display device for displaying the effect image, etc.

The types of animation groups include, for example, a performance pattern group for displaying the animation of the performance pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying the animation of the pending icon and the icon, a variable performance group for displaying the animation of the variable performance such as the background and characters, a notice performance group for displaying the animation such as the notice, and a special game performance group for displaying the animation of the special game performance.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, determines whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating frame update timing for updating the effect image displayed on the image display device (drawing a new effect image).

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 performs display list generation/output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and is generated for each frame (frame update timing) of one unit or multiple units. In the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process to be described later, a display list for one frame is generated corresponding to the current number of frames in which drawing control commands are set according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs, but the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs a drawing instruction process for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw the effect image based on the output display list. By executing this drawing command process, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and performs the process of displaying the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound list generation/output processing for generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148. FIG.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is generated based on drawing frames when outputting new sounds.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output sound based on the output sound list. By executing this sound output command process, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sounds based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and output from the audio output device 9 is terminated so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing.

Although the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 may be stopped so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then shifts the processing to step T4, and thereafter repeats the processing from steps T4 to T13 in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit)
Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141, and this processing is executed by receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs command reception processing for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. Specifically, the process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit)
V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. The V blank interrupt processing is executed each time a V blank signal is received (1/30 second=approximately 33 ms) from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every time the display of one frame of effect image is completed (1/30 second=approximately 33 ms).

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs a counter updating process of updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, by adding "1").

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to the 'drawing frame buffer' and the 'display frame buffer' each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms).

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has switched, and terminates the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of the change effect at the time of winning)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) a blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal change period in which the normal change of the effect pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 45 .

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed with a blue character icon when winning a prize, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is not started.

At timing T3, the image data c (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data b drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts to output the second generated notification sound. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data h (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Also, the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer to the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this manner, the output of the second generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared with the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound are started with a lag, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, while the output of the second generated notification sound is started in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the erasing of the blue character icon and the stoppage of the output of the second generated notification sound are performed at different frame update timings, so that the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Example of a change effect when winning a prize)
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) a blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), in a state in which the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which not even one reserved memory is stored, the normal variable performance for variably displaying the performance pattern 70a is executed.

Here, based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 45, a starting hole winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control part 130m, the icon change performance determination processing is executed, and "scenario 02" (the display mode of the first holding icon is displayed by the blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined as the changing scenario.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36(b), in response to the game ball winning the first starting port 45, the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the second generated notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(c), a stop display is performed with a combination ("234" in this case) indicating that the effect pattern 70a that has been variably displayed is a failure, and the icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(e), a ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is variably displayed in the center variable display region while the performance pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the variable presentation. The same applies to FIGS. 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47 below.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
37 and 38 are timing charts showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period during which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the image display device is in a state where the stop effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 for changing the first reserved icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is not started.

At timing T3, the image data c (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data b drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts to output the second generated notification sound. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data h (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data h that was drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer to the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this manner, the output of the second generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared with the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound are started with a lag, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, while the output of the second generated notification sound is started in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the erasing of the blue character icon and the stoppage of the output of the second generated notification sound are performed at different frame update timings, so that the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when changing the display mode of the first pending icon to a blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (during shift).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, it is assumed that the stop display of the performance symbol indicating the failure is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 displayed in the second display portion 70B2 is displayed with its display mode changed to a blue character icon when it is shifted and displayed in the first display portion 70B1. Also, the CD icon is changed to a blue character icon and displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(c), a stop display is performed with a combination (here, "164") indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is a failure, and the icon (CD icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(d), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(e), while the performance pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display areas of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, the ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is variably displayed in the center variable display area.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of character effect change pattern 01)
40 and 41 are timing charts showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the performance control part 130m decides to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but the character or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is not started.

At timing T2, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data c drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data d drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 63rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data e drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data g (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data f drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and display of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer to the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen g (character display) is displayed, but the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data i (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the normal variable effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts to output the third generated notification sound. The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, the drawing of the image data k (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, the display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen j (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data l (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this manner, the output of the third generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared with the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a difference in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the stoppage of the output of the third generated notification sound are performed at different frame update timings, so that the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Production example of character action change pattern 01)
FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character effect change pattern 01) during variable effects.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), in a state in which the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which not even one reserved memory is stored, the normal variable performance for variably displaying the performance pattern 70a is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42(b), after the character C1 is displayed, the character C1 throws a kiss and an effect is performed in which the heart H is blown toward the icon (CD icon) TH, as shown in FIG. 42(c).

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 42(d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third generated notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(a), a ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is variably displayed in the center variable display region while the performance pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display regions of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 43(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(c), when the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, it suggests a big win, and the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed is stop-displayed in a combination (here, "222") indicating the big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of pattern action change pattern 01)
44 and 45 are timing charts showing various timings when the symbol effect change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the red character icon.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is decided to execute a character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first reserved icon to a red character icon, but no change pattern or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is not started.

Also, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and display of the image data c drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period during which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data d drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, and the image data e drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data f drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the second frame buffer, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the temporary stop effect display screen h (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9. The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data j (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, the temporary stop effect display screen i (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, the drawing of the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, the display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen j (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data l (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen k (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this manner, the output of the third generated notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared with the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a difference in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the stoppage of the output of the third generated notification sound are performed at different frame update timings, so that the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Production example of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the suspended icon is changed to a red character icon (symbol action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in a state in which the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, the normal variable effect of variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(b), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left variable display area, "3" in the right variable display area, and "change" in the central variable display area is stopped (temporarily stopped display), an effect like a lightning bolt appears toward the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1, and when it hits, the first pending icon H11 is displayed. The display mode changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third generated notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(a), a ready-to-win performance is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is variably displayed in the center variable display region while the performance pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display regions of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 47(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(c), when the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, it suggests a big win, and the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed is stop-displayed in a combination (here, "222") indicating a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size, and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the effect control unit 130m executes a change effect at a frame update timing corresponding to receiving a predetermined command (starting opening winning designation command or variation pattern designation command), and there are cases where a change effect is executed at a predetermined frame update timing after the effect control unit 130m receives the change pattern designation command.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the start winning designation command, but the method is not limited to such a determination method. For example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time it becomes possible to change the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon). Further, only the final display mode is determined when the performance control part 130m receives the start-up winning designation command, and how to change may be determined every time when the display mode of the icon (the icon, the reserved icon) can be changed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are four types of display modes of the icons (the relevant icon and the pending icon), the CD icon as the normal icon, and the blue character icon, the red character icon, and the rainbow character icon as the special icons, but the number of types is not limited to four, and may be as many or as few as possible.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided to indicate that the likelihood of winning a big win is lower than that of the blue character icon and that it may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, it is desirable that the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change performance occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) are not changed to the special icon because the expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than that of the blue character icon. In this way, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change performance occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), which are easily changed to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for winning a big hit, do not change to a special icon.

Also, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the degree of expectation for winning a big hit related to the icons (the relevant icon, the reserved icon) should be increased in the order of (CD icon <) flashing CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the character action change pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01, when the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is always changed. When such a trick effect is provided, the execution ratio of the cheat effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) is higher than the change effect at the time of winning and the cheat effect for the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (variation). It is desirable to be able to execute only the fake effect for the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the pattern designation command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed multiple times during one variation effect, but may be executed multiple times. In this case, since the change performance at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change performance occurring at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command) have only one timing during the variation performance, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (the change performance occurring at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) can be executed multiple times. By doing so, there is a possibility that the display mode of the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) may change a plurality of times in one variable effect, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effects (the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is the frame update timing two frames after the number of frames in which the predetermined command (starting win prize designation command or variation pattern designation command) is received.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 was not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change performance is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the variation pattern designation command, but not limited to this timing, for example, the change performance may be executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the special pattern storage designation command or the performance design designation command.

In the present embodiment, when "normal change pattern 02", "character action change pattern 01", and "symbol action change pattern 01" are executed, the change effect is executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command, but the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when an icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect for notifying that the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) has changed. However, in addition to outputting the icon generation (change) notification sound, the lighting device 76 for the board and/or the lighting device 10 for the frame may be used to emit a lamp in the same color as the color of the display mode of the changed icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon). . In this case, the lamps of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may start emitting light in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (the main liquid crystal), in the same manner as the output of the notification sound for the occurrence (change) of the icon. may be terminated).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the pending icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command) can be executed, but the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) may not be executable. By doing so, since the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short fluctuation time, by restricting the execution of the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change performance occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) executed during the fluctuation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without impairing the gameability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the pending icon or the icon itself, but it is not limited to such a change, and without changing the display mode of the pending icon or the icon itself (the CD icon remains), a color effect indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot may be displayed around the pending icon or the icon, or a character indicating the degree of expectation of winning the big win may be displayed around (near) the pending icon or the icon. A character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-continuation") may be displayed in (neighborhood) to suggest an effect to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the change scenario is determined regardless of whether the big win is successful or not. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from among a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the current number of reservations, the hit/loss of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%).

In this way, when the change scenario is determined with reference to the win or loss of the big win, when the big win is won and the red character icon changes, the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario changing to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected when the current pending number is '3' or '4' than when the current number is '1' or '2'.
In other words, in the case of winning a jackpot and changing to a red character icon, it can be said that the selection rate (%) in which the changing scenario of changing to a red character icon is less likely to be selected when the current pending number is ``1'' or ``2'' than when the current number is ``3'' or ``4''.
In addition, when the big win is not won, that is, when the icon changes to a red character icon due to a loss, a selection rate (%) may be set to make it more difficult to select a changing scenario in which the icon changes to the red character icon when winning than when the big win is won and the icon changes to the red character icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, when determining the pending icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current pending number or the hit/loss of the jackpot, but it may be determined by referring to the current pending number or the hit/loss of the jackpot. Specifically, one pending icon change pattern may be determined from among a plurality of pending icon change patterns based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variable performance, the current number of pending, the hit/loss of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%).

In this way, when the pending icon change pattern is determined by referring to the current pending number and the winning/losing of the jackpot, when the big win is won and the red character icon changes, the selection rate (%) may be set so that the 'normal change pattern 01' is more likely to be selected as the pending icon change pattern when the current pending number is '3' or '4' than when the current pending number is '1' or '2'.
In other words, when a big win is won and the icon changes to a red character icon, it can be said that the selection rate (%) at which the 'normal change pattern 01' is less likely to be selected as the hold icon change pattern when the current hold number is '1' or '2' than when the current hold number is '3' or '4'.
In addition, when the big win is not won, that is, when the icon changes to a red character icon due to a loss, a selection rate (%) may be set so that the 'normal change pattern 01' is less likely to be selected as the reserved icon change pattern than when the big win is won and the icon changes to the red character icon.

As described above, when changing to the red character icon in the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect occurring at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command), the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the current pending number is '3' or '4' than when the current number is '1' or '2', so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modified example of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

The modification of the first embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), a special symbol display area for displaying a special symbol TZ that is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is provided in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70.

Also, at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the current second special symbol reserved number (U2) are also different from the first embodiment.

The first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F correspond to the first pending information, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D correspond to the second pending information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C corresponds to the execution information.

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a timing chart for starting a variable effect from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 49(a) to (f) and FIGS. 50(g) to (k) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F, and the pending icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number and the non-animated increasing display of the first pending icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a normal size on the first display unit 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 5th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) at which the number of reserved first special patterns (U1) is decreased from '1' to '0' and the fluctuation performance (variation display of special patterns) by the normal fluctuation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the decreasing display of the first reserved number by non-animation, and the display by changing the first reserved icon to the icon by animation (decreasing display) are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design).

The timing of T3 is the tenth frame timing after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the fourteenth frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the start of the display (decrease display) due to the change to the first pending icon. At this timing, the display due to the change to the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(e), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH, and the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the center variable display area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbols 70a in the central variable display area, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbols 70a in the right variable display area is started, and the effect symbols 70a are scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(h), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, and the performance symbol 70a continues to be scrolled in the center and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the right variable display area, and the effect symbol 70a continues to be scrolled in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (swayed) in the center variable display area, and the combination of the effect patterns 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a "365". Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the reserved number of special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, since the increase display of the reserved number and the reserved icon by non-animation ends in the shortest period (time) of one frame, it is possible to shift immediately to the variable performance (reduced display of the reserved number and display by changing to the reserved icon) so as not to delay, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the notification sound output in synchronism with the start of the increasing display of the reserved numbers and the reserved icons continues until the (frame update) timing after the end of the increased display of the reserved numbers and the reserved icons (frame update), so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the reserved number of special symbols is reduced (changed from '1' to '0'), the decremental display of the reserved number by non-animation and the change of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed, so that the player can surely recognize that the reserved number of special symbols is reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, since the timing at which the decrease display of the reserved number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change of the reserved icon to the icon concerned is completed (frame update), the change of the reserved number of special patterns is produced, and the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special patterns is reduced by the reserved number, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, the performance pattern is not scrolled (not updated to the next performance pattern) until the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, and the scrolling of the performance pattern (update to the next performance pattern) is started at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (frame update), so that it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the game that the variable performance is started after the reserved memory is reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the reserved number of special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increasing display of the reserved icon without animation, animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue longer than the increasing display of the reserved number. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the display of the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, if the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, either may be started first. By doing so, the degree of freedom of display control can be improved, and the fact that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased can be grasped at an early stage, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Instead of starting the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (the start is delayed than usual), the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) may be started at the timing (frame update) slightly before the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 52(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first hold number and the increment display of the first hold icon with animation are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1", and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display unit 70B1 and starts enlarged display. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 is terminated and the icon is displayed in the normal size.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases, the increased display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increased display of the reserved icon by animation are executed, so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the reserved number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the reserved icon is completed (frame update), the change of the reserved number of special patterns is produced, and the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special patterns has increased due to the reserved number, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of the variable performance, the increase display of the reserved icon is executed over a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state, so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the notification sound output in synchronism with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronism with the end of the increasing display of the pending icon (frame update), it is possible to effectively produce the fact that the number of special pattern pending numbers has increased, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) associated with the increase display of the reserved icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) associated with the display of the change of the reserved icon to the corresponding icon, it is possible to emphasize the start of the variable presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon are not started at the same (frame update) timing, but if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, either may be started first. By doing so, the increase in the number of reserved special symbols can be grasped at an early stage while the degree of freedom of display control is improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be made longer than the period of displaying the pending icon to change to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period associated with the increase display of the pending icon than the period associated with the display of the pending icon changing to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 54(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Also, "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, a first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decreasing display of the first reserved number, the animated display of the first reserved icon changing to the icon, and the animated reduced display of the first reserved icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". Further, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display portion 70B2 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number is started, but since the display by the change of the first pending icon and the decreasing display are being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, are put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the display due to the change of the first pending icon and the decrease display (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the display due to the change of the first pending icon and the decrease display are terminated. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(d), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH. In addition, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and continues to be displayed in an enlarged manner. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 ends and is displayed in the normal size. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the reserved number of reserved symbols increases during the execution of the display of the reserved icon to change to the icon and the reduced display of the reserved icon, even before the display due to the change and the reduced display are completed (frame update), the increasing display of the reserved number is started.

In addition, when the number of reserved symbols is increased during the execution of the display due to the change of the reserved icon to the relevant icon and the reduced display of the reserved icon, the increase display of the reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are waited (restricted), and at the timing when the display due to the change of the reserved icon and the decreased display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started. becomes.

The notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the holding number instead of outputting the generating notification sound in synchronization with the increasing display of the holding icon executed after the increasing display of the holding number.

In addition, instead of starting the increase display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound (the start is delayed than usual) at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon and the decreased display are completed (frame update), the increased display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound may be started at the timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the display due to the change of the pending icon and the decreased display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, even if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the increasing display of the reserved icon, the increased display of the reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are on standby (restricted) in the same manner as the display due to the change of the reserved icon or the decreased display.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 56(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, respectively, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is continued in the central variable display area. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area start to move to the upper left of the screen and to be reduced.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen, a confrontation production is started in which the friend character C2 and the enemy character C3 face each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first suspended icon) displayed in the suspended icon display area (the first suspended icon display area 70B, the second suspended icon display area 70D) is hidden together with the suspended icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the production symbol 70a, and is in the ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, increasing display of the first reserved number by non-animation is started, but since the SP ready-to-win performance (showdown performance) is being executed, the increased display of the first reserved icon and the output of the notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated are not performed at this timing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not it is a big hit) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is temporarily stopped at a combination ("777") indicating a big win (becomes in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(f), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a that has been displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (a state of being shaken). Also, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Then, finally, the effect pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a, "777". Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), even before the end of the specific performance (frame update), the increased display of the reserved numbers is started, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), the execution of the increased display of the reserved icons is put on standby (restricted), and the increased display of the reserved icons is started at the timing (frame update) when the specific performance is completed (the lost performance symbols or the jackpot performance symbols that have been displayed in reduced size are enlarged), so that it is possible to prevent the transition of the reserved number of special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increased display of the reserved icons is started at the timing when the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance) is finished, the increased display of the reserved icons is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so that even if there is an extreme lag between the timing when the number of reserved special symbols is increased and the timing when the increased display of the reserved icons is performed, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the increased display of the pending icon is started at the timing when the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so that the generated notification sound makes it difficult for the players to misunderstand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased at the timing when the specific performance ends, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Even when the reserved number of special symbols increases during the execution of the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), it is preferable that the increased display of the reserved numbers is executed while the execution of the increased display of the reserved icons is on standby (restricted), and the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase is collectively executed in one frame at the timing when the specific performance is finished (frame update).

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), the generated notification sound may be output in synchronism with the increasing display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generated notification sound.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
With reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, a specific example when the number of pending games increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 57 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 58(a) to (f) and FIGS.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively, and the icon TH is displayed. Further, the upper part of the screen displays the number of variable performances executable in the specific game state (here, ``remaining 0 times''), and the upper right part of the screen displays a right-handed image MU for prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending number by non-animation is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, are not performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and the combination of the effect patterns 70a indicating a failure is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display showing the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and the characters "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific game state and the number of times of the big win games executed during the predetermined advantageous period "Big Win x 1" are displayed. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the first image display device 70 additionally displays the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination "285" as the performance symbol 70a. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the second reserved number, the change display of the second reserved icon to the icon by animation, the reduced display of the second reserved icon by animation, the non-animated return display of the first reserved icon, and the non-animated increased display of the first reserved icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(g), in the first image display device 70, the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", and the second pending icon (CD icon) H21 displayed in the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the second display unit 70D4 displayed in the fourth display unit 70D4. Hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 start moving (shifting) toward the next display section.

In addition, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design). In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the display by the change of the second pending icon and the decrease display (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the display due to the change of the second pending icon and the decrease display are terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(h), in the first image display device 70, the second suspended icon H21 moved from the first display portion 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TH, and the second suspended icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display portions, and the reduction display of the effect pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the display due to the change of the second pending icon and the decrease display (520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the performance symbols 70a in the left variable display region, the scrolling (downward movement) of the performance symbols 70a in the center variable display region is started.

In this way, when the first special pattern reserved number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted) while the increased display of the first reserved number is started, so that the player can be made to recognize that the special pattern reserved number has increased even during execution of the specific performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first reserved icon is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specific game state ends (frame update), so even if the increased display of the first reserved number executed before that is overlooked, the increase in the first special pattern reserved number can be recognized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, when the increasing display of the first reserved icon is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specific game state is finished, the increasing display of the reserved icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so that even if there is an extreme lag between the timing when the number of reserved special symbols is increased and the timing when the increased display of the reserved icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the increased display of the reserved icons is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specific game state is finished, the generated notification sound is not output, so that the generated notification sound makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the reserved number of special symbols has increased at the timing when the specific game state is finished, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the performance pattern is not scrolled (not updated to the next performance pattern) until the display due to the change of the pending icon to the icon is completed, and the scrolling of the performance pattern (update to the next performance pattern) is started at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (frame update), so that the progress of the performance during the variable performance can be easily grasped, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Even when the number of reserved first special symbols increases in a plurality during the specific game state, the increased display of the reserved number is executed, and the execution of the increased display of the reserved icons is waited (restricted), and the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase can be collectively executed in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (last variable performance) ends (frame update).

In addition, when the number of first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first suspended icon display area 70B and the second suspended icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but only the first suspended icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) without setting (displaying) the second suspended icon display area 70D.

In the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed or not during the variable effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but may be set (displayed) on the second image display device 71, and may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display device different from the image display device (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.). And, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the special symbol pending number by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. This processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp/drive control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing to "1" for executing the origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17).

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. When the initial processing number is not '1', the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and when the initial processing number is '1', the origin return processing is performed in step R104, and the present initial processing of the accessory is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are returned to the origin position, and the initial processing number is set to "2". Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. When the initial processing number is not ``2'', the current role initial processing is terminated assuming that the initial action processing of the role is not executed, and when the initial processing number is ``2'', the initial action processing is performed and the current role initial processing is terminated. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

In this way, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation processing for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not executed at the same time. By doing so, the return operation to the origin position of various roles and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation and the initial light emission can be separately confirmed.

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 60, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. By doing so, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp/drive control section)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in the lamp/drive control unit 150. As shown in FIG.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". When the board accessory processing number is not "0", the processing is shifted to step R105-3, and when the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the first movable member 73 is set as an object to be driven to return to the origin, and the processing is shifted to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. When the board accessory processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105-12, and when the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the second movable member 74 is set as the driven object to return to the origin, and the processing is shifted to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the ramp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, updates the board function abnormality determination timer by +1 for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the movable member does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the movable member to be driven has a return abnormality, and the processing is shifted to step R105-9, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, the processing is shifted to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-10 clears the board accessory abnormality judgment timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is '0', the board accessory processing number is updated to '1' so as to drive the second movable member 74, and if the board accessory processing number is '1', the board accessory processing number is updated to '2' to end the processing of returning the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the performance button drive motor for moving the performance button 17 so that the performance button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, updates the frame accessory abnormality determination timer by +1 for determining the occurrence of return abnormality in which the performance button 17 does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, and the processing is shifted to step R105-17.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets "2" for executing the initial action processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number, and ends the current origin return processing.

Thus, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin positions at the same time (at the same time), but are returned to the origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent the inconvenience that both the movable members are damaged at the same time.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the operation of returning the frame accessory (the effect button 17) to the origin position can be performed simultaneously (simultaneously). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motion of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return motion of various accessories is never finished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, when both the return operation to the origin position of the board accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) and the return operation to the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed, the processing for shifting to the initial operation processing is performed. By doing so, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories can be separately confirmed.

Although the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin positions in a predetermined order (in the order of the first movable member 73 → the second movable member 74), the operations to return to the origin positions may be started at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motions of various characters to be executed next.

(Initial operation processing of lamp/drive control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. When the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and when the return abnormality information is set, the board function processing number is set to "2" assuming that the board accessory is not initialized and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of command at power ON and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. When the board accessory processing number is not '1', the processing is shifted to step R107-11, and when the board accessory processing number is '1', the initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If the initial action of the board role has not been completed in all processes, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the initial action of the board role has been completed in all processes, the board role process number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing product processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. When the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame role is performed, and when the return abnormality information is set, the frame role processing number is set to "2" assuming that the frame role is not initialized, and the process is transferred to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. When the frame role processing number is not '1', the process is shifted to step R107-21, and when the frame role processing number is '1', in step R107-18, the initial operation of the frame role object is executed according to the frame role object initial operation pattern set in the lamp RAM 150c.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. When the initial motion of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and when the initial motion of the frame role has been completed in all steps, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing.

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 62, the initial action of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial actions of various roles, and to prevent obstruction of performance actions of various roles during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 constituting the frame accessory, the initial operation of the production button 17 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete failure or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 62, the initial action process ends when both the initial action of the board accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) are completed. In this way, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the performance action, which prevents the occurrence of a state in which it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the performance action.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power-on, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 determined when a power-on designation command is received, patterns 04 to 06 determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating a customer waiting state is received, and patterns 07 to 09 determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is being played is received.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin.
The 'initial operation pattern 02' is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 does not operate, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→origin return, and the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → origin return → large descent → origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 or the initial operation pattern 04 except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described.

In the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

Note that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation aspects of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 (the number of steps, operation of each step) may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be performed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be performed in the initial operation when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same at the time of turning on the power and at the time of power restoration when the state is restored to the customer waiting state, whereas the light emission state of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is resumed, while the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the recovery of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) differs between when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state and when the power supply is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special pattern, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power is restored during the jackpot game.

As a sixth feature of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, regardless of whether the power is turned on or when the power is restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 but not in the second movable member 74, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 but there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74, the first movable member 73 is initialized. The point is that the second movable member 74 does not perform the initial operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of command at the time of power ON and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference.

The 'initial operation pattern 01' is determined when a power-on designation command is received, the performance button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→return to origin→intermittent vibration, and the performance button LED lights up (lights) in the order of red→green→blue during that period.
The 'initial operation pattern 02' is determined when a first power supply restoration specifying command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state is received, the performance button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→origin return, and the performance button lights up (lights up) in blue during that period.
The ``initial operation pattern 03'' is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that special patterns are being varied and displayed or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is being played, the performance button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→origin return, and the performance button LED is extinguished during that period.

Note that the continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the performance button 17 are different from the time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance executed by operating the performance button 17 during the effective period generated during the execution of the variable performance (1 second vibration for the effective period for the big win advance notice to expect a big win, and 5 seconds vibration for the effective period for the decision performance to notify whether or not the big win will occur).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role object (production button 17) differs between when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is to execute an action that is not included in the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame role-playing initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the light-emitting mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame role-playing object (production button 17) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role object (first movable member, second movable member) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The performance button LED is extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game, but the performance button LED may be lit in the same light emission mode as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is different from the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the light emission color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on includes a light emission color that is not included in the light emission color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

A seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the time during which the production button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the production button 17 vibrates during the operation production executed by operating the production button 17 during the effective period generated during the execution of the variable production. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial operation of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is superimposed on the initial action of the production button 17, which detects whether it is at the origin position. By doing so, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. Here, a case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T9, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) passes, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. The first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 complete the restoration operation in a state in which the first movable member 73 returns abnormally, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the abnormal return, and the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) passes, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. The first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in the state that the performance button 17 has the return abnormality, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 starts the restoration operation. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed. Initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. sound state.

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described, but in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command after the initial screen is displayed, so that the setting change screen is displayed. , the return motion and initial motion of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the production button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 complete the restoration operation in a state in which the first movable member 73 returns abnormally, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the abnormal return, and the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in the state that the performance button 17 has the return abnormality, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 starts the restoration operation. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED are maintained to be turned off, the image display device displays a screen during recovery including characters ``Please restart the game'', and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at the time of power-on, a state in which the number of reservations is not displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E or the second number of reservations display area 70F is maintained because the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs the stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in such a state that a performance image such as a background image can be displayed (a pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the variable, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "2".

In addition, when the state after the power restoration is during the variable display of the special symbol (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the sub first pending display 83 at the timing of T2, and the basic operation flow from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 described above is the same except that the customer waiting state designation command is not received and the variable effect is not started at the timing of T9.

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power supply line is disconnected to the main control board 110, or power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the disconnection state (including half-inserted state) of the connector of the power line. Second case, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected. Although there are the third case and the like, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying characters "reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the performance control board 130 enters a control state capable of executing a performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of ``135'', which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally is the first case where power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power (only the main power supply) due to the power line being disconnected (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the third case where the command communication line connector is in the disconnected state (including the half-inserted state). However, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying characters "reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the performance control board 130 enters a control state capable of executing a performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed). Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

Although the second standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the second standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command is received, it may be configured to output a notification sound (alert, etc.) indicating (to be comprehensible) that the power is turned on. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on includes a first case in which power is supplied to the effect control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state).The third case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special symbol storage designation command (the first reserved number and the second reserved number = 0) is received, the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain extinguished.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the state where the initial screen is displayed on the image display device is maintained, but the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect design 70a of "753", which is the initial design at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special design TZ is stopped (still displayed) for a moment. ) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped includes a case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 contacts due to an external factor after disconnection, and a case where the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes disconnected (including half-inserted state) and then becomes connected.

Here, a case will be described where power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of control states in which the production control board 130 can execute productions according to commands.

At the timing of T1, the return operation of various actors, initial operation, and the output of the initialization newsletter after the output of the initialization news, and the image display device is the production pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, and the special pattern TZ is suspended (indicated). The 2nd waiting screen of the state or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the directing button LED are lit.

When the timing of T1 is the state of waiting for customers after the completion of the variable performance executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, sub normal fluctuation display 85, sub normal rotation suspension display 86) also maintains the display content. .

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display content.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and in the image display device, instead of the second waiting screen or customer waiting demo production screen, the initial design of "135", which is the initial pattern at the time of the power, and the special plate pattern TZ is stopped. The first standing screen in the stopped display (still display) is displayed, and the initialization news of the audio is output from the audio output device 9, which consists of a sound of "RAM clear".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during a control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the execution of the variable effect (loss change effect) or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, the screen displayed on the image display device will not be displayed until the power-on designation command is received at the timing of T4. Except that it is a variable performance screen (losing variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or a big win performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it is the same as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. It will be.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, a customer waiting state has already been reached after the return operation and initial operation of various roles and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the image display device displays a second standby screen or a customer waiting demo effect screen in which the initial symbol 70a of ``753'' and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during customer waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the variable performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reservation display 83, the second sub display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen, the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of '753', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the variable effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the variable performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variable display 81, the sub second variable display 82, the sub first holding display 83, the sub second holding display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure suspension display 86). preserves the displayed content.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and a stop sound ``Don'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variable performance is a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a production pattern 70a such as ``777'', which is a big winning production pattern, and a fixed screen in a state where the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the first sub-variation display 81 displays a big winning display mode indicating a big winning.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be turned off or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Further, even when the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special symbol determination command, temporary stop display and stop display of the performance pattern 70a are not performed, and the variable display on the sub-first variable display device and the sub-second variable display device is not ended.

(Concrete example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while the jackpot effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the jackpot performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T1, the big win performance (here, the first round performance) is being executed, the big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device, the right hitting display image MG suggesting the right hitting is displayed at the upper right of the screen, and the big winning special pattern TZ ("777") is stopped (still displayed) at the lower right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first reservation display 83, the sub second reservation display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reserve display 83, the second sub reserve display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reserve display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for mid-jackets transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are put into a state of being extinguished, and the image display device displays a mid-jackpot recovery screen including the characters "Please restart the game (during the jackpot)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first change display 81, sub-second change display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-normal figure change display 85). , Sub-normal map holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

Instead of displaying the during-return screen for the middle of the jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the fluctuation performance shown in FIG. 79 may be displayed.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

Thereafter, when a performance control board 130 receives a round designating command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from a main control board 110, a normal big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device instead of the special big win performance (round performance) screen.

When the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the performance control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the normal ending performance screen is displayed.

Also, instead of switching to a normal jackpot performance screen when a round designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, or the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game is finished.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of extinguishing or the power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

In FIGS. 77 to 80, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, the return action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) is performed, but the initial action of the various accessories may be performed without performing the return action.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is initialized, the first initial effect pattern ("135") in which the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect patterns 70a are the first combination is displayed, and when the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect pattern ("753") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns 70a are in the second combination is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display suggesting the resumption of the power supply before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device, the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device when recovering to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device after recovery to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory/with hold memory (initial screen + return). display on the middle screen). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D) and the sub pending display device (sub first pending display device 83, sub second pending display device 84) can perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories, and when the power supply stopped in a state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply on the image display device ( During recovery screen display), the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display can be executed in the sub hold display. Thus, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when restoring the control state of the game after resuming the power supply without being conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, with respect to the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82), when the power supply stopped during the variation performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the variation display (blinking display) is not performed during the variation display of the special symbol even when the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the variable display (blinking display) may be performed by the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82). In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84), the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when performing variable display (blinking display) on the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) while the returning screen is being displayed on the image display device, the sub suspension display (sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84) may display the number of suspensions in accordance with the start of this variable display. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends). By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, presentation button LED) of various roles are turned off during the return operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the abnormality is notified by flashing red (abnormality notification mode) of the light emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when an abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification is continued until the next variable effect is started. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the initial operation of various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the production button 17) is performed from the timing after the production pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the production pattern 70a is displayed). When the control state of the game is restored, the initial action of various accessories is performed from the timing (during the display of the screen during restoration) before the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. By doing so, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 83, the sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display) when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a). 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the board accessory after the player grasps the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when the power supply is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) indicates the number of suspensions while the screen during recovery is being displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a). The initial operation is performed after the mode is set. By doing so, the initial action of the frame role can be performed after the player grasps the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of various roles is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, at the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the performance pattern 70a is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the end of the variable performance executed at the time when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, only the initial screen is displayed, and the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the effect control board 130 outputs a winning sound when a special symbol storage designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port is received when the control state is such that the effect can be executed according to the command. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when a variation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the performance control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command, the standby screen is not displayed and the variable performance is executed. By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when a variation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which the performance corresponding to the command can be executed, the variable performance is executed without executing the return operation or initial operation of various characters. By doing so, it is possible to execute the production using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation and the initial operation during the execution of the variable production.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute effects according to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed. including light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed. including). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are already completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as in a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the initialization notification sound is output again when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed, the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 is in a jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. Only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound may be output from the voice output device 9 instead of executing the recovery operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission).

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to the command, such as a return operation of various characters and a customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed, and the main control board is displayed. When the power restoration designation command is received from 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Even when the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, such as during the variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished or during the jackpot game, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed but the first standby screen is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed but the return screen is displayed, such as by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. . By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various roles and during the jackpot effect after the completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 after stopping, the initial screen is not displayed, and the returning screen for the mid-jackpot is received. is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished or during the jackpot game, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 is displayed. When the power supply restoration designation command is received from again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and the cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, even if the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued and the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a modified example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

Here, a case will be described where only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted during the customer waiting state which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, a customer waiting state has already been reached after the returning operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during customer waiting.

Incidentally, when the timing of T1 is the state of waiting for customers after the completion of the variable performance executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device displays a standby screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variation performance is finished or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern holding display 86) becomes non-display.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even when the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles has already been completed, the variable effect (loss change effect, jackpot change effect), or the jackpot effect (opening, round game, ending) is restarted after being stopped, the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 will be the customer waiting demo effect screen or the fluctuation effect screen (loss change effect). Screen, jackpot fluctuation effect screen) and jackpot effect screens (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen) are basically the same as the example shown in FIG.

(Modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation of various actors, initial operation, and the output of the initialization newsletter are already waiting after the output of the initialization news, the production pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is suspended (indicated). The 2nd waiting screen or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED are on the waiting button LED.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variation performance is finished or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern holding display 86) becomes non-display.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

It should be noted that even if only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles has already been completed, during the execution of the variable effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect), or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 will be the customer waiting demo effect screen or the fluctuation effect screen (loss change effect). 78 to 80 except for the fact that it is a screen, jackpot fluctuation effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen).

In FIGS. 81 and 82, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored, but the initial actions of the various roles may be performed without performing the restoration.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen displaying the production pattern 70a is switched to an initial screen different from the standby screen. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off during the display of the initial screen. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Instead of starting the initial actions of various characters from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, the initial actions of various characters may be started from the timing of switching to the initial screen or from the timing until the switching from the initial screen to the standby screen.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen at the stage of receiving a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command). In this case, the initial actions of various roles may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen or the timing until the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial actions of the various roles may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial action of various characters may be started at the timing when the non-display state is switched to the initial screen or the timing until the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial action of the various characters may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality occurs in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed, lighting during customer waiting (white lighting) is performed, and the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. The first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

Even when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation is not executed not only for the movable member with the return abnormality, but also for the movable member without the return abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation performance, jackpot game), and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a restoration abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the restoration abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial action is executed for the presentation button 17 that has no risk of colliding with the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. By doing so, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and an abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect button LED provided in the effect button 17 does not blink in red to notify the return abnormality, but performs initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the performance button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(An example of the effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
FIGS. 84 and 85 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, it is assumed that the losing effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect for executing the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the icon change performance is started by changing the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C to a red character icon, and the lamp change performance is started by changing the winning entrance lamp NR from the extinguished state to the red flashing state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(c), the production pattern 70a of "3" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the ready-to-win production (normal reach) is executed in which the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in the central fluctuation display area.

Then, when it develops into SP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 84(d), SP ready-to-win performance is started, performance pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and first pending icon display area 70B and second pending icon display area 70D are erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when the SPSP ready-to-win game develops, as shown in FIG. 84(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 84(f).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85(g), the image display device displays an initial screen including characters of "reading", but the win-win lamp NR remains extinguished.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 85(h), a return screen containing characters "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device over the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (including the promotion effect execution period for whether or not the temporary stopped jackpot effect pattern is promoted to a jackpot effect pattern of higher value for the player). maintained.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that causes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. The variable performance ends without being restarted.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display part 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed by displaying the rectangular area image.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. A combination of performance patterns different from the ready-to-win combination of performance patterns) and a stop screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the variable performance is completed without resuming the lamp change performance at the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which the normal variation is performed, variation performance in which the shortened variation is performed, variation performance in which the normal reach performance is performed, and variable performance in which the SP reach performance is performed) are also performed. A combination of the same performance pattern or a combination of different performance patterns as the ready-to-win combination of the performance patterns forming the ready-to-win state is stop-displayed (statically displayed).

As for the special pattern TZ, regardless of whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) with the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 85(l), the image display device starts an opening effect including information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game), and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

While the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished during the display of the initial screen and/or the returning screen, the winning opening lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change performance (does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot).

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, after the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), after the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the fluctuation time of the special pattern has passed and a special design confirmation command (in the case of shifting to the customer waiting state after that, when the special design confirmation command is missed, the customer waiting state designation command) is received. Temporary stop display of the production design 70a. The production pattern 70a is stopped (stationary display) instead of (shaking fluctuation/swing display). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the production pattern 70a is stop-displayed (statically displayed) after the power supply stopped during execution of the loss variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the combination of the production patterns which are the initial patterns at the time of power restoration is stop-displayed (statically displayed) instead of the normal loss production pattern. By doing so, it is possible to dispense with complicated processing such as determining a performance pattern to be stopped (statically displayed) by lottery, and to comprehend that the control state of the game is restored and that the variable performance executed when the power supply is stopped is completed.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, after the power supply stopped during execution of the big hit variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the production patterns are stopped and displayed (still displayed), the combinations of the big hit production patterns are stopped and displayed (still displayed). By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the control state of the game is the restoration of the power source and that the variable performance executed when the power supply is stopped was the big win variable performance.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the combination of the jackpot production patterns is stopped (statically displayed) after the game control state is restored, the ready-to-win state is formed before the power supply is stopped. By doing so, the player does not have to be conscious of the jackpot effect pattern which was scheduled to be displayed stopped before the power supply is stopped, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted can be reduced.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the execution period of the promotion performance described above is included in the variable performance executed when the power supply is stopped, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the promotion performance is not executed and the jackpot performance pattern is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, since useless performance is not performed until the performance pattern is stopped (still displayed), the player can immediately grasp that the variable performance being executed when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variable performance.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the display mode (type of display screen, display order of the display screens) of the image display device after resuming the power supply is the same in the case where the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is restarted and the game control state is restored, and the case where the power supply stopped during the execution of the big hit fluctuation production is restarted and the game control state is restored. By doing so, it is possible to perform simple display control without being conscious of whether the losing variation performance is being executed or the big win variation performance is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after restarting the power supply can be reduced.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, after the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped, and is stop-displayed (statically displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the production symbol 70a. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the power supply stopped during the display of the icon is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a square area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C until the next variable production (scrolling of the production pattern 70a) is started after the display of the returning screen is finished, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state where the production image such as the background image can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the power supply stopped during the display of the pending icon is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a square area image is displayed in the holding icon display area until the next variable production is started, so that the holding icon is displayed in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed, and the holding icon is displayed. By doing so, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable performance is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

84 and 85, when the control state of the game is restored by restarting the stopped power supply during the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (storage of the special figure determination information that changes the lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) of the winning entrance lamp NR to the high expectation of winning the jackpot (blue, red, rainbow)), the lamp change effect is not restarted, and the winning opening lamp NR is set to a notification mode (lights off or white lighting) that does not suggest the expectation of winning the jackpot. are By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player is puzzled by resuming the lamp change performance even though the variation performance is not executed while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation performance, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed.

Also, after the execution period of the big win variable performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen may not be displayed and the opening performance of the big win game in which the big win performance pattern 70a is not displayed may be started. In addition, information indicating the type of the jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, the jackpot special pattern TZ of '777' may be displayed, or the special pattern TZ of '753' which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss variation performance ends, the performance pattern 70a which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration and the special pattern TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance ends, the opening performance of the big win game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific performance that arouses whether or not a big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win performance pattern 70a in the variable performance (makes people expect that the big win game will be executed), after the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is stopped (statically displayed) if it is a loss, and the big winning performance pattern 70a is stopped (statically displayed) if it is a big win. can be

In addition, when the combination of the big winning performance symbols is displayed (still displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of a plurality of big winning performance symbols corresponding to the kind of the big winning game to be executed thereafter may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is ``333'' and ``777'', the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is ``222'', ``444'', ``666'' and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'' and ``999''. .

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before stopping the power supply is ``1↓1'' constituting a part of the combination of the big-win performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third big winning game, when the big-winning game to be executed after that is the first big winning game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of big winning performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and the big winning game to be executed after that is the third big winning. In the case of a game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (combination of jackpot performance symbols which are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combinations of performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special pattern TZ may be stop-displayed (statically displayed) with a number different from the performance pattern 70a after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, instead of being stop-displayed (statically-displayed) with the same combination of numbers as the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, when the normal game state and customer waiting state are after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (static display). You may make it

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B, it is assumed that the losing effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect that is the preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. 86B, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display to start the first performance of the continuous advance notice performance, the display mode of the first pending icon (icon final display mode=red character icon) shift-displayed in the second display part 70B2 is changed to the blue character icon, and the pending icon change performance is started, and the lamp change performance is started by changing the state of the winning opening lamp NR from the extinguished state to the blue flashing state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 86(d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the losing effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect as a preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. 86(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display, so that the second performance of the continuous advance notice performance is started, and the pending icon change performance and the lamp change performance are continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 86(g).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, the image display device displays an initial screen including characters of "reading" as shown in FIG.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 87(i), the image display device displays the screen during recovery including the characters "Please restart the game" over the execution period of the preliminary variation, but the winning hole lamp NR is maintained in the extinguished state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the preliminary variation ends (the performance control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG.

At this time, the CD icon, which is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped, is displayed in the first display part 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the rectangular area image is displayed, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable performance for executing the SPSP ready-to-win performance is started, as shown in FIG. 87(k), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display part 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery for the newly executed icon change performance is won, the icon change performance is started by changing the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C to a blue character icon according to the result. On the other hand, since the lottery relating to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the lamp change effect is not restarted while the prize winning opening lamp NR is kept turned off.

Also, when a lottery relating to the substitute foretelling performance performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the substitute foretelling performance is executed by moving the mini character MCB so as to be out of the frame.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(l), the words uttered by the ally A are displayed in the word window displayed on the image display device, and the voice corresponding to the words ``Chance is coming!''

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the production pattern 70a of "3" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the ready-to-win production (normal reach) is executed in which the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in the central fluctuation display area.

After that, when it develops into SP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 87(n), the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 87(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a big hit ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG.

While the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished during the display of the initial screen and/or the returning screen, the winning opening lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change performance (does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot).

In addition, when the special pattern determination command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) is continued without the stop display of the performance pattern 70a which is temporarily stopped (shake fluctuation).

Thus, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply stopped during execution of the continuous advance notice performance, the alternative notice performance different from the continuous notice performance can be executed without restarting the continuous notice performance in the variable performance corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply stopped during the display of the suspended icon displayed as the special icon (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed), the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the power supply stopped during execution of the icon change performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, in the variable performance corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of recovery, the pending icon change performance is not executed, but the icon change performance can be executed again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, during the execution of the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, even if the icon change production is executed again, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply is stopped. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

86 and 87, even if the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that has been stopped during the variation effect (storage of the special figure determination information that changes the lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) of the winning entrance lamp NR to the lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) with high expectation of winning the jackpot) corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is not restarted, and the winning entrance lamp NR is set to the notification mode (light off or white lighting) that does not suggest the expectation of winning the big win. It's like By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player is puzzled by resuming the lamp change performance even though the variation performance is not executed while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, it is assumed that wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110.

First, FIG. 88(a) will be described.
FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed).

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start opening detection switch 45a is unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of the connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including characters of ``connection error detection'' indicating that a connection error has occurred, and a voice output device 9 outputs a connection error notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying ``connection error''.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released, but the connection error notification continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88(b) will be described.
FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed).

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-inserted and the first start opening detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a become unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the effect control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error annunciation image EG containing the characters "magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "radio error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, the radio wave error, and the connection error have been released, but various error notifications continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, when specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) connected to the main control board 110 changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error notification is made. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-inserted, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even when specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) returns from the disconnected state to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or radio wave error continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected, various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification in the same notification mode as in FIG. 88) may be performed during display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (at the start of display of the first standby screen or second standby screen).

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the disconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the connection error notification may be canceled when the first starting port detection switch 45a changes from the disconnected state to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error having a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error having a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are not output if they occur simultaneously with a magnetic error, but the notification sounds associated with the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Further, in the magnetic error notification, the radio wave error notification, and the connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may not be output.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp/drive control unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 .
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as those of the role product initial process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power-on command is received, the process proceeds to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process proceeds to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the previous power-on) has passed, the process is shifted to step R103, and if the predetermined period of time has not passed, the process is shifted to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing to "1" for executing the origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17).

As described above, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories after the start of power supply and the initial operation without being conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored.

Further, according to the modified example of the character product initialization process shown in FIG. 89, after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, when the power ON command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received, the return operation and initial operation of various characters are performed again. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the main control board 110 has not started normally and the power-on command has been transmitted later than usual (abnormality related to the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 has occurred).

When a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time after power supply to the game machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various characters may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it is possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. Here, a case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are changed to alternately light red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light in the order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (effect pattern 70a and special symbol TZ variable display, pending icon movement or change to the icon, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up in red and white, and the performance button LED lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial motion of the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T4 and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial motion processing is completed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when a performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command at power-on transmitted from a main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is changed to alternately light up in red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial motion of the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T4 and the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial motion processing is completed without executing the initial motion of the first movable member 73.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described, but in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed, the setting change-in-progress screen is displayed when the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130. A standby screen is displayed, and return actions and initial actions of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a first power supply restoration designation command as a power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED change and light blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes the display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration specifying command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED is changed to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.
Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed at the timing of T4, and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and the first movable member LED and the production button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started.

Further, when a performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from a main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED is changed to alternately light in blue and white, and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is changed to light in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reservation icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon".

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0", and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED change and light blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at the time of power-on, a state in which the number of reservations is not displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E or the second number of reservations display area 70F is maintained because the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-reservation display 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-reservation display 84 and the sub-normal drawing reservation display 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in such a state that a performance image such as a background image can be displayed (a pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2" and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the variable, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally when the power was turned on)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power supply line is disconnected to the main control board 110, or power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the disconnection state (including half-inserted state) of the connector of the power line. Second case, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected. Although there are the third case and the like, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but when the power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At timing T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the return-to-origin processing ends, the initial motion processing starts, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At the time T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 ends. The processing ends, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the initialization notification sound output is stopped and the state becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally is the first case where power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power (only the main power supply) due to the power line being disconnected (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the third case where the command communication line connector is in the disconnected state (including the half-inserted state). However, the first case will be explained here.

Note that the timings from T1 to T7 are the same as the timings from T1 to T7 in FIG. 99, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a second standby screen in a state in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

Although the second standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the second standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power supply restoration designation command is received, a notification sound (such as an alarm) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) may be output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 99 to 100, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, the return action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) is performed, but the initial action of the various accessories may be performed without performing the return action.

(Concrete example when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

Cases in which the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received include a case in which power is not supplied to the main control board 110, a case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and a case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 99, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, when the special pattern storage designation command (the first reserved number and the second reserved number=0) is received while the performance control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changed and turned off.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device, but the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). ) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped includes a case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 contacts due to an external factor after disconnection, and a case where the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes disconnected (including half-inserted state) and then becomes connected.

Here, a case will be described where power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of control states in which the production control board 130 can execute productions according to commands.

At the timing of T1, the returning operation of various roles and the customer waiting state after the initial operation are already completed, the image display device displays a second standby screen or a customer waiting demo effect screen in which the initial symbol 70a of ``753'' and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during customer waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display content.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lightly turned into red and white as the initial light, and the production button LED is lit in white as an initial light, and the image display device shows the production pattern 70A, and the special pattern TZ stopped (and the special pattern TZ. The first standing screen in the static display is displayed, and an initialization news sound consisting of an alarm and "RAM clear" is output from the audio output device 9.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during a control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the execution of the variable effect (loss change effect) or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, the screen displayed on the image display device will not be displayed until the power-on designation command is received at the timing of T4. Except that it is a variable performance screen (losing variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or a big win performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it is the same as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. It will be.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation of various actors, initial operation, and the output of the initialization newsletter are already waiting after the output of the initialization news, the production pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is suspended (indicated). The 2nd waiting screen or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED are on the waiting button LED.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reservation display 83, the second sub display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the variable performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the initial pattern 753 at the time of power restoration and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed) instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) as a command at power ON, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At timing T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the execution of the variable effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the variable performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variable display 81, the sub second variable display 82, the sub first holding display 83, the sub second holding display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as an initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as an initial light emission, and the image display device displays a recovery screen including characters "Please restart the game." Display device 84, sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, sub-normal pattern holding display device 86) maintains the display contents.

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a stop screen in a state in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and a stop sound is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variable performance is a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a such as ``777'' which is a jackpot performance pattern, and a stop screen in a state where the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the sub-first variation display 81 changes to a jackpot display mode indicating a jackpot, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variable effect (variation display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of extinguishing or power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Further, even when the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special symbol determination command, temporary stop display and stop display of the performance pattern 70a are not performed, and the variable display on the sub-first variable display device and the sub-second variable display device is not ended.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while the jackpot effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the jackpot performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot performance (here, the first round performance) is being executed, the big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first reservation display 83, the sub second reservation display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reserve display 83, the second sub reserve display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reserve display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for mid-jackets transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, the performance button LED is lighted in white as initial light emission, the image display device displays the screen during return for the middle of jackpot including characters ``Please restart the game (during jackpot)'', and the voice output device 9 is silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 104 may be displayed.

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

Thereafter, when a performance control board 130 receives a round designating command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from a main control board 110, a normal big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device instead of the special big win performance (round performance) screen.

When the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the performance control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the normal ending performance screen is displayed.

Also, instead of switching to a normal jackpot performance screen when a round designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, or the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game is finished.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but by turning off the light or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, it may be made possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

In FIGS. 102 to 105, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored, but the initial actions of the various roles may be performed without performing the restoration.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 90 to 105, if the control status of the gaming is initialized, the first initial production pattern ("135"), which is the first combination of identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in multiple production pattern 70A, and the control status of the game is restored. The second initial production pattern ("753"), which is the second combination of identification characters in the pattern 70A, is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display suggesting the resumption of the power supply before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device, and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device when recovering to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device after recovery to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory/with hold memory (initial screen +). Display of the screen during recovery) is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, it is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories in each of the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D) and the sub pending display device (sub first pending display device 83, sub second pending display device 84), and when the power supply stopped in the state where there is pending storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply on the image display device. While performing (display of the screen during recovery), the suspension display is not executed in the suspension icon display area, but the suspension display can be executed in the sub-suspension display. Thus, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when restoring the control state of the game after resuming the power supply without being conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82), when the power supply stopped during the variation performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the variation display (blinking display) is not performed during the variation display of the special symbol even if the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the variable display (blinking display) may be performed by the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82). In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84), the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received). By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when performing variable display (blinking display) on the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) while the returning screen is being displayed on the image display device, the sub suspension display (sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84) may display the number of suspensions in accordance with the start of this variable display. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, presentation button LED) of various roles are turned off during the return operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the abnormality notification is performed by flashing the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification is continued until the next fluctuation effect is started. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where an abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the board function (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) becomes the display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device). are By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the frame role (production button 17), in the case of power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (returning screen is displayed on the image display device). By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the performance is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role object. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the end of the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various roles are executed, and the initial screen is continued to be displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the display of the initial screen is continued due to the inability to receive the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), when the special symbol storage designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the start opening is received from the main control board 110 when the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, the winning sound is output. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when the variation start command is received from the main control board 110 after the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power supply designation command and the power restoration designation command are received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of the various characters and the initial operation ( initial light emission) is executed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply designation command or the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of the various characters and the initial operation (initial operation) are restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the completion of the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply designation command and the power restoration designation command are received again from the main control board 110, the return operation and the initial operation of the various roles are performed again, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. (including initial light emission). By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the initialization notification sound is output again when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even during the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed, the initialization notification sound is output again when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound may be output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even in a control state in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, such as the returning operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed, and the main control is performed. When the power restoration designation command is received again from the substrate 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, such as during the return operation of various roles and during the initial operation (including the initial light emission), during the variable performance or during the jackpot performance, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the return screen is displayed instead of the initial screen being displayed. are By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various roles and during the jackpot effect after the completion of the initial operation (including the initial light emission), when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed and the return for the jackpot is being performed without displaying the initial screen. It is designed to display the screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished or during the jackpot game, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 11 is displayed. When the power restoration designation command is received again from 0, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, even if the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued and the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is resumed, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

The control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable performance, and the big win performance.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but may be composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decoration part). In addition, the performance pattern 70a may be displayed with numbers and characters in the normal game state, and the performance patterns 70a may be displayed with only numbers or characters smaller than the numbers and the normal game state in the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

Also, three types of production modes A to C may be provided in the normal game state, and at least one of the number design and the character design of the production pattern 70a may be different for each production mode. Also, two types of production modes D to E may be provided in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and at least one of the design of the numbers and the design of the characters of the production pattern 70a may be changed for each production mode. Furthermore, two types of production modes F to G may be provided in the low-probability short-time gaming state, and at least one of the number design and character design of the production pattern 70a may be changed for each production mode.

In this case, the power supply is stopped in any of the performance modes A to C in the normal game state, and when the power supply is resumed after that and the control state of the game is restored, the performance mode A is surely set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode A is displayed statically without swinging display after the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the performance mode A is always set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen is finished.

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the performance modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and the power supply is resumed after that and the control state of the game is restored, the performance mode D is surely set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode D is statically displayed without swinging display after the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the performance mode A is always set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode A is statically displayed without swinging display after the display of the initial screen is finished.

Further, when the power supply is stopped in any of the performance modes F to G in the low-probability short-working-time game state, and the power supply is resumed after that and the control state of the game is restored, the performance mode F is surely set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode F is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the end of the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the performance mode A is always set, and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the performance mode A is statically displayed without swinging display after the display of the initial screen is finished.

Further, when the performance pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the SP ready-to-win performance or the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the normal game state, the performance pattern 70a may be changed to numbers only, and when the SP ready-to-win performance or SPSP ready-to-win performance is completed and the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), the performance pattern 70a may be returned to the numbers and characters.

In this case, during the SP reach or SP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the performance pattern 70a is changed to numbers only, the power supply is stopped and then the power supply is resumed to recover the control state of the game, the performance pattern 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the display of the screen during recovery is finished. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

Furthermore, during SP reach or SPSP reach in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), that is, when the power supply is stopped when the performance pattern 70a is only numbers, and then the power supply is resumed to restore the control state of the game, the performance pattern 70a of only the numbers is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the end of the display of the screen during recovery. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

<Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is established, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. Among such gaming machines, there is one that displays a pending image corresponding to undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine enhances the interest of the game by changing the normal pending image to the pending image of the display mode suggesting the possibility that the variable effect will result in a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ According to the first configuration for solving the above issues, according to the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game (main control board 110), and a subordinate system that controls the production of the game based on the signal (such as commands (such as commands) above), according to the gaming machine (130m in the production control unit). The lord control means is a judgment method (main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform special gaming (jackpot gaming) that is advantageous to the players, and a holding method that can hold the right to determine (main RAM110C), and the informal control means is a holding image corresponding to the right to be held (Paste Aiko. Display the image display method (display / audio control unit 140) displayed in the display method (1 image display device 70), and the production execution method (display / audio control unit 140) to execute the prescribed reward production (icon generated (change) alarm sound) in the production method (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. In preparation, the images of the image display are configured to update the image displayed in the displayed means for each time the specified frame update timing, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change production) that changes to a special holding image that indicates the possibility of performing special gaming or not from the holding image. The first change production that is executed at the timing of the frame update in accordance with the receipt of a command (a command specified command) of the above -mentioned rights sent from the means, and a command (change pattern specified command specified command) that indicates the result of the criterion sent from the lord control means (a change in the prize) Includes the second change production (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and pattern action change pattern 01) executed at the timing of update, and the procedure of the production execution is the frame update timing when the first change production starts, and the frame that ends the first change. The news of the news is terminated at the timing that is different from the new timing. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling the game production based on the signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. CPU 110a), holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, and variation control means for variably displaying a pattern based on the result of the judgment and then stop-displaying the pattern. Effect executing means (display/audio control unit 140) for executing notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), wherein the image display means is configured to update an image displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game. and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the determination result transmitted from the main control means, wherein the effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, The notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the sub-control means (performance control section 130m) for controlling the game production based on the signal (command etc.) from the main control means. CPU 110a), holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, and variation control means (main CPU 110a) for variably displaying a pattern and then stop-displaying the pattern based on the result of the judgment. ), and effect execution means (display/sound control unit 140) for causing the effect means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (an icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of the game, wherein the image display means is configured to update the image displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing, and the possibility of whether or not to perform the special game from the pre-judgment pending image or the post-judgment pending image. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change to a pre-judgment special pending image or a post-determination special hold image shown, and the change effect is a first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at a frame update timing according to a command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the fluctuation display of the pattern is started. The effect executing means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect starts, ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and makes the second change effect more likely to be executed in the case of changing to the post-judgment special hold image than in the case of changing to the pre-judgment special hold image. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling the game production based on the signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. CPU 110a) and holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding a predetermined number of said judgment rights, and said subordinate control means comprises image display means (display/sound control section 140) for displaying a reserved image (holding icon) corresponding to said reserved right on display means (first image display device 70), and effect execution means (display/sound control section) for causing production means (sound output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of a game. 140), wherein the image display means is configured to update an image to be displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and a change effect (icon change effect) for changing the reserved image to a special reserved image indicating the possibility of performing the special game is performed, and the changed effect is performed in response to a command (a start winning designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a special pattern storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the reserved rights changes. A first change effect (change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) executed at frame update timing, and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. and a second display mode (red character icon) in which the possibility of performing a technique is high, wherein the effect execution means starts the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect starts, ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and changes to the second display mode more easily when the second change effect is executed than when the first change effect is executed, and changes to the second display mode during the first change effect, When the number of reserved rights is a second number larger than the first number, the possibility of playing the special game is higher than when the number is the first number. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The “special pending image” and the “pre-judgment special pending image” include those in which the shape of the normal pending icon is changed, those in which the color is changed, the effect of the color indicating the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot around the pending icon, the one that displays a character indicating the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot around (near) the pending icon, and the one that displays a character image (for example, “SP” or “pseudo-ren”) that suggests the effect to be executed around (near) the pending icon.

In addition, the ``post-judgment special pending image'' includes an image in which the shape of the normal icon is changed, an image in which the color is changed, an effect in which a color effect indicating the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is displayed around the icon, an image in which a character indicating the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is displayed around (near) the icon, and a character image (e.g., "SP" or "pseudo-run") that suggests an effect to be executed is displayed around (near) the icon.

Also, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Also, the “second display mode” includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

The ``post-judgment pending image'' and the ``post-judgment special pending image'' include those displayed from the start to the end of the variable performance, those displayed only for a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance, and those whose display is erased during a specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the change performance.

<Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional game machine, it is common to store determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition as a holding memory, determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the determination information, and execute a variable performance based on the determination result. Among such gaming machines, by increasing display or decreasing display of the reserved image corresponding to each reserved memory, or displaying the execution image corresponding to the reserved memory in which the variable effect is executed, There was a game machine that allows the player to grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), the special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image every predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), and the information display means is capable of executing reduced display of the first reserved information and reduced display of the second reserved information when the number of the reserved memories decreases, and the frame update timing at which the reduced display of the first reserved information (update to the reserved number decremented by 1) is completed before the frame update timing at which the reduced display of the second reserved information (movement to the center of the next display section in the reserved icon display area) is completed. is faster. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine provided with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of performing decreasing display of the first pending information and changing display of changing the second pending information in which the variable effect is started to execution information (the icon) when the number of the pending memories decreases, and the display of the change of the second pending information to the execution information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed before the first frame update timing. The frame update timing at which the decrement display of the pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first hold information and displaying a decrease in the second hold information when the number of the hold memories decreases, and when the number of the hold memories increases, can execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information. Even before the frame update timing at which the movement to the center of the adjacent display part in the pending icon display area) is completed, the increasing display of the first pending information (update to the pending number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of executing a decrease display of the first hold information and a change display of changing the second hold information whose variable display is started to execution information (the icon) when the number of the hold memories decreases, and an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold memories increases, and during the change display of the second hold information. When the number of reserved memories increases, the increased display of the first reserved information (update to the reserved number incremented by 1) is started even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second reserved information (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine provided with main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the game production based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), is a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of executing an increased display of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information when the number of the reserved memories increases, and when the number of the reserved memories increases during execution of the variable effect, the increased display of the second reserved information (enlargement of the reserved icon additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area to a normal size) is completed, and the first reserved information is increased before the frame update timing. The frame update timing that results in the completion of the display (update to the pending digits incremented by one) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The variable performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (SP ready-to-play performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance, all-rotation ready-to-win performance) that expects execution of the special game during execution of the variable performance, and the information display means is capable of executing an increased display of the first pending information and an increased display of the second pending information when the number of the pending memories increases, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, the increased display of the first pending information (update to the pending number incremented by 1) is executed. , The increase display of the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the big win effect pattern displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and subordinate control means (production control board 130) that controls the game production based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), is a special game that is advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device), and first pending information (reserved number) indicating the number of the pending memories. and second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, wherein the information display means can execute an increase display of the first holding information and an increase display of the second holding information when the number of the holding memories increases, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as the first holding memory, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second starting port). When the number of the first reserved memories increases in the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved information (updating to the reserved number incremented by 1) is executed, but the increased display of the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the last variable performance in the specific game state is completed, and the normal game state is returned to). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Conventional gaming machines are generally capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on acquired determination information, and executing the special game according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (operating, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped, and initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of power supply (initial action, Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission) and effecting the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of the game, and the effect control means is adapted to change the operation mode (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) of the initial operation between when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by a player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped, and perform initial light emission of the operation means after power supply is started, and perform effect light emission of the operation means during the execution of the game. A performance control means (a performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game is provided, and the performance control means changes the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission between when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before power supply is stopped, and initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after power supply is started. and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of effecting the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means makes the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means the same (operation mode of the number of steps, operation of each step, etc.) when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, but makes the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect means different (light emission mode, etc.). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and playing the game. wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means makes at least part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable effect means the same when the game control state is initialized and when the game control state is restored, but the second movable effect means The lighting mode of the initial light emission in the effect means is made different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 11) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped. 0), and an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, the plurality of effect patterns include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that allow each to be identified, and the effect control means, when the control state of the game is initialized, puts the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means into a first combination (e.g., " 135"), and when the game control state is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means are set to the second combination (for example, "753"). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally initializes the control state of a game after power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of movable effect means after power supply is started (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the movable effect means may not be able to perform a suitable initial action.

As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); A presentation control means (a presentation control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of the game and performing a presentation operation of the movable presentation means during execution of the game, wherein the presentation control means performs a return operation of the movable presentation means to the first position before performing the initial operation when the movable presentation means is at the second position at the start of power supply (recovery of the power supply) at which the game control state is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial motion for the movable effect means.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position close to the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped, and power supply control. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the game is started and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means performs a return operation of the movable effect means to the first position when the movable effect means is at the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) at which the game control state is restored; If it does not return to the position, the initial operation is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial motion for the movable effect means.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after starting the game and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74); When the 2 movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is performed without the initial action of the first movable effect means. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial motion for the movable effect means.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of the game and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74); When the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the second movable effect means does not perform the initial action. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial motion for the movable effect means.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and power supply control. Effect control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the game is started, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is at the second position at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. When the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is performed without performing the initial action of the first movable effect means. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and power supply control. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the start and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) having a portion overlapping a second position of the first movable effect means and its own second position; When the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position when the supply is started (power is turned on), the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply stopped during the variable presentation is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 11) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped. 0) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and in the variable performance, the performance symbols being variably displayed can be oscillatingly displayed (temporary stop display) and then statically displayed (stopped display), and the performance control means resumes the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable performance of oscillatingly displaying the performance symbols. When the control state is restored, it is possible to statically display the performance symbols on the display means at a predetermined timing (at the time of receiving the special symbol determination command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command) without swinging the performance symbols. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the game ball enters the start hole), a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and after the power supply is started, the game control state is initialized or restored to the state before the power supply was stopped. and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of production patterns displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the variable production includes a ready-to-win fluctuation production that executes a ready-to-win production by forming and displaying a ready-to-win state based on some of the production patterns. When the technique control state is restored, at a predetermined timing (at the time of receiving the special pattern determination command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command), the combination of the performance patterns different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance patterns forming and displaying the ready-to-win state can be displayed on the display means in a stationary state. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting port) as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and a game after the start of power supply. or to restore the state before stopping the power supply, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. , a second state that is the execution period of the variable effect in the state with the reserved memory, wherein the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means when the control state of the game is restored, the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply stopped in the first state or the second state is resumed. The display mode of the specific display (display of initial screen + screen during recovery) when recovering to state 1 or state 2 is made different. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on the display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the game ball enters the start hole), a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and after the power supply is started, the game control state is initialized or restored to the state before the power supply was stopped. and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) in accordance with the determination result of the determination means, the production control means is capable of executing a customer waiting production (customer waiting demo production) on the display means after a predetermined period of time has passed after the production design is statically displayed on the display means, and after the elapse of the fluctuation time of the variable production. The period until the customer waiting performance is executed can be made different between the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed at the beginning and the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored. By doing so, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Content 8 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to determination information during execution of a variable effect on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start port), and initializing the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped. and an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. 70C), it is possible to display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information during the execution of the variable effect, and when the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed) from the end of the specific display to the start of the next variable display, but the execution information is not displayed in the predetermined display area. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Content 9 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a pre-reading advance notice effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (playing a game ball into a starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and before the determination by the determination means. Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information; Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before power supply was stopped; Based on the determination result, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading foretelling performance (continuous foretelling performance) over a plurality of times of the variable performance, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the fore-seeing foretelling performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the fore-reading foretelling performance is not restarted, and in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance for which the power supply is stopped, the fore-reading foretelling performance (for example, alternative foretelling performance) different from the foreseeing foretelling performance can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 10 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (playing a game ball into a starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and before the determination by the determination means. Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information, initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the judgment means (production control board 130). It is possible to execute a specific performance (e.g., an icon change performance) stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of the special game over the performance, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped, but is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the stop of the power supply. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 11 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which the execution of the variable effect has not ended (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, there is a possibility that the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed increases.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Preliminary determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information, initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the judgment means (production control board 130), wherein the production control means executes the variable production. It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not ended and the determination information that has not started the variable effect, and by changing the display mode of the identification information in stages, it is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. The display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., CD icon), a second stage mode (e.g., blue character icon), and a third stage mode (red character icon). When the power supply stopped during the display in the second stage mode of the identification information that changes up to the third stage mode is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

(Content 12 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending memories, which is determination information of unexecuted determination, in a display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved memories, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (playing a game ball into a starting port) as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and a game after the start of power supply. Initialization means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of or restoring it to the state before stopping the power supply, and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. , In each of the first display area (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84), and the second display area (first suspension icon display area 70B, second suspension icon display area 70D) different from the first display area, it is possible to perform a suspension display indicating the number of suspension memories, and when the power supply stopped with the suspension storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspension display is not performed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. The hold display can be executed in the first display area. Thus, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Content 13 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may decrease when the stopped power supply is resumed during the effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the control state of the game is restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information, initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before power supply was stopped, production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the judgment means (production control board 130), and light emitting means (input) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes. The effect control means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation for execution of the special game by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and when the power supply stopped during execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emission means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player is puzzled such that the lamp change performance is restarted even though the variation performance is not executed while reducing the control load after the power supply is restarted, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

(Content 14 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◇ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (operating, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, wherein the effect control means is movable. It is possible to perform the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, and said effect control means comprises said movable effect. It is possible to execute an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and an effect operation (effect operation, light emission of effect) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and it is possible to execute the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the customer waiting effect. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, wherein the effect control means comprises the movable effect. It is possible to execute an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and an effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a variable effect for informing whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the variable effect, it is possible to execute the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, and said effect control means comprises said movable effect. It is possible to execute the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and when a predetermined signal (power supply designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the special game effect, the initial operation can be executed. . By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and control of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the state or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is capable of executing the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means. However, the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is the same, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation of the movable effect means can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device) and based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the winning of the game ball to the starting port), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. The effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the movable effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and in accordance with the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the variable effect is displayed by swinging (temporary stop display). When the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern, the effect control means can statically display the effect symbol on the display means without oscillating display at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special symbol confirmation command, when receiving a customer waiting command), and during the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a reserved memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before stopping the power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring, the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). , a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the reserved memory, and a second state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state with the reserved memory, wherein when the game control state is restored, the performance control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means, and when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display when the power supply stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the power supply stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored (display of the initial screen + the screen during recovery), and it is possible to execute the production according to the signal (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) It is possible. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a reserved memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before stopping the power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoration, and the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect with a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the effect is displayed on the display means. When a predetermined period elapses after the symbols are statically displayed, a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) can be executed by the display means, and the period until the performance pattern is statically displayed after the variation time of the variable effect has passed and the effect pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, and the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the jackpot performance), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a reserved memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before stopping the power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoration, and the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). Based on the result, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading advance notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a plurality of times of the variable effect, and when the control state of the game is restored by resuming the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, alternative notice effect) different from the pre-reading notice effect in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the pre-reading notice effect, and a control state (customer waiting state, customer waiting state, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the variable performance, jackpot performance), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect buttons 17, various LEDs, voice output devices) capable of operating (movement, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. 9, image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as pending storage, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or the state before stopping the power supply. and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the original state, and the effect control means can execute the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., an icon change effect) that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the effect, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect that is executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes, and effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device), determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the start opening) as a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110), and start of power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game later or restores the state before the power supply is stopped, and the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). When the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect, the light emitting means is controlled to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect according to the signal can be executed. It is possible to By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) of the game, and the effect control means is capable of outputting power supply from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound indicating the start (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.), and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which an effect according to the signal can be executed, the predetermined notification sound can be output. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the effect control means is capable of outputting power supply from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start, and to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), wherein the effect control means supplies power from the audio output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start, and to execute a variable effect for informing whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the variable effect, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) of the game, and the effect control means is capable of outputting power supply from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound indicating the start (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.), and during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Special game effects (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) can be executed, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the special game effect, the predetermined notification sound can be output. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

(Content 15 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally includes main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying effect images (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means continues.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying effect images (fluctuation effect, jackpot effect, etc.), and the effect control means is in a standby state (customer waiting state). state), it is possible to display a game standby screen (a static display screen of performance symbols) on the display means, and when the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display of the game standby screen, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 16 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (disconnected connector, disconnection, etc.) when the supply is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) when the control means and the detection means are started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and power is being supplied to the game machine. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (disconnection of the connector, wire breakage, etc.), it is possible to issue a predetermined anomaly report (disconnection report, magnetic anomaly report, radio anomaly report, etc.). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is equipped with detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.). By doing so, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after all the jackpot games are finished, but the game machine may shift to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is finished when the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of the jackpot game.

Alternatively, the game machine may shift to a high-probability game state after all jackpot games are finished, and terminate the high-probability game state and return to a normal game state when winning a falling lottery executed at the start of variable display of special symbols in the high-probability game state.

In addition, when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the normal pattern, the game machine may shift to a low-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and shift to the high-probability game state continuing until the next jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game when the type of the jackpot special pattern is the specific pattern.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not performed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

(When the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Next, the case where the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described. When the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, for example, the command line that connects the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 does not receive the command due to disconnection, partial disconnection, or disconnection of the connector. In addition, in the following description, when the production|presentation control part 130m cannot receive a command normally, when the predetermined state arises, it expresses by "x" in the drawing(s). In a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be normally received first occurs to before a command can be normally received, one or a plurality of commands of the same type and/or different types may not be normally received. In addition, the command is written as "cd" in the figure.

The effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal game state is composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG which is a part of the character, and a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image ZE for decorating the background of the character, and an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). Also, the production pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of the identification portion consisting of the number portion (identification character).

Also, in the normal game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes A to C scroll left and right (reciprocating motion). Also, in the specific game state, the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, when the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the command line connector for communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

In the following specific example, the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state will be described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 60, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the sub first variable display device 81, the sub first reservation display device 83, the first reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp design, and the first starting port 45 are each set to the second reservation number, the second special design storage designation command, the second special design, the second special Symbol display 61, second special symbol pending display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second pending display 84, second pending number display area 70F, second pending icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, second starting port 47.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. FIG. 106 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 107(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 as the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". At the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first
When the performance control unit 130m receives the special symbol variation pattern designation command), the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from ``2'' to ``1'', and processing for starting the variation performance is performed.

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number (numerical information) displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from '2' to '1' in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the special pattern (referred to as the first lamp pattern when particularly distinguished) on the first sub-variation display device 81 is started, but the production pattern 70a starts to scroll after performing a preparatory operation.

In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 displays the first reservation number U1 (holding memory) stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by turning on/off/blinking of the LED. The variable display of the first lamp pattern is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81 . Also, in the sub-first suspension display 83, the first suspension number U1 (holding memory) stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed by lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of the LED.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special pattern storage designation command, a first start winning prize designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one pending icon T12 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B2 (see FIG. 107(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 107(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 107(c)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 of the one lamp symbol is started. Also, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as partly moving the decorative part or expanding/contracting the whole or part of the decoration part as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 107(d)).

After that, at timing P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 107(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 107(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 107(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0''. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, one suspended icon H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 107(g)).

Then, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern on the sub first reservation display 83 continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part operating and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 107 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image is continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 107(h)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("365"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the icon TH is continuing the rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 107(i)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 107(i)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At this time, the first pending number U1 stored (knowed) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has passed (a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation of P8), the temporary stop display of the production symbol 70a is continued (see FIG. 107 (j)). Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). In this way, the customer waiting demonstration effect (predetermined effect) is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation of P8.

In the state that the first reservation number U1 memorized (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the predetermined performance to be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern) is not limited to the customer waiting demonstration performance, but may be an adjustment guidance performance such as adjustment of the volume and brightness of the image display device, a guidance performance related to game operation, and other performances. In this case, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the effect other than the customer waiting demo effect is executed. Thus, the predetermined effect includes the effect executed until the next variable effect is started for the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped or permanently stopped. Note that the predetermined effect is not limited to being executed by the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), and may be executed by other commands, time by a timer, or the like.

Thus, according to the specific example 1 shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, when a predetermined state occurs in which a command is not normally received in the performance control unit 130m while the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a is being performed, the performance pattern 70a in which the variable performance is completed can be displayed in a swinging state, and the swinging state of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, so that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to prevent the loss of the player's interest and reduce the interest in the game.

After that, since the first reservation number U1 memorized (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the game shifts to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

In this case, all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance patterns 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P7, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing will be performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 2 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 109(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Further, the four suspended icons T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 are started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operation of a part of the decorative portion and enlargement/reduction operation of the whole or a part thereof as in the present embodiment.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, at the timing when the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4", when the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first start winning designation command (prefetch designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is received by the production control unit 130m, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4". It should be noted that, in the specific example 2, based on the first reservation memory due to the winning at the timing of P1, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the big win is high is executed in advance. In the following description, the reserved memory that serves as a reference for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target reserved memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 109(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 109(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 109(c)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". In addition, when the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing when the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3", the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3" to start the fluctuation production. is processed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and after performing the preparatory operation, the scrolling is started (see FIG. 109(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 109(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 109(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the periods of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Also, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 109(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 109(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 109(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '1' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 109(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reserved icon T13 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 without being shifted from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 109(h)).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted and displayed while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain as they are.

Thereafter, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the holding icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 109(i)). Here, in the specific example 2, it is a case where the performance control part 130m normally receives the command before the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory can be continuously executed.

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone production (prefetching zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is executed according to the notice scenario even in the variable production (target of prefetching production) executed during the variable display of the special pattern where the first reservation number U1 becomes “0” (see FIG. 109 (i)), and the prefetching zone production is executed when the production pattern 70a is fully stopped. ends.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 109-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the normal zone production (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is not continuously executed according to the notice scenario based on the variable production executed during the variable display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes "0" (target for prefetch production). may be terminated. When the look-ahead zone performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a mode of performance such as a mode A background in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than that of the look-ahead performance.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 110. FIG. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 110(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

Note that the specific example 3 in FIG. 110 differs from the specific example 2 in FIG. 109 in that the look-ahead effect presentation is executed instead of the look-ahead zone presentation as the look-ahead preview presentation and the icon change presentation is executed.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion operating and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 110(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 110(d)), and an effect sound is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a performance motion) (see FIG. 110(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 110(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 110(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) is continuously executed, and the state of FIG.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 110(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2" without execution of the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound).

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '1' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Further, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 110(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reserved icon T13 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 without being shifted from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect rendering is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 110(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change performance is continued, and the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) and scrolling of the background image are continuously executed.

Thereafter, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the holding icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect performance is once stopped, and the icon change performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 110(i)).

After that, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 is ``0'' (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead advance notice performance) is also performed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in the specific example 3, the performance control part 130m normally receives the command before the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory can be continuously executed.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 110-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 is "0". It may be terminated. When the look-ahead performance is not continuously executed, the look-ahead effect performance is erased at the timing of P10, and the mode of performance is changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation for a big win than the look-ahead effect performance, such as mode A background only. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 4 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 111. FIG. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 111(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

111 differs from the specific example 3 in FIG. 110 in that the first image display device 70 executes the icon change effect as the pre-reading foretelling effect and the effect (action effect and light emitting effect) by the first movable member 73 as the pre-reading foretelling effect is executed. Therefore, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. In specific example 3, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in specific example 2, the explanation is omitted.

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as part of the decoration part operating and whole or part expanding and contracting operations as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 111(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to a big win), and the first movable member 73 emits light (see FIG. 111(d)). It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a. The partial period of the variable performance is the variable performance period from the start of the variable performance to the stop (temporary stop or final stop) of the variable performance. is. In this specific example, the look-ahead effect executed during a partial period of the variable effect period is scheduled to be executed in two or more variable effects.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 111(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 111(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 111(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 111(g) is maintained except that the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is displayed as "2" without the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73 being executed.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 111(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-reading announcement effect (the motion effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the action of the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the command at the start (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '1' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T3 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 111(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is ``2'', the reserved icon T13 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 without being shift-displayed from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs the pre-reading forewarning effect. Specifically, the action effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73 are executed in accordance with the advance notice scenario, and sound effects are output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 111(h)). In this way, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead foretelling effect and scrolling of the background image by the operation of the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

Thereafter, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the holding icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead advance notice performance by the first movable member 73 is once stopped, and the icon change performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 111(i)).

After that, when the performance control part 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control part 110m can be normally received, the pre-reading notice performance and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed by the first movable member 73 even in the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 is ``0'' (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice performance). Then, at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, the look-ahead notice performance is completed, and at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TH is erased and the icon change performance is completed. Here, in the specific example 4, it is the case that the performance control part 130m normally receives the command before the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory can be continuously executed.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 111-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 is "0". Based on the variable effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol (the target of the expectation level suggestion by the prefetch effect), the icon change effect and the prefetch preview effect (the operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) are not continuously executed in accordance with the preview scenario, and the prefetch effect is not performed. It may be terminated. When the read-ahead performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P10, the execution of the read-ahead announcement performance is stopped, and the mode of performance is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big win than the look-ahead announcement performance, such as mode A background only. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win. Furthermore, the look-ahead effect by the first movable member 73 and the like is not executed.

According to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, at the timing of P10, the first reservation number U1 stored (recognized) by the production control unit 130m has been described from "3" to "1". When the first reservation number U1 changes from "4" to "2", and when the first reservation number U1 changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m. If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. As described above, in specific examples 2 to 4, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

Thus, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, while a specific number (for example, 3) of the reserved icons (first reserved information), which is two more than the predetermined number (for example, 1), is displayed in the reserved icon display area, when the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the reserved number is a predetermined number, the surplus reserved icons (for example, the 3rd reserved icon) out of the specific number of reserved icons are not shift-displayed, and the necessary reserved icons (for example, the 1st to 2nd) are displayed. second pending icon) is displayed in shift. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, 3) more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) of reserved icons (first reserved information) is displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the reserved number is a predetermined number, the reserved icons are displayed in a number that is one less than the specific number, and then the predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, 1) larger than the predetermined number (for example, 3) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while displaying the number of reservations, the number of reservations of a predetermined number is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 113(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the command at the start (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four suspended icons T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 are started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operation of a part of the decorative portion and expansion/reduction operation of the whole or a part thereof as in the present embodiment.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special symbol storage designation command, a first start winning prize designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4". In specific example 5, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance based on the pending memory due to the winning at the timing of P1. In the following description, the reserved memory that serves as a reference for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target reserved memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 113(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icons T1 to T4 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 113(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 113(c)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 113(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 113(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 113(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 113(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1". At the timing of P7 to P11, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '0' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' and '1' in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Further, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 and the surplus reserved icon T12 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B2 are deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived display) (see FIG. 113(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control part 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control part 130m is "3", the pending icon T13 is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the first pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, the required one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 113(h)).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted and displayed while the redundant reserved icons T1 remain as they are.

Thereafter, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and background image scrolling are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 113(i)). Here, in the specific example 5, it is a case where the performance control part 130m normally receives the command before the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory can be continuously executed.

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone production (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is executed according to the notice scenario even in the variable production (target of the prefetch production) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 becomes “0” (see FIG. 113 (i)), and the preread zone production is executed when the production design 70a is fully stopped. ends.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 113-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the normal zone production (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is not continuously executed according to the notice scenario based on the variable production (target of the prefetch production) executed during the variable display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes "0". may be terminated. When the look-ahead zone performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone performance is erased, and the mode of performance is changed to a performance mode such as a mode A background in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than that of the look-ahead performance.

(Concrete example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 114. FIG. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 114(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

114 differs from the specific example 5 in FIG. 113 in that the look-ahead effect presentation is executed instead of the look-ahead zone presentation as the look-ahead preview presentation and the icon change presentation is performed. Therefore, the explanation of the common parts is omitted here, and only the different parts are explained.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as part of the decoration part operating and whole or part expanding and contracting operations as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 114(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 114(d)), and an effect sound is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 114(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 114(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 114(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 114 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

At the timing of P8 to P11, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '0' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' and '1' in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the two surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 114(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the reserved icon T13 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 without being shifted from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, the required one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect rendering is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 114(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change performance is continued, and the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) and scrolling of the background image are continuously executed.

When a predetermined time elapses after the display of the pending icon T1 is completed, at the timing of P13, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect performance is once stopped, and the icon change performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 114(i)).

After that, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 is ``0'' (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead advance notice performance) is also performed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in the specific example 6, it is a case where the performance control part 130m normally receives the command before the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory can be continuously executed.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 114-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 is "0". It may be terminated. When the look-ahead performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P12, the look-ahead effect performance (if it is displayed) is erased, and the mode is changed to a mode of performance with a lower expectation for a big win than the look-ahead effect performance, such as mode A background only. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

(Concrete example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 7 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 115. FIG. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 115(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

115 differs from the specific example 6 in FIG. 115 in that the first image display device 70 executes the icon change effect as the pre-reading foretelling effect, and the first movable member 73 effect (movable effect and light emitting effect) as the fore-seeing foretelling effect is executed. Therefore, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. In concrete example 7, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in concrete example 6, the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion operating and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 115(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates (see FIG. 115(d)), and the first movable member 73 emits light, in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). Also, a predetermined sound effect is output. It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a performance motion) (see FIG. 115(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 115(f)). At this time, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 115(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained except that the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed as "2" without the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73 being executed.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

At the timing of P8 to P11, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the motion effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '0' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' and '1' in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Further, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the surplus reserved icon T12 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B2 is erased by one frame of non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 115(h)). Thus, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the reserved icon T13 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 without being shift-displayed from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shift-displayed from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, the required one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs the pre-reading forewarning effect. Specifically, the motion presentation of the first movable member 73 is executed in accordance with the advance notice scenario, and sound effects are output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 115(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the pre-reading notice effect and scrolling of the background image by the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead announcement effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is executed, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 115(i)).

After that, when the performance control part 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control part 110m can be normally received, the predictive notice performance and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed by the first movable member 73 even in the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reserved number is ``0'' (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the predictive notice performance). Then, at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, the look-ahead notice performance is completed, and at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TH is erased and the icon change performance is completed. Here, in the concrete example 7, it is the case that the performance control part 130m normally receives the command before the target reservation memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory can be continuously executed.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 115-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 is "0". Based on the variable effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the prefetch effect), the icon change effect and the prefetch preview effect (the operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) are not continuously executed according to the preview scenario, and the prefetch effect is not performed. It may be terminated. When the read-ahead performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P12, the execution of the read-ahead notice performance is stopped, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation for a big win than the read-ahead notice performance, such as mode A background only. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, at the timing of P10, the case where the first pending number stored (recognized) by the effect control unit 130m becomes "0" from "3" has been described. However, when the first pending number becomes "1" from "4", that is, if the divergence between the pending number recognized by the main control unit 110m and the pending number recognized by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above. becomes.

In specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. As described above, in specific examples 5 to 7, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is completed can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in the temporary stop state.

Thus, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, in the reserved icon display area, when a specific number (for example, 4) of reserved icons (first reserved information), which is 3 more than the predetermined number (for example, 1), is displayed, when the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the reserved number is a predetermined number, the reserved icons of a number that is one less than the specific number are displayed, and the predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115 , while a specific number (for example, 4) of reserved icons (first reserved information), which is 3 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1), is displayed in the reserved icon display area, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the reserved number is a predetermined number, the reserved icons of a number that is 1 less than the specific number are not displayed, and the reserved icons of a number that is 2 less than the specific number are displayed, and then the reserved icons of a predetermined number are displayed. It's like Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, 1) larger than the predetermined number (for example, 4) When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while displaying the number of reservations, the number of reservations of a predetermined number is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that are one and two less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. FIG. 116 is a timing chart 4 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 115(a) to (h) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG.

117 is the same as the specific example 5 in FIG. 112 up to the timing of P0 to P11, so the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 117(g) is obtained.

Next, at the timing of P13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 117(g) is maintained.

At this time, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has passed (a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation of P12), the temporary stop display of the production symbol 70a is continued (see FIG. 117 (h)). Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Also, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed. In this way, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation of P12.

Thus, according to the eighth example shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, when a predetermined state occurs in which a command is not normally received in the performance control unit 130m while the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a is being performed, the performance pattern 70a in which the variable performance is completed can be displayed in a swinging state, and the swinging state of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, so that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to prevent the loss of the player's interest and reduce the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 117-1, since the first reservation number U1 stored (knowed) by the main control unit 110m is "0", it may be shifted to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

In this case, all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance patterns 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

Here, when the production control unit 130m receives a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), the production design 70a may be permanently stopped instead of continuing the temporary stop display of the production design 70a. In this case, all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a deviated from the stop position (the performance patterns 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is fully stopped in a losing mode (extinguishing). Even in this case, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed on the first image display device 70 .

Thus, according to the modified example of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 117-1, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, all the effect patterns 70a including the effect pattern 70a shifted from the predetermined stop position (the effect pattern 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed (finally stopped) at the stop position. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable effect has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At the timings of P7, P11, and P13, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P14, the case where the customer waiting state designation command is received in the state where the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3" has been described. However, even when the customer waiting state designation command is received in the state where the first reservation number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. FIG. 118 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 119(a) to (h) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart of FIG.

117 and 119 are different in that the command received at the timing of P14 is an opening designation command, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At the timing of P14, when the stop time of the special symbols elapses, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening specifying command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed while the first reservation number U1 memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains ``3''.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E is maintained at '3', the performance pattern 70a, the reservation icon T1 and the icon TH displayed in the icon display area are erased, and the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance are completed. Also, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished), and an opening effect image is displayed (see FIG. 119(h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends (time saving game state, variable probability game state), if the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special symbol storage designation command from the main control unit 110m, The first reservation number U1 displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command in one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 119 (j)). FIG. 119(j) shows the case where the number of pending commands at start is "1". At this time, a predetermined (same) performance symbol 70a is displayed regardless of the combination of the performance symbols 70a that results in a big win. For example, even if the combination of the performance symbols 70a is "777" and the combination of "222" is the big win, the performance symbols 70a of "135" are displayed in the same combination as shown in FIG. 119(j). By doing so, it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

At the timing of P7 to P13, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P14, the case where the opening designation command is received in the state where the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3" has been described. However, even when the opening designation command is received in any state where the first reservation number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the ninth example shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance design 70a, all the performance designs 70a including the performance design 70a shifted from the predetermined stop position (the performance design 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are not displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and the opening performance image of the jackpot game is displayed. It's like Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 121(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Further, the four suspended icons T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 are started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operation of a part of the decorative portion and enlargement/reduction operation of the whole or a part thereof as in the present embodiment.

Next, at the timing of P1, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special pattern storage designation command, a first start winning prize designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one suspended icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 121(a)).

In specific example 10, based on the first pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 121(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image is changed to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and a look-ahead zone presentation (ordinary zone presentation) is executed in which the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 121(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 121(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 121(c)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 121(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 121(f)).

At the timing of P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, scrolling of the background image continues, and while the effect symbol 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a effect motion).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 121(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '1' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Further, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 121(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reserved icon T13 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 without being shifted from the first reserved icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, without continuing the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 121(h)).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted and displayed while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain as they are.

When the performance control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m at the timing of P10, the normal zone performance (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is not continuously executed according to the notice scenario based on the variable performance (target of the prefetch performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 becomes "0". Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the effect is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead effect, such as mode A background (see FIG. 121(h)). Thus, in the concrete example 10, it is the case where the performance control part 130m normally receives the command after the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, or the performance is changed to a performance with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead performance previously executed, or the look-ahead performance is deleted.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 121(i)).

At the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) may be continuously executed along the notice scenario based on the variable effect (prefetch effect target) executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first reservation number U1 is "0".

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 122. FIG. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 122(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

121 and 122 are different in that the look-ahead effect presentation is executed instead of the look-ahead zone presentation as the look-ahead preview presentation and the icon change presentation is performed. Therefore, the explanation of the common parts is omitted here, and only the different parts are explained.

In specific example 10, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 121(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of the big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 11, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect effect and an icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as part of the decoration part operating and whole or part expanding and contracting operations as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 122(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, the icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 122(d)). At this time, the scrolling of the background image is continued, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 122(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 122(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 122(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 122 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 122(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '1' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T3 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 122(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T3 is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display areas 70B1 and 70B2 are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 122(h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 122(i)).

When the performance control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect performance (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect effect sound) and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) are not continuously executed according to the notice scenario based on the variable performance (target of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 is ``0''. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect production is not executed, and the effect mode is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead production, such as mode A background (see FIG. 122(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in the eleventh specific example, it is the case that the performance control part 130m normally receives the command after the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, or the performance is changed to a performance with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead performance previously executed, or the look-ahead performance is deleted.

At the timing of P10, when various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the prefetch effect production (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change production (suspended icon change production and the icon change production) may be continuously executed along the notice scenario based on the variable production (target of the prefetch production) executed during the variable display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes "0".

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 123. FIG. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 123(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

123 differs from the specific example 11 in FIG. 122 in that the first movable member 73 executes a pre-reading effect (action effect or issue effect) as the pre-reading announcement effect, so here the common part will be omitted and only the different part will be explained.

In specific example 12, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 123(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 12, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Also, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 123(d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates and the first movable member 73 emits light in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). A sound effect is also output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 123(d)). It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a.

Also, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined action effect. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (effect action) (see FIG. 123(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 123(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern is extended. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the suspended icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 123(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 123(g) is maintained except that the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is displayed as "2" without executing the pre-reading notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 123(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the motion effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '1' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 123(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reserved icon T1 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 123(h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 123(i)).

At the timing of P10, when the performance control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, based on the variable performance (target of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 is ``0'', the read-ahead notice performance and the icon change performance (the reserved icon change performance and the icon change performance) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed along the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the first movable member 73 does not execute the fore-ahead forewarning effect, and the first movable member 73 stands still at the standby position, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode with a lower degree of expectation for the big win than the fore-reading effect so as to emit light in a more modest manner than the light-off or fore-reading forewarning effect (see FIG. 123(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in the eleventh specific example, it is the case that the performance control part 130m normally receives the command after the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, or the performance is changed to a performance with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead performance previously executed, or the look-ahead performance is deleted.

At the timing of P10, when various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, based on the variable production (target of the look-ahead production) executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first reservation number U1 is "0", the pre-reading announcement production and the icon change production (suspended icon change production and the icon change production) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed along the announcement scenario.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the transmitted command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, at the timing of P10, the first pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) is "1" from "3". When the first pending number becomes "4" to "2", and when the first holding number becomes "0" from "2", that is, the holding number grasped by the main control unit 110m and the holding number grasped by the production control unit 130m. is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. As described above, in specific examples 10 to 12, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

Thus, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, while a specific number (for example, 3) of the reserved icons (first reserved information), which is two more than the predetermined number (for example, 1), is displayed in the reserved icon display area, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the reserved number is the predetermined number, the surplus reserved icons (for example, the 3rd reserved icon) among the specific number of reserved icons are not shift-displayed, and the necessary reserved icons (for example, the 1st) are displayed. ~ second pending icon) is displayed in shift. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, 3) more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) of reserved icons (first reserved information) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the reserved number is a predetermined number, the reserved icons are displayed in a number that is one less than the specific number, and then the predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, 1) that is two more than the predetermined number (for example, 3) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of reservations is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 125(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Further, the four suspended icons T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 are started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operation of a part of the decorative portion and enlargement/reduction operation of the whole or a part thereof as in the present embodiment.

Next, at the timing of P1, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special symbol storage designation command, a first start winning prize designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 125(a)).

In specific example 13, based on the first suspension memory corresponding to suspension icon T12 in FIG. 125(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image is changed to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and a look-ahead zone presentation (ordinary zone presentation) is executed in which the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 125(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 125(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 125(c)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 125(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 125(f)).

At the timing of P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, scrolling of the background image continues, and while the effect symbol 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a effect motion).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 125(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '0' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' and '1' in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Further, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 125(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reserved icon T1 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 125(h)).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted and displayed while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain as they are.

At the timing of P13, when the performance control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the normal zone performance (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is not continuously executed along the notice scenario based on the variable performance (target of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 becomes "0". Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the effect mode is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead effect, such as mode A background (see FIG. 125(h)). Thus, in the concrete example 13, it is the case that the performance control part 130m normally receives the command after the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the read-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, or the performance is changed to a performance with a lower expectation for the big hit than the previously executed look-ahead performance, or the look-ahead performance is deleted.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 125(i)).

At the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the normal zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) may be continuously executed along the notice scenario based on the variable effect (prefetch effect target) executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first reservation number U1 is "0".

(Concrete example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 126. FIG. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 126(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

125 and 126 are different in that the look-ahead effect presentation is executed instead of the look-ahead zone presentation as the look-ahead notice presentation, and the icon change presentation is also performed. Therefore, the explanation of the common parts is omitted here, and only the different parts are explained.

In specific example 13, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 125(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 14, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect effect and an icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 126(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, the icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed (see FIG. 126(d)). At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 126(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 126(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are extended, and temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the suspended icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 126(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 126 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 126 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound).

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

At the timings of P8 and P11, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '0' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' and '1' in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 126(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reserved icon T1 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 126(h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 126(i)).

When the performance control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m at the timing of P13, based on the variable performance (target of the look-ahead performance) to be executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first pending number U1 is ``0'', the look-ahead effect performance (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change performance (suspended icon change performance and the icon change performance) are not continuously executed along the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead effect production is not executed, and the effect mode is changed to a mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than the look-ahead production, such as mode A background (see FIG. 126(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in the concrete example 14, it is a case where the performance control part 130m normally receives the command after the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, or the performance is changed to a performance with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead performance previously executed, or the look-ahead performance is deleted.

At the timing of P13, when various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the prefetch effect production (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change production (holding icon change production and the icon change production) may be continuously executed along the notice scenario based on the fluctuation production (target of the prefetch production) executed during the variable display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes "0".

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 15 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 127. FIG. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 127(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG.

127 differs from the specific example 14 in FIG. 126 in that the first movable member 73 executes a pre-reading effect (action effect or issue effect) as the pre-reading forewarning effect, so here the common part will be omitted and only the different part will be explained. In concrete example 15, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in concrete example 14, the explanation is omitted.

In specific example 15, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 127(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 15, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Also, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 127(d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates (see FIG. 127(d)), and the first movable member 73 emits light, in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). A sound effect is also output. It should be noted that the look-ahead foretelling effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be continuously executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of times of the variable effect of the effect pattern 70a in the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a.

Also, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined action effect. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (effect action) (see FIG. 127(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 127(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern is extended. The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 127(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained except that the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is displayed as "2" without the pre-reading notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 being executed.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained except that the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" without the pre-reading notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 being executed.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P11, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the action effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes '0' directly from '3' without going through '3' to '2' and '1' in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a displaced from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 127(h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reserved icon T1 is erased from the first reserved icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 127(h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 127(i)).

At the timing of P13, when the performance control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, based on the variable performance (target of the look-ahead performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the first reservation number U1 is ``0'', the read-ahead notice performance and the icon change performance (suspended icon change performance and the icon change performance) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed along the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P12, the first movable member 73 does not execute the fore-ahead foretelling effect, and the first movable member 73 stands still at the standby position, and the effect mode is changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation for the big win than the fore-reading effect so as to turn off or emit light in a more modest manner than the fore-reading foretell effect (see FIG. 127(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in the concrete example 14, it is a case where the performance control part 130m normally receives the command after the target reservation memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, or the performance is changed to a performance with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead performance previously executed, or the look-ahead performance is deleted.

At the timing of P13, when various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the effect control unit 130m, the prefetching notice effect and the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed according to the notice scenario based on the variable effect (target of the prefetch effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first reservation number U1 becomes "0".

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, at the timing of P7 to P11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from .

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, at the timing of P12, the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m has been described as being "0" from "3", but when the first pending number becomes "1" from "4", that is, if the divergence between the pending number grasped by the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m is grasped is "3", the basic flow is described above. is the same as

In specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. Thus, in the specific examples 13 to 15, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

Thus, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the reserved icon display area, while displaying a specific number (for example, 3) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than the predetermined number (for example, 1), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the reserved number is a predetermined number, the surplus reserved icons (for example, the 3rd reserved icon) out of the specific number of reserved icons are not shift-displayed, and the necessary reserved icons (for example, the 1st ~ second pending icon) is displayed in shift. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, 3) more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) of reserved icons (first reserved information) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the reserved number is a predetermined number, the reserved icons are displayed in a number that is one less than the specific number, and then the predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, 1) two more than the predetermined number (for example, 3) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while displaying the number of reservations, the number of reservations of a predetermined number is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 16 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. FIG. 128 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 129(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the first lamp pattern is started in the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the sub-first fluctuation display 81, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 129(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for updating the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is not performed and remains “1” (see FIG. 129 (b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (drawing motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 129(c)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (see FIG. 129(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the variable display of the first special symbols is started as the first reserved number U1 memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``2'' to ``1''. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the first reservation number U1 does not change and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the second pending icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 129(e)).

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 129(e)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 129(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production (the SP reach production ends), the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in a reach loss mode (“161”). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 129(g)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 129 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P9, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the variable display of the first special symbols is started as the first reserved number U1 memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and one pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 129(i)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the icon TH is in a state of performing a rotating operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 129(j)).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of P2 to P4, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when 30m cannot be received normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P5, the case where the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" has been described. If the stored (grasped) pending number is the same, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, while a predetermined number (eg, one) of pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of pending is a predetermined number, after displaying a number of pending icons one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed by shift-displaying these pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation display device 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two) is not displayed, and the predetermined number of reservations is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, but while the icon is being displayed, the number of pending is "0" When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, after displaying the pending icon that is one more than "0" (for example, 1), the pending icon is shifted and displayed so that the pending icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, while displaying the pending number of "0" in the sub first pending display device 83 or the first pending number display area 70E, the pending number becomes "0" When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the pending number of "0" is displayed (maintained) without displaying the pending number of one more than "0" (for example, one). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 17 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 17 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. FIG. 130 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 131(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart of FIG.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 131(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for updating the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is not performed and remains “1” (see FIG. 131 (b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "3". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for updating the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is not performed and remains “1” (see FIG. 131 (b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for updating the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is not performed and remains “1” (see FIG. 131 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 131(c)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the period of temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (see FIG. 131(d)).

After that, at the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the variable display of the first special symbols is started as the first reserved number U1 memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special symbol memory designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth pending icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed in one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 131(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 131(e)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 131(f)).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of P2 to P6, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (winning command, stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the time command) is performed.

Here, at the timing of P7, the case where the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" has been described. is greater than the stored (kept) pending number, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the concrete example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of pending is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the predetermined number, the pending icons that are one larger than the specified number (for example, three) are displayed, and then the holding icons are shifted to display the specific number of pending icons. has become Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the predetermined number, the specific number of reservations is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one more than the specific number (for example, three). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but the number of pending during the display of the icon is a predetermined number (for example, 1) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, after displaying the pending icon that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2), these pending icons are shifted and displayed to display the predetermined number of pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, the number of reservations is a predetermined number while displaying the number of "0" in the sub first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

According to the above-described specific example, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command during the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern, and the output period of the BGM during fluctuation are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon are continued. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring performance with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). Therefore, even when a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive the command, the read-ahead foretelling performance is not terminated, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, even if the look-ahead advance notice performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance design 70a, the notice mode (icon type, zone performance type) of the look-ahead prediction performance is not changed during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance design 70a. As a result, the advance of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not abnormal, and the game can be more interesting by avoiding inconveniences that cause dissatisfaction of the player.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance design 70a, all the performance designs 70a including the performance design 70a shifted from the predetermined stop position (the performance design 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), and then the variable display is started. Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display is started with the performance pattern 70a deviated from the stop position, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern are not stopped and displayed, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol. In addition, even if the performance pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern can inform the player that the variable performance is being performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example described above, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the icon is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than the normal time (10 frames of animation when the stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the change performance to be newly executed to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) is continued (executed), the look-ahead preview performance can be executed even in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even when a communication abnormality occurs in which the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive a command, the look-ahead foretelling performance is not terminated, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the start time command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the look-ahead foretelling performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) is continued (executed), it is possible to execute the performance of the contents corresponding to the scenario of the look-ahead foretelling performance in the newly executed fluctuating performance. Therefore, even when a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive the command, the advance of the pre-reading announcement performance does not become abnormal, and the amusement of the game can be improved by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied.

(Concrete example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 18 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. FIG. 132 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 133(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, the shift display of the pending icon is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of P2, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the prize command (first special symbol storage designation command, first start winning prize designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for updating the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is not performed and remains "1".

At this time, since the winning command in which the first reservation number U1 is "2" has not been received, the first reservation number U1 displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E remains "1", and the reservation icon T1 is not displayed in the second corresponding to the first reservation number "2" in the first reservation icon display area 70B (see FIG. 133 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special pattern storage designation command, a first start winning prize designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the second reservation icon T1 corresponding to "2" of the first reservation number U1 that could not receive the winning command in the first reservation icon display area 70B is not displayed, and one reservation icon T1 is additionally displayed as a 10-frame animation at the third corresponding to "3" of the first reservation number U1. (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 133(b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 133(c)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off) (see FIG. 133 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the variable display of the first special symbols is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``3'' to ``2''. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and in the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon T1 corresponding to the first pending number "2" for which the winning command could not be received is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning), and the displayed three pending icons T1 are displayed as 20 frames of animation. The icons are shifted toward the area 70C and the top one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 133(e)).

After that, at the timing of P7, the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 133(f)).

Next, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 133(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is completely stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off) (see FIG. 133 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 133(i)).

Next, at the timing of P11, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the icon Th is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 133(j)).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of P2, the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. will be processed.

Here, at the timing of P3, when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", the case where the command at the time of winning that the first reservation number U1 is "3" is received has been described. When is "0", the basic flow is the same as the above-described explanation even when the winning prize command in which the first reservation number U1 is "2", "3", or "4" is received.

Thus, according to the eighteenth embodiment shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, when the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the pending icon display areas, if the production control unit 130m receives a prize-winning command with a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the pending icon is not displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to the predetermined number of the pending icon display areas, and is held. A reserved icon is displayed in a specific number of icon display areas (for example, the third icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) (for example, one). When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that makes the reservation number a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the specific number of reservations is displayed without displaying the predetermined number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

132 and 133, when the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the pending icon display areas, when the effect control unit 130m receives a prize-winning command in which the number of pending icons is a specific number (for example, four) greater than the predetermined number, the area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number of pending icon display areas corresponds to a number less than the specified number by one. Instead of displaying the pending icon in the area (for example, the third) to be displayed, the pending icon is displayed in an area (for example, the fourth) corresponding to a specific number of the pending icon display areas. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, while displaying the number of reservations (for example, 1) less than a predetermined number (for example, 2) in the sub first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that makes the number of reservations more than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the specific number of reservations is displayed without displaying the number of reservations from the predetermined number to the specific number. It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

132 to 133, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command with a predetermined number of pending icons while the pending icon is displayed in an area (for example, 3rd) corresponding to a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number without displaying the pending icon in an area (for example, 2nd) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 2) of the pending icon display areas, an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 2nd) of the pending icon display areas is held. After displaying additional icons to display a specific number of reserved icons, the reserved icons are shifted to display a predetermined number of reserved icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

132 and 133, the pending icon is not displayed in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and an area (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), and while the reserved icon is displayed in an area (for example, fourth) that corresponds to a specific number (for example, four) that is more than the predetermined number (for example, four), the production control unit 130m issues a command at the start when the reserved number is one less than the specific number. When it is received, a specific number of reserved icons are additionally displayed in an area corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., second) of the reserved icon display area and an area corresponding to a number (e.g., three) greater than the predetermined number by one to display a specific number of reserved icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the concrete example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, for the icon corresponding to the first reserved memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command, the icon change effect is not executed while the icon is displayed as the reserved icon, but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the production control board 130 in a state where the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (4 or 3) of reserved memories, the number of reserved numbers is continuously reduced and displayed on the first special symbol holding display 63 (first display) even during the occurrence of the abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of an abnormality, in a state in which the main control board 110 has a specific number (two or more less than the number of the main control board 110) of reserved memories that is less than the predetermined number (the number is two or more than the number of the main control board 110), when the command is normally received in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 (second display) does not display the reserved display (for example, the number of reserved icons is 4 to 2 or 1, or 3 to 1) that gradually decreases from the predetermined number to the specific number.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance by the suspension display (display of the number of suspensions, a suspension icon) is possible, and when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance by the suspension display, the look-ahead performance by the suspension display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used, such as the look-ahead zone background) enables a pre-reading performance (advance notification) to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, and when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the performance control board 130 during execution of the pre-reading performance by the background display, the pre-reading performance by the background display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, a read-ahead performance (advance notification) to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance by character display (for example, a telop or characters such as "ZONE") is possible, and when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the performance control board 130 during execution of the read-ahead performance by character display, the read-ahead performance by character display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance by the expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) is possible, and when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance by the expectation level display, the look-ahead performance by the expectation level display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, there is a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects in the period before the reach (for example, the first movable member 70 and other board and frame accessories, operations such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and a chance eye of the same color of the effect pattern). , the look-ahead effect can be continued and executed.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, a read-ahead performance (advance notification) to the effect that the degree of expectation of a big win is increased in advance is possible, and if an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the read-ahead performance and there is a big hit in the reserve memory that the performance control board 130 has failed to receive, the read-ahead performance by the reserve display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received, and a predetermined big winning opening may be opened.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, there is a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances in the period before the reach (for example, the first movable member 70 and other board and frame accessories, operations such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the performance pattern). The pre-reading effect that was scheduled to be executed continuously is not performed from the continuation.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a prior notification to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, there is a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects in the period before the reach (for example, the first movable member 70 and other board and frame accessories, operations such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance of the production pattern). After the abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in a performance control board 130 during the execution of continuous prefetch performance over a plurality of pattern variations based on the first suspension memory, when the command corresponding to the second suspension storage stored after the first suspension storage is normally received, the prefetch performance scheduled to be continuously executed based on the predetermined suspension storage is not carried out from the continuation.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the production control board 130 in a state where the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (4 or 3) of pending memories, the first special symbol holding display 63 continues to decrease the number of holdings (first display) even during the occurrence of the error. Then, after the occurrence of an abnormality, when the main control board 110 has a specific number (two or more less than the main control board 110) of reserved memories that is less than the predetermined number (the number is two or more than the number of the main control board 110), when the command is normally received in the effect control board 130, the reserved number display area 70B, 70D of the first image display device 70 gradually decreases from the predetermined number to the specific number (second display, for example, from 4 to 2 or 1, 3 to 1) It is set not to display. On the other hand, in the reserved number display areas 70F, 70E of the first image display device 70, the reserved display (third display, for example, reserved number) that decreases step by step from the predetermined number to the specific number is not displayed, and is changed to the reserved display of the specific number.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the performance pattern 70a in which the variable performance is completed can be displayed in a temporary stop state (swing state), and the temporary stop state (swing state) of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time has passed from the start of the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a, so that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed.
Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the prefetch performance based on the first reserve memory, when the command corresponding to the second reserve memory stored after the first reserve memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the prefetch performance (advance notification) scheduled to be continuously executed with respect to the first reserve memory is not continued, or the lookahead performance is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the prefetch performance is changed. It is designed to erase the performance.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the prefetching effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the prefetching zone background), when the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect pattern 70a, the prefetching effect (advance report) by the background display that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first pending memory. (Intelligence) is not performed continuously, or the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first reserved memory, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the read-ahead performance by character display (for example, a telop or characters such as "ZONE"), when the command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the read-ahead performance (advance notification) by the character display that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first reserved memory is continued. It is not performed, or the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the prefetching performance by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), when the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the prefetching performance (advance notification) by the expectation level display scheduled to be continuously executed for the first pending memory is performed. It is not performed continuously, or the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low expectation, or the look-ahead effect is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. As advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in the period before reach, there are multiple variable effects in the period before the reach, and a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, the first movable member 70 and other board and frame accessories, operations such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, etc.
There is a chance eye of the same color of the production pattern, etc.). Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the read-ahead performance executed in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances in the period before reach, when the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the read-ahead performance (advance notification) scheduled to be continuously executed for the first pending memory is continued. There is no, or the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, when there is a jackpot in the command (reserved memory) that the performance control board 130 has missed due to an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of the command in the performance control board 130, when the command corresponding to the reservation memory stored after the big win reservation memory or the reservation memory memorized after the jackpot reservation memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the pre-reading performance (advance notification) by the expectation degree display scheduled to be continuously executed for the first reservation memory is not continued or the expectation degree of the pre-read performance is not performed. may be changed to a display with a lower value, or the look-ahead effect may be deleted.
In this case, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the prefetch performance based on the first reserve memory, when the command corresponding to the first reserve memory or the second reserve memory stored before the first reserve memory is normally received, the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a makes it possible to continuously execute the prefetch performance (advance notification) scheduled to be continuously executed for the first reserve memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance based on the first suspension memory, when the command corresponding to the first suspension memory or the second suspension memory stored before the first suspension memory is normally received, the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a does not continue to execute the look-ahead performance (advance notification) scheduled to be continuously executed for the first suspension memory.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the prefetching effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the prefetching zone background), when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect pattern 70a, the destination by the background display that was scheduled to be executed continuously with respect to the first pending memory. It is possible to continue reading performance (preliminary notification).
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the prefetching effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the prefetching zone background), when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect pattern 70a, the destination by the background display that was scheduled to be executed continuously with respect to the first pending memory. The reading effect (preliminary notification) is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the pre-reading effect by character display (for example, telop or characters such as "ZONE"), when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading effect (advance report) by the character display that was scheduled to be executed continuously with respect to the first pending memory. knowledge) can be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the pre-reading effect by character display (for example, telop or characters such as "ZONE"), when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading effect (advance report) by the character display that was scheduled to be executed continuously with respect to the first pending memory. knowledge) is not executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the prefetching performance by the expectation level display (for example, the color effect such as the blue effect image EF), when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the prefetching performance by the expectation level display that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory. advance notification) can be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the prefetching performance by the expectation degree display (for example, the color effect such as the blue effect image EF), when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, the prefetching performance by the expectation degree display scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory ( advance notification) is not executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, a hold display (hold number display, hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, a background image different from what is normally used), a character display (for example, a telop or character such as "ZONE"), an expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), board and frame functions such as the first movable member 70, and vibration of the operation button. It is possible to combine a plurality of such operations, light emission, and chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead performances, the first look-ahead performance (for example, pending display) out of the plurality of look-ahead performances can be continuously executed, while the second look-ahead performance (for example, background display, operation performance of the first movable member 70, etc.) out of the plurality of look-ahead performances is not continuously executed until the command is received normally.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, a hold display (hold number display, hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, a background image different from what is normally used), a character display (for example, a telop or character such as "ZONE"), an expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), board and frame functions such as the first movable member 70, and vibration of the operation button. It is possible to combine a plurality of such operations, light emission, and chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead performances, the first look-ahead performance (for example, pending display) out of the plurality of look-ahead performances can be continuously executed, while the second look-ahead performance (for example, background display, operation performance of the first movable member 70, etc.) out of the plurality of look-ahead performances is not continuously executed until the command is received normally.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (holding number display, holding icon), background display (for example, a background image different from what is normally used, such as a look-ahead zone background), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board and frame functions such as the first movable member 70, and vibration of the operation button. It is possible to combine a plurality of such operations, light emission, and chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to an abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, pending display) executed using the first image display device 70 among the plurality of prefetch effects can be continuously executed until the command is normally received, while the second prefetch effect (for example, operation effect of the first movable member 70) executed using a device other than the first image display device 70 among the plurality of prefetch effects is not continuously executed. has become
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (holding number display, holding icon), background display (for example, a background image different from what is normally used, such as a look-ahead zone background), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board and frame functions such as the first movable member 70, and vibration of the operation button. It is possible to combine a plurality of such operations, light emission, and chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in a performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch performances, when a command is normally received, a first prefetch performance (for example, pending display) among the plurality of prefetch performances can be continuously executed, while a second prefetch performance (for example, background display, operation performance of the first movable member 70, etc.) among the plurality of prefetch performances is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (holding number display, holding icon), background display (for example, a background image different from what is normally used, such as a look-ahead zone background), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board and frame functions such as the first movable member 70, and vibration of the operation button. It is possible to combine a plurality of such operations, light emission, and chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch effects, when a command is normally received, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) executed using the first image display device 70 among the plurality of prefetch effects can be continuously executed. are
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of a stop time command (special pattern determination command) occurs in the performance control board 130 in a state where there is a reserved memory, the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a in the first image display device 70 is not started, and the performance pattern 70a that has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a rocking state. At this time, even when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T1 corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the operation presentation of the identification part (number) constituting the performance pattern 70a and the effect (EF) associated with the character is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of a stop time command (special pattern determination command) occurs in the performance control board 130 in a state where there is a reserved memory, the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a in the first image display device 70 is not started, and the performance pattern 70a that has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T1 corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the operation performance of a part of the decoration (for example, the bar-shaped image SG) attached to the character constituting the performance pattern 70a is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of a stop time command (special pattern determination command) occurs in the performance control board 130 in a state where there is a reserved memory, the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a in the first image display device 70 is not started, and the performance pattern 70a that has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the motion effect of the pending icon T is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

When the number of reservations stored in the main control board 110 is less than the number of reservations stored in the performance control board 130 by 2 or more, the number of the reservation icons displayed on the liquid crystal (the first image display device, the second image display device) is rewritten to the number of the reservation icons corresponding to the number of reservations of the command input from the main control board 110 without performing stepwise reduction of the number of reservations displayed on the liquid crystal (the first image display device, the second image display device).
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Pre-notification (read-ahead effect) that increases the expectation of a big hit includes, for example, hold change, hold change character display, hold change character display change, character display (telop) that suggests transition to a mode consisting of multiple types, background color change, background conversion, return of appearing characters, appearance of new characters, expectation display with multiple types (colors, effects, characters, etc.), predetermined effects (button vibration, frame/board role movement, effects, thunder, characters) performed in the first period (before reach) from the start of fluctuation. A display, a specific sound, and a predetermined lamp light emission) may be executed in parallel.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next and subsequent stop commands via the state of abnormal reception or non-reception of the stop command, the performance pattern 70a is statically displayed (main stop) and display processing according to the command is executed.

Even if the effect control board 130 has abnormally received or not received the stop command, the background image associated with each of the plurality of effect modes may be displayed. At this time, in a plurality of production modes, although a common display mode (shape and color) is displayed for suspension, simulation, group notice, etc., the degree of expectation may differ depending on the production mode. For example, an operation image of an operation button, an operation image of an operation means such as a lever, a display of a light guide plate, a title display, and the like are displayed in a mode with different expectations for a big win depending on the production mode.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop time command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt, but the previous pre-reading performance may not be continuously executed when the next command is normally received.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop time command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt, but when the next command is normally received, a new performance (for example, the icon change at that time is included) may be executed.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormal reception or non-receipt state of the stop time command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt, but when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to change to a display mode with a lower expectation than the previous pre-reading performance (for example, the pending display is changed from the blue icon to the plain display).

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-read performance of changing the background display (mode, stage), the pre-read performance of changing the background display (mode, stage) may be continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via a state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading performance of displaying character display (for example, telop), the pre-reading performance of displaying character display (telop) may be continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via a state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading performance of displaying the expected value display (color change, effect, suspension), the pre-reading performance of displaying the expected value display (color change, effect, suspension) may be continuously executed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception.

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, it is not limited to displaying some of the plurality of performance patterns 70a after completion of the variable performance in a temporarily stopped state (oscillating state), but some of the plurality of performance patterns 70a in which the variable performance is completed may be displayed in a temporarily stopped state (swinging state) and the rest of the plurality of performance patterns 70a may be displayed in a permanent stop state (stationary state). For example, when a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, the two left and right performance patterns 70a are permanently stopped while the central performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, or the two left and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped while the central performance pattern 70a is permanently stopped.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, if the performance pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of reduction (smaller than the normal size) or deviated in the direction of expansion (larger than the normal size), it should be displayed in the normal size at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may not swing and the decorative part and the number part may protrude from the base image. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decoration part or the number part is displaced in the direction of protruding from the base image, it should be displayed at the stop position in a state of being within the base image.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the fluctuation operation (production operation) of the decoration part is not performed when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. A performance action) may be performed.

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, an effect may be executed such that the identification part (number) constituting the effect pattern 70a in which the variable effect is finished operates. In this case, the action performance is not limited to being executed by a part of the plurality of performance patterns 70a for which the variable performance is completed, but the action performance may be executed by a part of the plurality of performance patterns 70a for which the variable performance is completed, and the rest of the plurality of performance patterns 70a may not be used for the motion performance.

When a command of a performance control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute a performance such that an effect (for example, a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character) attached to a character (for example, a character image CG) constituting a performance pattern 70a whose variable performance is completed operates. In this case, the action performance is not limited to being executed by a part of the plurality of performance patterns 70a for which the variable performance is completed, but the action performance may be executed by a part of the plurality of performance patterns 70a for which the variable performance is completed, and the rest of the plurality of performance patterns 70a may not be used for the motion performance.

When the command of the performance control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute the performance such that the decoration (for example, the stick-shaped image SG which is a part of the character) attached to the character (for example, the character image CG) constituting the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance is completed operates. In this case, the action performance is not limited to being executed by a part of the plurality of performance patterns 70a for which the variable performance is completed, but the action performance may be executed by a part of the plurality of performance patterns 70a for which the variable performance is completed, and the rest of the plurality of performance patterns 70a may not be used for the motion performance.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the decorative portion are made to fluctuate (produce), but only one of the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE may fluctuate (produce).

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute an effect such that a pending display (for example, a pending icon) operates.

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute an effect such that a pending display (for example, a pending icon) operates.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to continue the fluctuation of the special symbol TZ.

When the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a is started based on the normal command after the command of the performance control board 130 is missed, the numerical information of the performance pattern 70a and the numerical information of the special pattern TZ may be different.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, at least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the frame lighting device 10 may be set to the same mode as during the temporary stop before the extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). At least one of them may be the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation, or off). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 changes (switches) to a lighting mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a in the losing mode is actually stopped, the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the special pattern TZ may be finally stopped in the losing mode in which the number is the same as that of the production pattern 70a. In addition, when the performance pattern 70a of the big win mode is actually stopped, the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined big win mode ("333"), but the special pattern TZ may be finally stopped in the big win mode with the same number as the performance pattern 70a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production design 70a, the variable display of the special design TZ and the lamp design is continued, but similar to the production design 70a, the variation display may be started after instantaneously derived display. In this case, as for the special symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start command or the customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TH is displayed, the icon TH is erased by one frame of non-animation. However, the icon TH may be erased by animation of 5 frames, for example, as long as it is shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TH, 20 frames for shift display of the pending icon T, and 10 frames for additional display of the pending icon based on the reception of the stop command.

In the present embodiment, when a start command is received while a number of pending icons greater than the number of pending icons is displayed, the surplus pending icons T1 are erased by one frame of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon T1, 20 frames for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the pending icon based on the reception of the stop command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start when the number of reservations is a predetermined number, the number of reservations notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m are inconsistent due to the command abnormality (abnormality that is the same number, abnormality that diverges in the increasing direction). A predetermined number of pending icons may be displayed as they are without displaying a number of pending icons that are one more.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start when the number of reservations is a predetermined number, the number of reservations notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m are inconsistent due to the command abnormality (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction). In such a case, the icon is displayed during the variable production executed in response to the reception of the command at the start, but according to the reception of the command at the start. The icon may not be displayed during the variable effect executed by pressing.

Also, in this embodiment, the normal icon is the CD icon regardless of the type of effect mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed according to the type of effect mode or game state. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of the production mode or the game state, the action mode (form of the production action) during the variable production may be changed according to the form of the normal icon. Further, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (form of production action) during the variable production may be changed according to the form of the special icon.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon is displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but a special icon that suggests a change to the special icon (displayed in the process of changing to the special icon) or a specific icon that suggests that a specific ready-to-win effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect) will be executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

Also, in the present embodiment, the pending icon is displayed when both the prefetching designation command of the pending number designation command as the command at the time of winning are normally received, but the pending icon is displayed when the pending number designation command is received and the prefetching designation command is not normally received. In addition, when receiving only one of the pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for the pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the performance mode is not accepted, that is, the change of the performance mode based on the operation of the performance button 17 is regulated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon may be displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, and the operation change effect of changing the button icon to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon that activates the effect button 17 is being displayed. In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 may be changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). In this case, the rate at which the performance button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change performance should be higher than the rate at which the performance button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned speech advance notice performance and final performance.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation part for performing the operation effect (dialogue announcement effect, decision effect) is only the effect button 17, but an operation part such as a effect lever or the like is provided separately from the effect button 17, for example, during the effective period that occurs during the SP ready-to-win effect, an operation promoting effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever is executed, and the operation effect (decision effect etc.) is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever. In this case, the decision performance in the SP ready-to-win performance executable only in a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) may be performed at a lower rate (difficult to execute) to prompt the operation of the performance button 17 than in the case of executing the SP ready-to-win performance executable only in the normal game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the execution period of the ready-to-win performance, an operation notice performance to suggest the degree of expectation that a big win game will be executed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 17 that has become effective is not executed. In this case, the ratio of the performance button 17 to the second operation mode (vibration, movement to the performance position) should be higher in the operation announcement performance executed in the latter half period of the ready-to-win performance than in the operation announcement performance executed in the first half period of the ready-to-win performance.

Further, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the notice in the big win notice effect and the motion of the movable member are not linked, but the degree of expectation of the notice in the big win notice effect and the motion of the movable member may be linked. In this case, during the execution of the variable performance, it is preferable to make the moving member operate at a higher rate (easier to operate) when the advance notice performance with the content of the low expectation of the big win is executed than when the prediction performance with the content of the low expectation of the big win is executed.

In this embodiment, the first image display device 70 displays a pending icon T1 (T2) in the pending icon display area 70B (70C) and a pending number in the pending number display area 70E (70F) as pending storage. Thus, in the pending icon display area 70B (70C), the pending number is displayed by the display number of the pending icon T1 (T2), and in the pending number display area 70E (70F), the pending number is displayed by the numerical information of the pending number. The pending icon T1 (T2) is not limited to a single picture, figure, character, or symbol as in the "CD" shape of the present embodiment, but may be a combination of a plurality of pictures, figures, characters, or symbols, or may have an effect (effect production) or decoration attached to the main part such as a picture, figure, character, or symbol.

The display of the pending number such as the pending icon change effect is not limited to the change of the pending icon alone, but may be changed by the actions of other characters or the effects of the effects of the characters. In addition, the change in the pending icon change effect is not limited to the timing of the specific example described above.

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification) by character display, the example of scrolling the characters "ZONE" in the horizontal direction was given, but the character display is not limited to meaningful character strings, but may be symbols, pictures, drawings, or a combination thereof. In addition, a plurality of character displays may be provided, and the selected character display may differ depending on the degree of expectation. The character display is not limited to scrolling left and right, but can be zoomed in or out, panned or tilted, etc., to attract the attention of the player.

As the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by means of the degree of expectation display, the blue effect image EF is exemplified, and the one by the color effect is mentioned. Further, the degree of expectation display is not limited to accompanying the production pattern 70a or by the production pattern 70a itself, but may be displayed in the background or the like. Furthermore, the degree of expectation display is not limited to being displayed on the first image display device 70, but may be performed by a prize-winning device such as an accessory, a light emitting device, or a starter provided on the game board, or light emitted from an accessory, a light emitting device, or the like provided in the game frame.

The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the degree-of-expectation display may be an effect executed only before the ready-to-win or an effect also executed after the ready-to-win. Moreover, when performing the degree-of-expectation display after reach, it may be displayed continuously in the form before reach, or may be changed so as to be displayed in a form different from the form before reach.

The look-ahead performance (preliminary notification) may be progressed at variable performance or appropriate timing according to the scenario drawn by lottery, or may be progressed according to the result by performing lottery for the presence or absence of progress and necessity of change of expectation for each variable performance.

As the effect representation represented by the effect, the design effect image ZE for decorating the background of the character and the color effect exemplifying the blue effect image EF are given, but not limited to the color effect, for example, a light emission effect such as a halo, a function effect such as being sucked in like a black hole, or a wind blowing.

In the present embodiment, a specific example has been described in which the icon TH is not displayed when the command is normally received from a predetermined state in which the command cannot be normally received in the effect control unit 130m. However, when the command is normally received and returned, the icon TH may be displayed and then deleted.

Similar to the production control unit 130m described above, when the first special symbol reservation display device 63 cannot normally receive a command (signal) from the main control unit 110m, a predetermined state in which the reservation number displayed by the first special symbol reservation display device 63 and the reservation number grasped (stored) by the production control unit 130m diverge may occur.
That is, the first special symbol pending display 63 (first display means) can execute the first shift display that sequentially decreases the pending memory by one each time the variable production is started, and in a state where the production control unit 130m has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories, When a command (signal) of a specific number (for example, 2) that is less than the predetermined number by two or more is received from the main control unit 110m, a reduction mode different from the first shift display (4 to 3) is received. A second shift representation can be performed that reduces the reserved storage from a predetermined number to a specified number in a manner that directly reduces to two without On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (second display means) controlled by the performance control section 130m can sequentially display the reserved memory one by one every time the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display or the second shift display is executed.
According to this, therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In a specific example, it is possible to display the pending memory stored (grasped) by the production control unit at a plurality of places. In this embodiment, the pending icon display area 70B (70
D) and the pending memory display area 70E (70F) are displayed in two places, for example,
The pending memory may be displayed on each of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, or at a plurality of locations on the second image display device 71. FIG.

In a specific example, in the pending icon display area 70B (70D), it is possible to execute the first shift display in which the pending memory is decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. This first shift display, for example, is displayed such that the pending icon T1 (T2) is shifted one by one each time the variable effect is performed. Further, in a state where, for example, four pending icons T1 (T2) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70B (70D), when the effect control unit 130m receives, for example, a command corresponding to two pending storage, the display similar to the first shift display in which the pending icons T1 (T2) shift from four to three and then decrease to three and then shift from three to two is not performed, and three pending icons T1 (T2) are displayed after the fourth pending icon T1 (T2) disappears. A second shift display is performed in which the number is deviated from the number to two. On the other hand, in the pending number display area 70E (70F) for displaying the pending memory by the pending numbers (number information), the pending numbers are displayed so as to decrease one by one each time the variable performance is started. In a state where, for example, the reserved number "4" is displayed in the reserved number display area 70E (70F), when the effect control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to, for example, two reserved memories (when the second shift display is executed), the third shift display is performed to display the reserved number "2" corresponding to, for example, the two reserved memories from the reserved number "4" without displaying the reserved numbers one by one.

As the look-ahead performance (advance notification), it is possible to suggest that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high by executing the related performance in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances. As the "related production", there are various productions such as the production by actions and light emission by the accessories provided on the game frame and the game board, the operation and light emission such as the vibration of the operation button, and the chance eye of the same color of the production pattern 70a.

When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the first image display device 70 does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control part 110m, the performance related to the look-ahead performance (advance notification) may be executed continuously or not. In such a case, it is possible to attract the player's interest by continuously executing the related effects. Also, by not continuously executing related effects, the consistency of the effects can be maintained.

For example, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory stored after the target memory and becomes normal, the read-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. Further, the performance related to the look-ahead performance based on the target reservation memory (for example, performing a large action performance of the first movable member 73) may be changed to another related performance with a lower degree of expectation than the related performance (for example, reducing the motion performance of the first movable member 73). Additionally, the associated effects of the look-ahead effects based on the target pending memory may be deleted.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the reserved memory stored before the target memory, the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, the expectation of the player can be improved by continuing the look-ahead effect.

For example, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory stored before the target memory and becomes normal, the read-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, consistency of presentation can be maintained.

(Inspection mode of main control board 130)
For example, in a conventional game machine such as JP 2018-118109 A, the main control board is controlled to operate a driving source for converting the large winning opening and the starting opening from the closed state to the open state. However, in the conventional game machine, when the game board is replaced in the game parlor or the game board constituting the front side of the game board is replaced, it is not easy to generate an operation trigger for the drive source that is operated by the control of the main control board, and it is difficult to check the operation of these drive sources.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIGS. 134 to 138 has a driving source (large winning opening SOL, starting opening SOL, V allocation SOL) whose operation is controlled by the main control board 110 as a result of the game, and the main control board 110 initially operates the driving source in a predetermined manner in a pre-start state after power supply is started and before shifting to a game ready state for controlling the game.
As a result, the special electric accessories, the normal electric accessories, and the sorting mechanism in the big prize winning opening are operated for a certain period of time limited to the state before the game starts (pre-start state), and the operations are confirmed, so that the installation confirmation and the inspection confirmation after the part replacement can be performed more reliably.

As shown in FIG. 134, when a setting change device is installed, the pre-start state is a certain period after the end of setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, there is RWM clear preparation in progress.

As shown in FIG. 135, when the setting change device is not installed, the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, and a certain period after pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again is the pre-start state. In this case, there is no RWM clear preparation in progress.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the setting change device is not mounted, the pre-start state is a certain period after the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. In this case, for example, after 7 seconds have passed since the transition to the pre-start state, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game is turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) three times.

As shown in FIG. 137, when a setting change device is installed, the pre-start state is changing settings or checking settings.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state is the period from when the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a until when the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed again. In this case, it is preferable to repeat ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) of each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the game result when the game is shifted to the pre-start state until the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed to shift to the playable state. In this case, RWM clear preparation is in progress.

During the above-mentioned pre-start state, the payout of prize balls due to the entry of a game ball into the winning opening, the operation of the special symbol display device or the operation of the special electric accessory due to the entry of the game ball into the starting opening, the operation of the normal symbol display device or the operation of the ordinary electric accessory due to the passage of the game ball through the gate or winning into the winning opening according to the operation of the normal symbol display device are invalidated. On the other hand, during the pre-start state, since the launch permission signal is output immediately after the power is turned on, the launch of the game ball is not invalidated. Also, in the pre-start state, the performance display monitor should be extinguished (not displayed).

During the pre-start state described above, the payout of prize balls backed up on the payout board is not invalidated. Further, while the big winning hole is open in the pre-start state, the open signal is not output from the game information output terminal board. A power-on/power-recovery command should be transmitted when transitioning to the playable state, and the initial operation of the gimmick (accessory) should be performed after transitioning to the playable state. Then, during the operation of the large winning opening solenoid in the pre-start state, the large winning opening LED and the like should not emit light as in the case of a big win.

It is preferable that the performance display monitor performs full lighting for, for example, 5 seconds after the end of the scan mode, and then displays the base value. In addition, it is preferable to stop firing in the state of "other than power recovery" (state before start, during unrecoverable error).

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling the presentation of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means. It is controllable to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reserved displays 63, 64), and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (production control section 130m) can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means can control the production pattern (70). a), the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memories by one each time the variable appearance is started, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories are displayed, when the slave control means receives a signal of a specific number of reserved memories (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number from the main control means, It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memory from the predetermined number to the specific number in a reduction mode different from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3), and the first display means (special symbol reserved displays 63, 64). characterized by

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reservation memory, and the reservation memory is the first display means (special symbol reservation display 6
3, 64), it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) can control to display the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable appearance is started, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories is displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) has a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). When the signal of is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction mode different from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) can be executed, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second 2 image display device 71) can be executed by the reserved memory (e.g. icon change effect) displayed on the first display means (special symbol reserved displays 63, 64) from the predetermined number (e.g. 4) to the specific number (e.g. 2) The reserved memory displayed on the second display means (first image display 70, second image display 71) is displayed so as to decrease one by one. Even in the state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol reservation indicators 63, 64) is characterized by being able to sequentially decrease the reserved storage by one each time the determination is completed, even when the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) are performed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). Along with being able to store the pending memory, it is controllable to display the pending memory on the first display means (special symbol pending display devices 63, 64), and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the pending memory by one each time the variable effect is started. When a signal of a specific number (for example, 2) that is less than the number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a different manner from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) can be executed, and the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high. Suggested prior notification can be executed by background display (for example, change to the look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and in the first display means (special symbol reservation display device 63, 64), the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces). Even in a predetermined state in which the displayed reserved memory does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol reserved display) 63, 64) is characterized by being able to sequentially decrease the reserved memory by one each time the determination is completed, regardless of which of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is performed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). Along with being able to store the pending memory, it is controllable to display the pending memory on the first display means (special symbol pending display devices 63, 64), and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the pending memory by one each time the variable effect is started. When a signal of a specific number (for example, 2) that is less than the number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a different manner from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) can be executed, and the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high. Suggested advance notification can be executed by character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and in the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), the predetermined number (for example, four) to the specific number (for example, two). Even in a predetermined state in which the displayed reserved memory does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol reserved display) 63, 64) is characterized by being able to sequentially decrease the reserved memory by one each time the determination is completed, regardless of which of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is performed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). Along with being able to store the pending memory, it is controllable to display the pending memory on the first display means (special symbol pending display devices 63, 64), and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory. The display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high can be executed by the expectation degree display (for example, a look-ahead effect performance). 1 to 3) can be executed, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories is displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) receives a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) can be executed, and the predetermined number (for example, 4
pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces) in the period in which the reserved memory is displayed to decrease by one, the reserved memory displayed on the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) is the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). ) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) are performed, each time the determination is completed, the reserved storage can be sequentially reduced and displayed by one.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). Along with being able to store the pending memory, it is controllable to display the pending memory on the first display means (special symbol pending display devices 63, 64), and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory. The display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute the variable production of the production pattern, and in the plurality of the variable productions, the related production (for example, the operation production of the first movable member 73) is executed in a partial period of each variable production. It is possible to execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable production is started, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memory is displayed. can perform a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a different reduction mode, and the first display means (special symbol reserved display 63, 64) is capable of sequentially decreasing the reserved memory by one each time the determination is completed, even when either of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is performed, and the The slave control means (effect control unit 130m) generates a predetermined state in which the pending memory displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the pending memory in the first display means (special symbol pending display devices 63, 64), and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the prior notification is related to the performance (for example, the first movable member 7 3) is not executed from the continuation.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). Along with being able to store the pending memory, it is controllable to display the pending memory on the first display means (special symbol pending display devices 63, 64), it is possible to determine whether or not to perform an advantageous special game (jackpot) based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (production control unit 130m) can be controlled to display the pending memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means (second 1 image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable production of the production pattern (70a), the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable production is started, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories are displayed, the slave control means (production control unit 130m) When a signal indicating a specific number of reserved memories (for example, 2) less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) for decreasing the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed in a manner different from the first shift display, and the number of reserved memories can be displayed by numerical information. It is possible to perform a third shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that displays the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of reserved storage without performing a display that decreases one by one in order, and the first display means (special symbol reserved display 63, 64) is capable of displaying the reserved storage in order by 1 each time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is performed. Characterized by

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment comprises main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, controllable to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reserved display devices 63, 64), it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (production control unit 130m) can control to display the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means. The display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demonstration effect) when there is no pending memory after a predetermined time has passed since the variable effect is started, and can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the pending memory by one each time the variable effect is started. , In a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories are displayed, when the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) receives a signal of a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved memories that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a second shift display (for example, 4) that reduces the reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) For example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the reserved memory displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) during the period in which the reserved memory is displayed to decrease one by one from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64). 0a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, the predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect) is not executed even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display) 63, 64) is capable of sequentially decreasing the reserved memory by one each time the determination is completed, regardless of which of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is performed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. It is possible to perform advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display, etc.) that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). On the other hand, the advance notice can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory that is the target of the advance notice, the advance notice based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed, the advance notice based on the target hold memory is changed to another advance notice with a lower expectation than the advance notice, and the advance notice based on the target hold memory is deleted. .

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. The background display (e.g., look-ahead zone background) displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be used to provide advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory, and a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). when the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reservation memory stored after the target reservation memory that is the object of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is changed to another advance notification. erasing the advance notification.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. A preliminary notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high can be executed by character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). While being displayable in a stopped state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reservation memory stored after the target reservation memory that is the target of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is deleted. characterized by performing

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment comprises main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, and it is possible to determine whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. , advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high can be executed by the degree of expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production), and despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, The advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reservation memory stored after the target reservation memory that is the target of the advance notification, any one of the following is performed: the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed; the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification; and the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is deleted.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. By executing a related effect (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of the variable effects, it is possible to perform advance notification that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high, and despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), a predetermined state in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease has occurred. When the performance symbol (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reservation memory stored after the target reservation memory that is the target of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not executed from the continuation of the related performance (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73). , changing to another related performance with a lower expectation than the related performance, and erasing the related performance of the prior notification based on the target reservation memory.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. It is possible to perform advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). , the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when returning from the predetermined state based on the reservation memory stored after the target reservation memory that is the target of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is deleted; 1 image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable production is started, and in a state in which the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) signals of reserved memories that are two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control. When received from the means (main control unit 110m), it is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3), and it is possible to display the number of reserved memories by numerical information, and when the second shift display is executed, the numerical information is not displayed to sequentially decrease one by one, and the specific number (for example, 2) is reserved. It is characterized by being able to execute a third shift display (for example, 4 to 2) for displaying the numerical information corresponding to the memory.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment comprises main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, and it is possible to determine whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. It is possible to execute advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory, and when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable production, the display means can execute a predetermined production (for example, a customer waiting demonstration production). 71), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state occurs, the performance design can be displayed in the temporary stop state, the predetermined performance (for example, customer waiting demo performance) is not executed even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance, and the predetermined state is based on the reservation memory stored after the target reservation memory that is the target of the advance notification. When the condition is resolved, any one of the following is performed: the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is deleted.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. It is possible to execute advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). It is characterized in that it can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment comprises main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, and it is possible to determine whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. It is possible to execute advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). It is capable of being continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory which is the object of the preliminary notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment comprises main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, and it is possible to determine whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. A background display (e.g., a look-ahead zone background) displayed on the display means can perform advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the production pattern (70a) is temporarily stopped. While being displayable, the advance notice can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the target of the advance notice, the advance notice based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. A background display (e.g., a look-ahead zone background) displayed on the display means can perform advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined reserved memory, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the production pattern (70a) is temporarily stopped. While being displayable, the advance notice can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the target of the advance notice, the advance notice based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. Prior notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high can be executed by character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) While being displayable in a stopped state, the advance notice can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that is the target of the advance notice, the advance notice based on the target reserved memory can be continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. Prior notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high can be executed by character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) While being displayable in a stopped state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. , advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high can be executed by the degree of expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production), and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, The advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that is the target of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. , advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high can be executed by the degree of expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production), and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, The advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that is the object of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. A first advance notification (e.g., pending icon change effect) that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high, and a second preliminary notification that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high by executing a relevant effect (such as the operation effect of the first movable member 73) in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of the variable effects, and the main control means (main control unit 110m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state while the second preliminary notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the second preliminary notification based on the target reserved memory is related. It is characterized in that it can be executed from the continuation of the effect (for example, motion effect of the first movable member 73, etc.).

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment comprises main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, and it is possible to determine whether or not to play a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. A first advance notification (e.g., pending icon change effect) that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high, and a second preliminary notification that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high by executing a relevant effect (for example, the operation effect of the first movable member 73) in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of the variable effects, and the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state while the second preliminary notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the target reserved memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the second preliminary notification based on the target reserved memory is related. It is characterized in that the effect (for example, motion effect of the first movable member 73, etc.) is not executed from the continuation.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. It is possible to execute advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation level display, etc.) that suggests that the expectation for the special game is high based on the reservation memory, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reservation memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reservation memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). When the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that is the target of the advance notice, the advance notice (for example, background display, character display, degree of expectation display, etc.) based on the target reserved memory can be continuously executed, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable effect is started. In a state where the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) receives a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved memories that is less than a specific number (for example, 4) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). A second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) can be executed, the number of reserved memories can be displayed by numerical information, and when the second shift display is executed, a third shift display (4 to 2) that displays the numerical information corresponding to the specified number (for example, 2) of reserved memories can be executed without performing a display that sequentially decreases the numerical information one by one.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store the reserved memory, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. It is possible to execute advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation level display, etc.) that suggests that the expectation for the special game is high based on the reservation memory, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reservation memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reservation memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the target of the advance notification, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, degree of expectation display, etc.) based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable effect is started. In a state where the subordinate control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved memories, the subordinate control means (production control unit 130m) receives a specific number (for example, two) of the reserved memory signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), which is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, four), the reserved memory is reduced from the predetermined number (for example, four) to the specific number (for example, two) in a reduction mode different from the first shift display. 2 shift display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, the number of reserved memories can be displayed by numerical information, and when the second shift display is executed, the numerical information is not displayed to decrease one by one, and the third shift display (4 to 2) can be executed to display the numerical information corresponding to the specified number (for example, 2) of reserved memories.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. When there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (for example, customer waiting demo performance) on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) is temporarily changed. While being displayable in a stopped state, the prior notification can be continuously executed, when the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined performance (for example, customer waiting demonstration performance) is not executed even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. When there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (for example, customer waiting demo performance) on the display means, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the performance pattern (70a) is temporarily changed. While it can be displayed in a stopped state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, when the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined performance (for example, customer waiting demonstration performance) is not executed even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reservation memory before the target reservation memory that is the target of the advance notification, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the main control means (main control unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) while the pending memories are being displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). 71), when the predetermined state occurs, continues the display of the pending memory, can execute the effect performance (for example, the pattern effect image ZE) in the performance pattern (70a) in the state that the performance pattern (70a) is displayed in the temporary stop state, and in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the pending memory is being displayed, the slave control means (the performance control unit 130m) signals a specific number (for example, 2) of the reserved memory that is less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) by two or more. When (command) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a display effect for gradually decreasing the number of reserved memories is displayed for the specified number (for example, 2) of the reserved memories without performing the deviation number (for example, 2 times) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2).

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the main control means (main control unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) while the pending memories are being displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). 71) is capable of continuing the display of the reserved memory when the predetermined state occurs, and executing an action effect of at least a part (e.g., bar-shaped image SG) of the decorative part (e.g., bar-shaped image SG) of the effect pattern (70a) in a state in which the effect pattern (70a) is displayed in a temporary stop state; is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a display effect for gradually reducing the number of reserved memories is not performed for the number of deviations (for example, 2 times) between the specified number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2), and the predetermined number (for example, 2) of reserved memories is displayed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control section 130m) for controlling game effects based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). It is possible to store a reserved memory and to execute a determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is to be performed based on the reserved memory. When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the main control means (main control unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) while the pending memories are being displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). 71), when the predetermined state occurs, continues the display of the reserved memory in a state in which the performance pattern (70a) is displayed in a temporary stop state, and is capable of executing the effect performance of the reserved memory, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the reserved memory is displayed, the slave control means (the production control unit 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of signals (commands) of the reserved memory that are two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control unit (main control unit 110). m), the predetermined number (for example, 2) of the reserved memories is displayed without displaying the number of reserved memories (for example, 2) by the deviation number (for example, 2) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2).

(Image change effect)
The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) can execute various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the performance display, there are a customer waiting demo performance executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and a variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed during the variable display of the special pattern. In addition, as an effect display, the image corresponding to the entire screen and/or a partial area of the screen on the screen of the first image display device 70 and/or the screen of the second image display device 71 can be reduced, enlarged, transformed, rotated, or changed by combining one or more. It can be said that the image change effect is to make the screen itself look like it is moving, such as by shaking the screen itself depending on the image displayed on the screen. The image change effect can be executed at any timing (for example, timing during the execution period of the variable effect, timing during the execution period of the jackpot game, or timing during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect).

In the following description, in the drawings, the changing display of the screen on which the image changing performance is executed is written as "SV display", and the normal screen display on which the image changing performance is not executed is written as "normal display". In the image change effect, the first image displayed on the screen in the normal display (for example, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, etc.: FIG. 140(a)) can be changed to the second image displayed on the screen in the change display (for example, the reduced effect pattern 70a, the reduced background image HG, etc.: FIG. 140(c)). It can also be said that the second image in the change display can be recognized as being common and/or related to the first image in the normal display due to its shape and information.

The image change effect can be executed at an appropriate timing during the execution period of the variable effect or the like. The image change performance may be executed, for example, in accordance with (synchronously with) the start timing of the variable performance, in the middle of the execution period of the variable performance, or in accordance with (synchronously with) the end timing of the variable performance. In addition, the image change performance can be triggered by various conditions such as external factors such as winning of a game ball into a winning hole and operation of a performance button device 16, and internal factors such as selection of a predetermined game state and selection of a predetermined performance pattern such as a look-ahead performance.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is configured to be able to execute image change effects in the image display devices 70 and 71 in conjunction with light emission effects by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 . In addition, the image change effect in the image display devices 70 and 71 may be configured to be executed in conjunction with the operation of the movable accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) in addition to or instead of the light emission effect by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. Furthermore, the image change effects on the image display devices 70 and 71 may be configured to be executable in conjunction with the audio output of the audio output device 9 .

(First movable accessory - action)
The first movable member 73, which is a movable accessory, is capable of moving vertically between a standby position (original position) positioned above and a production position positioned below by the driving force of a first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It should be noted that it is possible to detect that the first movable member 73 is at the origin position by a first position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 73 of the embodiment does not overlap the screen of the first image display device 70 or the degree of overlap is small in the first mode in which it is stopped at the standby position. Also, the degree of overlap with the screen increases as the first movable member 73 descends from the standby position to the rendering position. The first movable member 73 is configured to be changeable from a first mode to a second mode for performing a predetermined performance operation, such as vibrating greatly over the entire area between the standby position and the performance position, or finely vibrating in a partial range between the standby position and the performance position.

(First movable accessory-first light emitting area)
The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The first movable member 73 is provided with one or a plurality of first light emitting regions HK1, and the first light emitting regions HK1 can be illuminated independently of other parts of the board lighting device 76 for effect light emission. The first light emitting region HK1 can change the light emitting state between a first state in which the first movable member LED is lit, blinked, changed in color, and the like, and a second state in which the first movable member LED is extinguished and the light is not emitted. In the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is extinguished, the whole or a part of the range of the first movable member 73 becomes dark, and in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 emits the effect light, the first movable member 73 becomes brighter than when the first light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the first movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state, the effect light emission of the first movable member LED may be made darker than in the second state, for example, the hue may be made darker than in the first state, the brightness may be made lower than in the first state, or the saturation may be made lower than in the first state. Also, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the first movable member LED, which is lit or extinguished.

(Second movable accessory - action)
The second movable member 74, which is a movable accessory, can perform a performance action of moving obliquely up and down between a standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and a performance position located on the lower left by the driving force of a second movable member driving motor which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2). It should be noted that it is possible to detect that the second movable member 74 is at the origin position by a second position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 74 of the embodiment does not overlap the screen of the first image display device 70 or the degree of overlap is small in the first mode in which it is stopped at the standby position. Also, the degree of overlap with the screen increases as the second movable member 74 moves obliquely downward from the standby position toward the rendering position. The second movable member 74 is configured to be changeable from a first mode to a second mode for performing a predetermined performance operation, such as vibrating greatly over the entire area between the standby position and the performance position or finely vibrating in a partial range between the standby position and the performance position.

(Second movable accessory-first light emitting area)
The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The second movable member 74 is provided with one or a plurality of first light emitting regions HK1 so that the first light emitting regions HK1 can emit light independently of other parts of the board lighting device 76.例文帳に追加The first light emitting area HK1 can change the light emitting state between a first state in which the second movable member LED is lit, blinked, changed in color, etc., and a second state in which the second movable member LED is extinguished and the second movable member LED is not performed. The second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is extinguished makes the whole or a part of the range of the second movable member 74 dark, and the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 emits the effect light makes the second movable member 74 brighter than when the first light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the second movable member LED is extinguished in the second state, but in the second state, the effect emission of the second movable member LED may be made darker than in the first state, for example, the hue may be made darker than in the first state, the brightness may be made lower than in the first state, or the saturation may be made lower than in the first state. Also, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the second movable member LED, which is lit or extinguished.

In the embodiment, the movable accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) moves forward and backward in the second mode, but the performance action may be performed by one or a combination of advancing and retreating, rotating, swinging, and deforming.

(Second light emitting region)
The gaming machine 1 is provided with a second light emitting region HK2 provided in at least one portion different from the movable accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) as a part of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. The part of the board lighting device 76 that becomes the second light emitting region HK2 may be, for example, the decorative frame 40, the area between the first starter 45 and the variable starter 46 (the winning opening lamp NR for emitting light in a predetermined manner around the first starter 45 and the variable starter 46), the general winnings opening 43, the large winnings opening 50, and other accessories attached to the game board 5, or the game board 5 itself. Further, the part of the frame lighting device 10 that becomes the second light emitting region HK2 includes, for example, the glass frame 4 and the like. It should be noted that a part other than the movable accessory, such as the handle light emitting device 15c and the production button device 16, may function as the second light emitting region HK2. Here, the second light emitting regions HK2 are provided at a plurality of locations, and in the embodiment, the decoration frame 40, between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 (the prize winning port lamp NR for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner), and the frame lighting device 10 provided in the glass frame 4 function as the second light emitting regions HK2. A plurality of second light emitting regions HK2 may be divided into different members such as the decorative frame 40 and prize winning openings, or may be plural in one member such as the decorative frame 40 .

The second light emitting region HK2 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting LEDs (full color) in a predetermined light emitting mode. The second light-emitting region HK2 is capable of effecting light emission independently of the first light-emitting region HK1 and other second light-emitting regions. The first light emitting region HK2 can change the light emitting state between a first state in which the LED is lit, blinked, changed in color, or the like to perform the effect light emission, and a second state in which the LED is extinguished and the light effect is not performed. In the embodiment, the second state in which the second light emitting region HK2 is extinguished makes the whole or part of the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 dark, and the first state in which the second light emitting region HK2 emits the effect light makes the periphery of the screen brighter than when the first light emitting region HK2 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the LED is turned off in the second state, but the effect emission of the LED in the second state may be made darker than in the first state, for example, the hue may be made darker than in the first state, the brightness may be made lower than in the first state, or the saturation may be made lower than in the first state. Also, the range of the second light emitting region HK2 may be changed by switching the LED that is lit or extinguished.

(Specific example 1 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 1 of an image change effect executed in conjunction with effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 139 is a timing chart of Concrete Example 1 showing the relationship among the operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the audio output device 10, and the image change effect on the screen of the first image display device 70. Also, FIG. 140 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 1 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 140(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the pending icon T1 in the first pending icon display area 70B at the bottom of the screen. In addition, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 of the winning entrance lamp NR, and the second light emitting region HK2 of the frame lighting device 10 are all in the first state in which the effect light is emitted. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound to be described later is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74 change from the first state to the extinguished second state (see FIG. 140(b)) in synchronization with the start of the shift from the normal display to the changing display. At this time, the second light emitting area HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the second light emitting area HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR change from the first state to the second state in which the transition to the change display is started (synchronously). In addition, the second light emitting region HK2 formed by the frame lighting device 10 is maintained in the first state regardless of the change of the other second light emitting region HK2 in association with the first light emitting region HK1. Furthermore, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the shift to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position to the second mode in which action production is possible from the first mode. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9 .

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the changing display, which had been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1, is started to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the changing display is started to be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. In Specific Example 1, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 start to change from the first state to the second state in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display, the first movable member 73 starts to change from the first state to the second state, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting a change notification sound. Thus, in Example 1, simultaneously with the start of the image change effect on the screen, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), when the normal display is shifted to the change display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to shrink together, and the frame image GG appears from outside the screen. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When the normal display is shifted to the change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are displayed at the same position as the normal display without being reduced and changed together with the performance pattern 70a.

As shown in FIG. 140(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to sway together. In Specific Example 1, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, which were in the second state at the beginning of the image change effect execution period, are set to switch to the first state in the middle of the image change effect execution period (see FIG. 140(d)). Further, in Specific Example 1, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle. Here, in Specific Example 1, the timing of switching the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 from the second state to the first state is matched (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing of T3), but the switching timing may be shifted. Then, in the specific example 1, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 are illuminated in the first state in the subsequent image change effect.

When the image change performance is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are outside the range in which the changing display changes, so that the changing display, the reserved number and the special pattern TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second state is returned to the first state (see FIG. 140(e)) in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of restoration from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 1, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (in synchronization with) the timing of updating the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 140(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed to disappear outside the screen. When the changing display is shifted to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are not enlarged and changed together with the performance pattern 70a and are displayed at the same position.

In synchronization with the start of normal display at timing T5, the first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 140(f)). The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 1, the change from the second mode to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is completed in synchronization with the end frame update timing.

In the specific example 1, when the image change performance is performed, at least one of the first light emission area HK1 and the second light emission area HK2 is linked to execute the light emission performance of changing from the first state to the second state. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display on the screen, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is not directed to the surroundings of the screen of the first image display device 70, but the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 attracts the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 1, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 1, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visual recognition changes depending on whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are changed and displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change, regardless of whether the change display or the change display is performed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In the specific example 1, when the image change effect is executed, the picture frame image GG which changes in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70.例文帳に追加By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, or may be set as a different image (another image layer) from these and may be expressed so as to change together with the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 1, the change to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the change to the second mode of the first movable member 73 and the output of the change notification sound are executed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the change to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 2 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 2 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. FIG. 141 is a timing chart of Example 2 showing the relationship among the operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the audio output device 10, and the image change effect on the screen of the first image display device 70. Also, FIG. 142 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 2 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 142(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the pending icon T1 in the first pending icon display area 70B at the bottom of the screen. In addition, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. Further, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 of the winning entrance lamps NR, and the second light emitting region HK2 of the frame lighting device 10 are all in the first state in which the effect light is emitted. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74 change from the first state to the extinguished second state (see FIG. 142(b)) in synchronization with the start of the shift from the normal display to the change display. At this time, the second light emitting area HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the second light emitting area HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR change from the first state to the second state in which the transition to the change display is started (synchronously). In addition, the second light emitting area HK2 formed by the frame lighting device 10 also changes from the first state in which it emits dramatic light to the second state in which it is extinguished. Furthermore, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the shift to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position to the second mode in which action production is possible from the first mode. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9 .

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the changing display, which had been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1, is started to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the changing display is started to be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. In Specific Example 2, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 start to change from the first state to the second state in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display, the first movable member 73 starts to change from the first state to the second state, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting a change notification sound. Thus, in Example 2, simultaneously with the start of the image change effect on the screen, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), when the normal display is shifted to the change display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to shrink together, and the frame image GG appears from outside the screen. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When the normal display is shifted to the change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are displayed at the same position as the normal display without being reduced and changed together with the performance pattern 70a.

As shown in FIG. 142(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1 and the frame image GG are displayed in the change display so as to sway together. In Specific Example 2, a portion of the first light emitting region HK1 (the first movable member 73) and a portion of the second light emitting region HK2 (the decorative frame 40), which were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect, are set to switch to the first state in the middle of the image change effect execution period (see FIG. 142(d)). Further, in Specific Example 2, the remaining portion of the first light emitting region HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the remaining portion of the second light emitting region HK2 (the prize winning entrance lamp NR and the frame lighting device 10) are set to be maintained in the second state (see FIG. 142(d)). In specific example 2, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start to the end of the execution of the image change effect. Here, in Specific Example 2, the timing of switching the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 from the second state to the first state is matched (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing of T3), but the switching timing may be shifted.

When the image change performance is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are outside the range in which the changing display changes, so that the changing display, the reserved number and the special pattern TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode is returned to the first mode after the change display at timing T4 starts to return to the normal display (see FIG. 142(e)). The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started after the timing of updating the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 142(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed to disappear outside the screen. When the changing display is shifted to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are not enlarged and changed together with the performance pattern 70a and are displayed at the same position.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 142(f)). At timing shifted after the start of normal display (end of change display) at timing T5, the first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the prize winning entrance lamp NR, the frame lighting device 10) in the second state return to the first state, and effect light emission is performed. The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 2, the change from the second state to the first state of the first movable member 73 is completed with a delay from the end frame update timing, and the light emitting regions HK1 and HK2 return to the first state.

The specific example 2 is configured so that when the image change performance is performed, at least one of the first light emission region HK1 and the second light emission region HK2 is linked to execute the light emission performance changing from the first state to the second state. By doing so, the player's attention can be attracted to the image change effect, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is not directed to the surroundings of the screen of the first image display device 70, but the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 attracts the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 2, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 2, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visual recognition changes between the change display in which the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are changed and displayed, and the normal display. On the other hand, in the embodiment, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change in any of the normal display and the change display. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In the specific example 2, when the image change effect is executed, the picture frame image GG which changes in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70.例文帳に追加By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can attract the player's attention more and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, or may be set as a different image (another image layer) from these and may be expressed so as to change together with the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 2, the change to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the second mode of the first movable member 73 and the output of the change notification sound are executed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is executed with a delay from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the second state of the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 is performed with a delay from the end of the image change rendering. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 3 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 3 of an image change effect executed in conjunction with effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. FIG. 143 is a timing chart of Specific Example 3 showing the relationship among the operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the audio output device 10, and the image change effect on the screen of the first image display device 70. Also, FIG. 144 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 3 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 144(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the pending icon T1 in the first pending icon display area 70B at the bottom of the screen. In addition, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 of the winning entrance lamp NR, and the second light emitting region HK2 of the frame lighting device 10 are all in the first state in which the effect light is emitted. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound to be described later is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

In Specific Example 3, at the timing of T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first light emitting region HK1 (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (the decorative frame 40, the winning opening lamp NR, the frame illumination device 10) change from the first state to the second state in which they are extinguished (see FIG. 144(a)). Then, at the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light emitting region HK2 of the frame lighting device 10 change from the second state to the first state in synchronization with the start of transition to the change display (see FIG. 144(b)), and effect light emission is executed. At this time, the first mode in which the second movable member 74 is in the standby position is changed to the second mode in which the action can be produced in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the transition to the change display. The first movable member 73 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. In addition, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as “Pickin” is output from the voice output device 9 . Note that the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the decorative frame 40, and the second light emitting area HK1 of the prize winning opening lamp NR are maintained in the second state over the execution period of the image change effect.

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the changing display, which had been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1, is started to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the changing display is started to be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. In Specific Example 3, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light-emitting region HK1 and the second light-emitting region HK1 is started with a delay from the update timing of the change display start frame. In conjunction with (synchronization with) the update timing of the change display start frame, the second movable member 74 starts to change from the first state to the second state, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting a change notification sound.

As shown in FIG. 144(b), when the normal display is shifted to the change display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to shrink together, and the frame image GG appears from outside the screen. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from the normal display to the change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are displayed at the same position as the normal display without being reduced and changed together with the performance pattern 70a.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to shake together. In the specific example 3, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 that have been in the second state are set to switch to the first state in accordance with the start of execution of the image change effect (see FIG. 144(d)). Further, in specific example 3, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle.

When the image change performance is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are outside the range in which the changing display changes, so that the changing display, the reserved number and the special pattern TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The second movable member 74 in the second state is returned to the first state (see FIG. 144(e)) in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of restoration from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change of the second movable member 74 from the second mode to the first mode is started in synchronization with the return frame update timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 144(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the performance pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed to disappear outside the screen. When the change display is shifted to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are not enlarged and changed together with the performance pattern 70a and are displayed at the same position.

The second movable member 74 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 144(f)) in synchronization with (synchronously with) the start of the normal display at the timing of T5. The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change from the second mode to the first mode of the second movable member 74 is completed in synchronization with the end frame update timing.

In the specific example 3, when the image change performance is performed, at least one of the first light emission area HK1 and the second light emission area HK2 is linked to execute the light emission performance of changing from the first state to the second state. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is not drawn around the screen of the first image display device 70, and the player's attention can be attracted to the image change performance executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the specific example 3, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 3, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the visibility of the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG changes between the normal display and the change display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the ease of visual recognition does not change in any of the normal display and the change display. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In the specific example 3, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG which changes in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the background image HG can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70.例文帳に追加By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can attract the player's attention more and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, or may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these and may be expressed so as to change together with the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 3, the change to the second state of the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 is performed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 3, the change to the second mode of the second movable member 74 and the output of the change notification sound are executed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 3, the second movable member 74 is changed to the first mode in accordance with (in synchronization with) the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In Specific Example 3, the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 are changed to the second state slightly before the start of the image change effect, and the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 are changed to the first state in synchronization with the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Incidentally, the movable members 73, 74 may be changed to the second mode slightly before the start of the image change performance, and the movable members 73, 74 may be returned to the first mode in conjunction with (synchronization with) the start of the image change performance, or after the start of the image change performance.

(Specific example 4 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 4 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 145 is a timing chart of Concrete Example 4 showing the relationship among the operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the audio output device 10, and the image change effect on the screen of the first image display device 70. Also, FIG. 146 shows an effect example when the image change effect of specific example 4 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 146(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the pending icon T1 in the first pending icon display area 70B at the bottom of the screen. In addition, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the normal display is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. Further, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 of the winning entrance lamps NR, and the second light emitting region HK2 of the frame lighting device 10 are all in the first state in which the effect light is emitted. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

In Specific Example 4, at timing T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10) change from the first state to the second state in which they are extinguished (see FIG. 146(a)). At this time, the first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR) remain in the first state. At timing T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first movable member 73 starts changing from the first mode to the second mode. At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the sound output device 9 outputs a change notification sound such as "Pickin" in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the transition to the change display. At the timing of T1b after T1 when the image change effect is started, the first light emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light emitting area HK2 of the prize winning entrance lamp NR change from the first state to the second state. Also, at the timing of T1b, the second movable member 74 shifts from the first mode in which the second movable member 74 is in the standby position to the second mode in which the action can be produced.

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the changing display, which had been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1, is started to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the changing display is started to be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. In Specific Example 4, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light-emitting region HK1 and the second light-emitting region HK1 is started with a delay from the update timing of the change display start frame. Further, the change from the first state to the second state of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is started with a delay from the update timing of the start frame of the change display. In response to this, the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the update timing of the start frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), when the normal display is shifted to the change display, the performance pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to shrink together, and the frame image GG appears from outside the screen. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from the normal display to the change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are displayed at the same position as the normal display without being reduced and changed together with the performance pattern 70a.

As shown in FIG. 146(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed in the change display so as to sway together. Further, in Specific Example 4, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle.

When the image change performance is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are outside the range in which the changing display changes, so that the changing display, the reserved number and the special pattern TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 in the second mode are returned to the first mode in synchronization with (in synchronization with) or with a shift from the change display to the normal display at timing T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started.

As shown in FIG. 146(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the performance pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed to disappear outside the screen. When the changing display is shifted to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area are not enlarged and changed together with the performance pattern 70a and are displayed at the same position.

In specific example 4, at the timing of T5a before T5 when the image change effect ends, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10) change from the second state to the first state, and effect light emission is performed. At this time, the first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR) remain in the second state. In addition, the first movable member 73 starts to change from the second mode to the first mode before timing T5a, which is before T5 at which the image change performance is started, and at timing T5a, the first movable member 73 returns to the first mode and stops. At this time, the second movable member 74 remains in the second mode. Then, at the timing of T5, the change display returns to the normal display, and the image change effect ends.

At the timing of T5b after T5 when the image change performance is finished, the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) are changed from the second state to the first state, and the performance light emission is executed. In addition, the second movable member 74 starts to change from the second mode to the first mode at the timing before T5 when the image change effect is started, and the first movable member 74 returns to the first mode and stops at the timing T5b. It should be noted that the return of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first mode may be started after the image change effect is completed, or in synchronization with the end of the image change effect.

The specific example 4 is configured so that when the image change performance is performed, at least one of the first light emission region HK1 and the second light emission region HK2 is linked to execute the light emission performance changing from the first state to the second state. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is not drawn around the screen of the first image display device 70, and the player's attention can be attracted to the image change performance executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 4, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 4, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visually recognizing the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG changes between the change display and the normal display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change, regardless of whether the change display or the change display is performed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In the specific example 4, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG which changes in conjunction with the change of the background image HG from the normal display to the change display can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70.例文帳に追加By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, or may be set as a different image (another image layer) from these and may be expressed so as to change together with the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG.

In Specific Example 4, the change to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is performed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the change to the second state of the movable members 73 and 74 and the output of the change notification sound are performed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the change to the first mode of the movable members 73 and 74 is completed after the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Concrete Example 4 restores the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 to the first state with a delay from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, in the image change presentation, an effect EF decorating the change display may be displayed together with the change display. The effect EF may be a moving image or a static image, and may or may not be changed according to the change display. Also, the effect EF may be displayed in front of the change display (FIG. 147(a)), behind the change display (FIG. 147(b)), or displayed so as not to overlap the change display (FIG. 148).

In the image change presentation, when the effect EF is displayed together with the change display, the effect EF may be displayed in a shape, color, or the like corresponding to the degree of expectation for the big win. For example, when the degree of expectation is low, a blue effect EF is displayed (FIG. 148(a)), and when the degree of expectation is high, a red effect EF is displayed. It should be noted that the degree of expectation displayed by the effect EF may be changed during the period of the image change effect.

In the image change effect, an effect linked with a light guide plate or other effect means may be performed. Also, in accordance with the image change effect performed on the screen of the first image display device 70 , a linked effect may be performed on the screen of the second image display device 71 . For example, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 may be set to the second state, and the screen of the second image display device 71 may be darkened in accordance with the effect of relatively darkening the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70.

In the image change effect, predetermined images such as the effect pattern 70a and the reserved icon are not included in the change display, and the effect pattern 70a and the reserved icon may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, for example, fixedly displayed at the same position as the normal display (Fig. 149(a)). In the image change effect, a predetermined image such as a suspended icon may not be included in the change display, and the suspended icon may be erased or displayed so as not to be seen, for example, during the execution period of the image change effect (FIG. 149(b)). In the image change effect, predetermined images such as the effect symbol 70a and the pending icon included in the change display may be displayed in the same manner as in the normal display, such as fixedly displayed at the same position as in the normal display.

The information displayed on the screen, such as system information IF1 such as characters for inducing right-handed hitting included in the normal display (Fig. 150(a)) and game information IF2 such as characters indicating the number of times of time reduction after the end of the jackpot game, may be displayed as follows in the image display effect. For example, in the image change rendering, the system information IF1 may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, such as by not including the system information IF1 in the change display and fixedly displaying the system information IF1 at the same position as in the normal display (FIG. 150(b)). Also, in the image change effect, the game information IF2 may be included in the change display (FIG. 150(b)). In this case, an image showing the same information as the game information IF2 reduced in the change display may be displayed in an enlarged manner superimposed on the change display.

In the image change effect, an effect EF may be displayed that associates the movable members 73 and 74, which are in the second mode of performing the effect action, with the change display (FIG. 151(a)). Then, in the image change effect, for example, the position of the change display is changed by being pushed or pulled by the second movable member 74, and the action effect and/or effect EF of the movable members 73 and 74 in the second mode may be linked with the change of the change display (FIGS. 151(b) and (c)).

The image change effect can be executed at various timings in association with other effects. For example, an image change effect may be performed during the look-ahead continuous effect.

The start or end of the execution of the image change effect (the start of reduction of the normally displayed image or the return of the changed image to the normal display) may be associated with the operation of the operation means such as the button operation of the effect button device 16. For example, when the image change effect becomes executable, a button image is displayed on the screen to guide the button operation, and when the button operation is executed, the image change effect is started to be executed. Incidentally, if the button image is commonly used in a plurality of presentation modes, the amount of data can be compressed. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, a long press or repeated hits) is established by operating the operation means such as the button operation of the effect button device 16, the change display or the effect EF or image displayed together with the change display may be changed (for example, the glass is broken). At this time, each time a predetermined condition (for example, a long press or repeated hits) is established by operating the operation means, the effect EF or image displayed with the change display or the change display may progress (for example, the glass may gradually break).

The image change effect may be selectable from a plurality of patterns. For example, a plurality of patterns may be set such as an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a and the background image HG change together, and an image change effect having a change display in which the background image HG changes without including the effect pattern 70a.

A change display may be a single image or a combination of separate images moving in unison. For example, an image larger than the displayable area of the screen may be formed so that the frame image GG is not visible in the normal display (FIG. 152(a)), and the frame image GG may be displayed on the screen by changing to a reduced display that is smaller than the displayable area of the screen (FIG. 152(b)). The change display can be performed in various ways, such as rotating or swinging (Fig. 152(c)), for example, deforming so as to be stretched horizontally (Fig. 152(d)), for example, tilting and stretching (Fig. 152(e)), and shrinking/enlarging. Then, when ending the image change rendering, the change display may be changed so as to expand beyond the displayable area of the screen (FIGS. 153(a) and 153(b)). Also, at the end of the image change effect, when switching from the change display to the normal display, a switching effect such as a white-out momentarily displaying a white image may be interposed (FIG. 153(c)). After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode ("285") (FIG. 153(d)). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion). Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (FIG. 153(e)).

As for the image change effect, the display effect of changing display is executed in accordance with the frame update timing. At this time, in accordance with the change of the change display, it is possible to execute other effects (sound effect, light emission, action of the character) other than the change display. Alternatively, other effects may be executed at a timing different from the change of the change display. Then, when returning from a state in which the changing display is changing to a normal display in which the changing display does not change, the end timing of performances other than the changing display (sound effect, light emission, and action of a character) other than the changing display executed in accordance with the changing display can be made earlier, later, or the same as the change end timing of the changing display.

At the start of the image change effect (when the change display is reduced), a plurality of effects (sound, image, lighting device, movable accessory actuation) may start at the same frame update timing, and at the end of the image change effect (when the change display is enlarged), the plurality of effects (sound, image, illumination device, movable accessory actuation) may not start at the same frame update timing.

In the image change performance, a predetermined image (for example, a performance pattern 70a, a background image HG, etc.) at a normal position in the normal display is reduced toward the depth side of the screen and changed to the change position, and the predetermined image at the change position in the change display is enlarged from the depth side to the front side of the screen and returns to the normal position to return to the normal display. Here, in the image change effect, the start period during which the predetermined image changes from the normal position to the change position should be longer than the return period during which the predetermined image changes from the change position to the normal position. In other words, the number of frames when the change display shrinks at the start of the image change effect (start period) should be made larger than the number of frames when the change display expands at the end of the image change effect (recovery period). In this way, by increasing the number of frames at the start of the image change effect, it is easy for the player to understand, attracts attention to the image change effect, and enhances the amusement of the game. Also, by reducing the number of frames at the end of the image change effect, the transition to the normal display can be made quickly, and interest in the next change effect can be stimulated. Here, the operation of the movable members 73 and 74 and the change of the light emitting areas HK1 and HK2, which are executed in accordance with the reduction/enlargement change of the predetermined image in the image change rendering, are preferably executed in association with the start period for a longer time than those executed in association with the return period.

A specific example of moving the movable members 73 and 74 in the image change effect has been described above, but the movable members 73 and 74 do not necessarily have to be moved, and the movable accessories 73 and 74 may be stopped during the execution period of the image change effect.

(If the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Next, the case where the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. When the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, for example, the command line that connects the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 does not receive the command due to disconnection, partial disconnection, or disconnection of the connector. In the following description, when the command is normally received by the performance control unit 130m, it is represented by "o" in the figure, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the command is not normally received by the performance control unit 130m, it is represented by "x" in the figure. In a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be normally received first occurs to before a command can be normally received, one or a plurality of commands of the same type and/or different types may not be normally received. In addition, the command is written as "cd" in the figure.

A performance pattern 70a displayed on a first image display device 70 in a normal game state is composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a decoration part consisting of a bar-like image SG which is a part of the character and a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character, and an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). Also, the production pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of the identification portion consisting of the number portion (identification character).

In the normal game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the production modes A to C scroll left and right (reciprocating motion). Also, in the specific game state, the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion).

Predetermined detection sensors (starting port detection switches 45a and 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a
, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately made. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the command line connector for communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

In the following specific example, the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state will be described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 60, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the sub first variable display device 81, the sub first reservation display device 83, the first reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp design, and the first start port 45 are each set to the second reservation number, the second special design storage designation command, the second special design, the second special Symbol display 61, second special symbol pending display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second pending display 84, second pending number display area 70F, second pending icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, second starting port 47.

(Specific example 1 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 154 and Figure 155, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 1 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 154 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and FIG. 155 is an effect example corresponding to the timing chart of FIG.

At the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60, and when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance symbol designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variable display of the 1 lamp design (see FIG. 155 (a)).

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the performance design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variable display of the 1 lamp design. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the start time command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance design designation command cannot be normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special design TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 is not started. At this time, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp symbol in the sub-first variable display 81 continues to be permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished) (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the period of the actual stop of the production symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the special symbol TZ variation display, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the performance design designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the variation pattern designation command, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variable display of the 1 lamp design. At this time, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp symbol in the sub-first variable display 81 continues to be permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished) (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the period of the actual stop of the production symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the special symbol variation time has passed, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the special symbol TZ variation display, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

The specific example 1 is, in the production control unit 130m, the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance design 70a, and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern of the performance design (normal reception), the variation of the performance design 70a is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the performance design 70a is not satisfied (missed), the second condition. (Production design designation command) The production design 70a determined based on the swaying fluctuation. On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is satisfied (normal reception), at least one of the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance design 70a and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern of the performance design is not satisfied (missing), (regardless of the satisfaction (normal reception) or lack of abnormality of the fourth condition (special design determination command)), the fluctuation of the performance design 70a is not started. It's like By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 2 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 155 and Figure 156, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 2 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 156 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 2 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first variation display 81 are started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the start time command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the performance design 70a is started, and the special design TZ and the variation display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variation display of the performance design 70a is started, and the special design TZ and the variation display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At P13 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

In the specific example 2, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a, and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern (variation pattern) of the production design 70a are satisfied, the first state for starting the fluctuation production is entered, and the fourth condition (special design decision command) concerning the stop of the fluctuation of the production design 70a is insufficient, the production design determined based on the second condition. At 70a, a second state in which swing variation can be executed is entered. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, if the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the same fluctuation performance as in the first state is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the same shake fluctuation as in the second state is executable. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example 2, in the production control unit 130m, when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design 70a are satisfied, the fluctuation production of the production design 70a is started regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command). is. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 3 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 155 and Figure 157, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 3 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 157 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 3 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first variation display 81 are started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variable display of the 1 lamp design. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the performance design designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. At this time, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp symbol in the sub-first variable display 81 continues to be permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished) (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the period of the actual stop of the production symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the special symbol TZ variation display, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the start time command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance design designation command is normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is not started. At this time, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp symbol in the sub-first variable display 81 continues to be permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished) (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the period of the actual stop of the production symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the special symbol variation time has passed, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the special symbol TZ variation display, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

Specific example 3 is, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a, and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern (variation pattern) of the production design 70a are satisfied, the fluctuation production of the production design 70a is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of the fluctuation of the production design 70a is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation) command) can be executed with the production pattern 70a determined based on the swing variation. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (performance design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to perform control so as not to start the variable performance of the performance design 70a. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 4 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 158, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and a specific example 4 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 158 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 4 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first variation display 81 are started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the fluctuation display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the fluctuation display of the special design TZ is stopped, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol stop period on the sub first variation display device 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variation effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the start time command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance design designation command cannot be normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special design TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 is not started. Therefore, the periods of the permanent stop of the effect symbol 70a, the permanent stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the permanent stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the performance design designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the variation pattern designation command, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variable display of the 1 lamp design. Therefore, the periods of the permanent stop of the effect symbol 70a, the permanent stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the permanent stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub first variation display 81 start the variable display of the 1 lamp design. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P15, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

P17 onwards are as described above.

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

In the specific example 4, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, when at least one of the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern (variation pattern) of the production design 70a is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the fluctuation production. On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the production pattern starts to change, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed with the production design 70a determined based on the second condition (production design designation command). By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 5 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 155 and Figure 159, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 1 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 159 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 5 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the fluctuation display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the fluctuation display of the special design TZ is stopped, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the stop period of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display device 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variation effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At P7 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the production design designation command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the special design TZ is stopped, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display device 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variation effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At P10 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the production design designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the variation pattern designation command, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the special design TZ is changed, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the stop period of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display device 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variation effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At P13 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive any of the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the one-lamp design variable display on the sub first variation display 81 are not started, and the performance design 70a is actually stopped, the variation display of the special design TZ is actually stopped, and the first lamp on the sub first variation display 81 is not started. The period during which the symbols are permanently stopped is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the stop period of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display device 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variation effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command and the production design designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the special design TZ is changed, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P17, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the stop period of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display device 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P18, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variation effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P19, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the production design designation command is normally received by the production control unit 130m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the fluctuation display of the special design TZ is stopped, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P20, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the stop period of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display device 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P21, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variation effect is not started, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P22, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

In the specific example 5, in the production control unit 130m, when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design 70a are insufficient, regardless of the satisfaction or lack of the conditions (game state designation command) regarding the game state and the condition (special design confirmation command) concerning the fluctuation stop of the production design 70a, it is possible to control so as not to start the fluctuation production. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 6 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 160, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and a specific example 6 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 160 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first variation display 81 are started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 start to variably display one lamp design. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variable display of the 1 lamp design. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the period of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended, and accordingly the output of the varying BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform the fluctuation motion (performance operation).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the performance design designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the performance control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. At this time, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp symbol in the sub-first variable display 81 continues to be permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished) (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the period of the actual stop of the production symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable effect is not started, so the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the start time command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance design designation command is normally received by the performance control unit 130m, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is not started. At this time, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp symbol in the sub-first variable display 81 continues to be permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished) (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the period of the actual stop of the production symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the special symbol variation time has passed, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the special symbol TZ variation display, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

In the specific example 6, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) regarding the production design 70a and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the production design 70a are satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of the fluctuation of the production design 70a is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command). Shaking variation can be executed with the production pattern 70a determined based on the above. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the variable performance can be controlled not to start. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 7 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 161, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 7 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 161 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

At the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60. - 特許庁At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state A), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. The effect control unit 130m determines that the internal state is the game state A based on the game state designation command that designates the game state A. In addition, the reception history of the game state designation command is stored in the effect control section 130m.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined failure mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first variable display 81 is finally stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state A), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. In this case, the performance control part 130m keeps the internal state as the game state A because the game state designation command designating the game state A received at the timing of P4 has the same contents as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state A) (timing of P1). Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined failure mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first variable display 81 is finally stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state B), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. In this case, the performance control part 130m switches the internal state to the game state B because the game state designation command designating the game state A received at the timing of P7 does not have the same content as the previous (timing of P4) reception history of the game state designation command (game state A). Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined failure mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first variable display 81 is finally stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the performance design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 start to show the variable display of the 1 lamp design. In this case, the performance control part 130m keeps the game state B without switching the internal state to the game state A, although the game state designation command designating the game state A which could not be received at the timing of P10 does not have the same content as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state B) (timing of P7). Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative portion moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 155(d)). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined failure mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first variable display 81 is finally stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) and the production design designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 do not start the variable display of the 1 lamp design, and the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the first lamp design. The stopped state continues. In this case, the performance control part 130m keeps the game state B without switching the internal state to the game state A, although the game state designation command designating the game state A which cannot be received at the timing of P10 does not have the same contents as the game state designation command (game state B) of the previous reception history (timing of P7).

At the timing of P15 after P14, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the performance control part 130m normally receives the stop time command (special pattern confirmation command) transmitted from the main control part 110m at this timing, since the variation performance is not started, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the 1 lamp pattern stop state on the sub first variation display 81 remain unchanged.

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the production design designation command is normally received by the production control unit 130m. The stopped state continues. In this case, the performance control part 130m keeps the game state B without switching the internal state to the game state A, although the game state designation command designating the game state A which cannot be received at the timing of P10 does not have the same contents as the game state designation command (game state B) of the previous reception history (timing of P7).

At the timing of P18 after P17, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the performance control part 130m normally receives the stop time command (special pattern confirmation command) transmitted from the main control part 110m at this timing, since the variation performance is not started, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the 1 lamp pattern stop state on the sub first variation display 81 remain unchanged.

Temporarily, at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60, the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state A) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Variation display of symbols does not start. In this case, if the game state of the game state designation command received at this timing is a command with the same content as the game state designation command of the previous reception history, the performance control part 130m remains in the previous game state without switching the internal state. On the other hand, if the game state of the game state designation command received at this timing does not have the same contents as the game state designation command of the previous reception history, the performance control part 130m switches the internal state to the game state determined based on the game state designation command of this time.

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

In the specific example 7, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is satisfied (normal reception), the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command) is the same game state as the previously designated first condition (game state designation command), the game state grasped by the production control unit 130m is not changed. On the other hand, if the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command) is different from the previously designated first condition game state designation command), the game state grasped by the sub is changed to the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command). In addition, in the performance control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is not satisfied (missed), the game state is not changed regardless of other conditions (the second condition (special design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern and the third condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern of the performance design. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 8 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 162, a specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 162 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (hit design) and the variation pattern designation command (hit performance) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. In this case, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance design designation command is a win and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a win, the variation performance is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined failure mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first variable display 81 is finally stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (winning design) and the variation pattern designation command (loss performance) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 do not start the variable display of one lamp design, and the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the first lamp design of the sub-first variation display 81 are not started. Retained in stopped state. In this way, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is a winning one, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is a losing one, the variation performance is not started.

As shown in FIG. 162(b), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (losing design), and the variation pattern designation command (losing performance) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp design on the sub first variation display 81 are started. In this case, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is a losing one and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is a losing one, the variation performance is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined failure mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first variable display 81 is finally stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (losing design), and the variation pattern designation command (win performance) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 do not start the variable display of one lamp design, and the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the first lamp design of the sub first variation display 81 are not started. Retained in stopped state. In this way, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is a losing one, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is a winning one, the variation performance is not started.

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

In a specific example 8, in the production control unit 130m, the production pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (production design designation command) regarding the designation of the production design 70a is a win, and when the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the designation of the production pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the production design 70a is a win, the production design 70a can be started to fluctuate. Similarly, in the performance control part 130m, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance design 70a is a loss and the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern of the performance design 70a is a loss, the performance design 70a can be started to fluctuate. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130m, (Even when satisfying (receiving) the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern 70a, and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern of the effect pattern 70a). If the hit/loss is different from the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern specification command) related to designation, the variation of the production design 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 9 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 163, a specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 163 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 163(a), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (for the first special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the first special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variable display of the 1 lamp design. In this case, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is for the first special design and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is for the first special design, the variation performance is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined failure mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first variable display 81 is finally stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (for the first special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the second special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variable display of the 1 lamp design, and the performance design 70a, the special design TZ, and the first of the sub-first variation display 81 are not started. The lamp pattern is held stationary. Thus, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is for the first special design, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is for the second special design, the variation performance is not started.

As shown in FIG. 163(b), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (for the second special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the second special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variable display of the 1 lamp design. In this case, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is for the second special design and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is for the second special design, the variation performance is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined failure mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first variable display 81 is finally stopped in a failure mode (for example, extinguished).

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (for the second special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the first special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variable display of the 1 lamp design, and the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the first of the sub-first variation display 81 are not started. The lamp pattern is held stationary. Thus, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is for the second special design, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is for the first special design, the variation performance is not started.

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m will be performed.

Specific example 9 is a predetermined prize -specific term in the production control unit 130m, the second condition (direct pattern specification command) for the specification of the production pattern 70A is selected according to the predetermined prize conditions (for the first special pattern or the second special pattern), and the third condition (variable pattern specified command) is based on the production pattern of the production pattern. If it is selected in the case (for the first special pattern or the second special pattern), the production pattern 70A can be fluctuated. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130m, (even when the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern 70a, and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern of the effect pattern 70a are satisfied (normal reception), the second condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern 70a is a predetermined winning condition (for the first special design or for the second special design). On the other hand, when the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the designation of the performance pattern of the performance pattern 70a is selected under a predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or for the second special symbol) and another winning condition (for the second special symbol or for the first special symbol), the variation of the performance symbol is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

As a condition for executing a predetermined control in the effect control unit 130m, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m as described above was exemplified, but not limited to this, other events such as the passage of time and operation of the operation button may be used as conditions.

As shown in FIG. 164, even when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m (such as the specific examples 1 to 9 described above), a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control unit 110m. Specifically, in a period when the performance pattern 70a fluctuates even if the conditions are not met in the performance control part 130m, when the performance control part 130m normally receives a predetermined signal from the main control part 110m while the fluctuating performance pattern 70a is displayed on the screen, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. In addition, during the period when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped due to the unsatisfied conditions in the performance control part 130m, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed in the state where the shaking and fluctuating performance pattern 70a is displayed on the screen. Further, when the performance control part 130m normally receives a predetermined signal from the main control part 110m during the period when the performance control part 130m stops the performance pattern 70a because the conditions are not met, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed in the state where the stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed on the screen. As described above, in the embodiment, regardless of the condition that the production control unit 130m has (or does not have), if the initial operation condition based on the predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m is satisfied, the initial operation is executed regardless of the display mode of the production pattern 70a. In concrete example 10, the relationship between the condition that is (is not) aligned in the effect control unit 130m and the effect pattern 70a is the same as in concrete example 1, so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 165, even when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m (specific examples 1 to 10, etc. described above), when the detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) and the main control means 110 become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine 1, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification) knowledge, etc.) can be executed. This anomaly notification can be performed over a predetermined period. Specifically, in the period when the performance pattern 70a is fluctuating even if the conditions are not met in the performance control section 130m, when the disconnection state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Further, when the disconnection state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs during the period when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped because the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Further, when the state of disconnection (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs during the period in which the performance pattern 70a is permanently stopped due to the condition not being met in the performance control section 130m, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. As described above, in the embodiment, regardless of the condition that the production control unit 130m has (or does not have) the condition, the abnormality notification is executed regardless of the display mode of the production pattern 70a if the abnormality notification condition for the disconnected state is satisfied. At this time, in the image display devices 70, 71, the abnormality notification may be performed by overlapping the performance pattern 70a in the state of being changed, temporarily stopped, or in the permanent stop state, or in the area overlapping the performance pattern 70a, and the abnormality notification using the image display devices 70, 71 can be executed in various modes, such as erasing the image of the performance pattern 70a, etc., and performing the abnormality notification. In concrete example 11, the relationship between the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) in the effect control unit 130m and the effect pattern 70a is the same as in concrete example 1, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m, other events, actions, productions, operations, notifications, etc. described in the present embodiment may be combined and executed.

<Content I of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is established, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. As such a game machine, there is a game machine that transforms a display area of an image display device and also transforms an image being displayed in the display area (for example, JP-A-2017-196126). However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a movable accessory (movable members 73, 74) that can change between a first mode (stopped at a standby position) and a second mode (effect operation), a first light emitting area (HK1) provided in the movable accessory (73, 74) and capable of changing a light emitting state between a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished), and A second light emitting region (HK2) provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (73, 74) and capable of changing the light emitting state between a first light emitting state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (e.g., extinguished); and display means (70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variable effect. It is possible to change between an image (for example, a normal display effect pattern 70a) and a second image (for example, a change display effect pattern 70a) that is displayed on the screen by changing the first image, and when the variable effect that changes to the second image (for example, a change display effect pattern 70a) is performed, a light emission effect that changes to the second state (for example, extinguished) can be performed by linking at least one of the first light emitting region (HK1) and the second light emitting region (HK2). A third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) can be displayed together with the first image on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70 and 71), and the third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) can be displayed at the same position in either the first image or the second image.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, there are provided a movable role (movable members 73, 74) that can change between a first mode (stopped at the standby position) and a second mode (effect action), a first light emitting area (HK1) provided in the movable role (73, 74) and capable of changing the light emitting state between a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (e.g., extinguished), and the movable role (movable members 73, 7). 4) provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from 4), and capable of changing the light emission state between a first state (effect light emission state) and a second state (e.g., extinguished) of light emission; ) and a second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) that is displayed on the screen by changing the first image, and when the variable effect of changing to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) is performed, the light emission effect of changing to the second state (for example, extinguished) by linking at least one of the first light emitting area (HK1) and the second light emitting area (HK2) can be performed, and the display On the screen of means (image display devices 70, 71), a third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) can be displayed together with the first image (for example, a normal display production pattern 70a), and when the first image (for example, a normal display production pattern 70a) is changed to the second image (for example, a change display production pattern 70a), the visibility is changed. It is characterized in that it can be displayed so as not to change the visibility of the

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, there are provided a movable role (movable members 73, 74) that can change between a first mode (stopped at the standby position) and a second mode (effect action), a first light emitting area (HK1) provided in the movable role (73, 74) and capable of changing the light emitting state between a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (e.g., extinguished), and the movable role (movable members 73, 7). 4) provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from 4), and capable of changing the light emission state between a first state (effect light emission state) and a second state (e.g., extinguished) of light emission; ) and a second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) that is displayed on the screen by changing the first image, and when the variable effect of changing to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) is performed, the light emission effect of changing to the second state (for example, extinguished) by linking at least one of the first light emitting area (HK1) and the second light emitting area (HK2) can be performed, and the display It is characterized in that it is possible to display a third image (for example, a frame image GG) that changes in conjunction with a change from the first image (for example, a normal display effect pattern 70a) to the second image (for example, a change display effect pattern 70a) on the screen of means (image display devices 70, 71).

<Content II of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. As such a game machine, there is a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control board that controls the effect of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the game machine does not consider the case where the control state of the main control means deviates from the control state of the performance control means, and there is still room for improvement in order to improve the amusement of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the game machine (1) comprising the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, The production control means (production control board 130) is capable of executing initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the control board 110), the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable production of the production pattern (70a). When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the design (70a) is satisfied, the variation performance is started, and when the fourth condition (special design decision command) regarding the stoppage of the variation of the performance design (70a) is insufficient, the shaking variation can be executed in the performance design (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command), and the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied in the performance control means (performance control board 130). However, when at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designating command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designating command) is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable performance.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the game machine (1) comprising the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, The production control means (production control board 130) is capable of executing initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the control board 110), the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable production of the production pattern (70a). When the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the design (70a) is satisfied, the first state for starting the fluctuation production is entered, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) regarding the stoppage of the fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) determines the second condition in which the production pattern (70a) is determined based on the production design specification command, and the first condition (game state) is established in the production control means (production control board 130). designated command) is insufficient, but when the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the variable performance is started as in the first state;

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the game machine (1) comprising the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, The production control means (production control board 130) is capable of executing initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the control board 110), the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the fluctuation production of the production pattern (70a). In the production control means (production control board 130), if a predetermined condition (production design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) related to the production design (70a) is satisfied, conditions related to the game state (game Regardless of the sufficiency or shortage of the state designation command), the fluctuation performance is started, and when the condition (special design confirmation command) for stopping the fluctuation of the performance design (70a) is insufficient, the predetermined condition (performance design designation command, variation pattern designation command) is capable of executing the swing variation in the performance design (70a) determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the game machine (1) comprising the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, The production control means (production control board 130) is capable of executing initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the control board 110), the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute a variable production of the production pattern (70a). When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the design (70a) is satisfied, the variation production is started, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) regarding the stoppage of the fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed in the production design (70a) determined based on the second condition, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and the second condition (production). When at least one of the symbol designating command) and the third condition (variation pattern designating command) is insufficient, it is possible to perform control so as not to start the variation effect.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the game machine (1) comprising the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, The production control means (production control board 130) is capable of executing initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the control board 110), the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71) can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means (production control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, but the second condition (production pattern designation) concerning the production pattern (70a). command) and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the performance pattern of the performance pattern is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable performance, and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and the second condition (performance design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the performance pattern (70a) starts to fluctuate. When the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, it is characterized in that the shaking variation can be executed with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance symbol specification command).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the game machine (1) comprising the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, The production control means (production control board 130) is capable of executing initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the control board 110), the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the fluctuation production of the production pattern (70a). In the production control means (production control board 130), if the prescribed conditions (production design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) related to the production design (70a) are insufficient, conditions related to the game state (game state). Specified command) and the condition for stopping the fluctuation of the production pattern (70a) (special pattern determination command), regardless of whether the conditions are satisfied or insufficient, the variable production can be controlled not to start.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the game machine (1) comprising the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, The production control means (production control board 130) is capable of executing initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) and production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the control board 110), the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a). In the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern (70a). ) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production design (70a) is satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stoppage of the fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, it is possible to execute the shaking fluctuation with the production design determined based on the second condition (production design designation command), and the production control means (production control board 130) runs out of the first condition (game state designation command). When at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that control is possible so as not to start the variable performance.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine (1) comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). The control means (production control board 130) can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and can execute the production according to the signal (command, etc.). Power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, display means (image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable effect of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means (production control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a). If the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) for stopping the variation of the effect pattern (70a) is insufficient, the effect pattern (70a) determined on the basis of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) can execute a shaking variation, and in the effect control means (performance control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, but the second condition (performance design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation). command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to start the variable performance.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine (1) comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). The control means (production control board 130) can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and can execute the production according to the signal (command, etc.). Power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, display means (image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable effect of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means (production control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a). In the case of doing, it becomes the first state for starting the variable production, and if the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the stop of the fluctuation of the production pattern (70a) is insufficient, the production pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (production design designation command) becomes the second state in which the shaking fluctuation can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition. When the condition (fluctuation pattern specifying command) is satisfied, the same state as the first state is entered in which the fluctuation performance is started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) is insufficient, the state is the same as the second state in which shaking fluctuation can be executed.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine (1) comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). The control means (production control board 130) can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and can execute the production according to the signal (command, etc.). Power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, display means (image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130) When a predetermined condition (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the effect pattern (70a) is satisfied, the variable effect is started regardless of whether the condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied or insufficient. When the condition (special symbol determination command) for stopping the variation of (70a) is insufficient, the performance symbol (70a) determined on the basis of the predetermined condition (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) can be shaken and fluctuated.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine (1) comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). The control means (production control board 130) can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and can execute the production according to the signal (command, etc.). Power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, display means (image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable effect of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means (production control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a). If the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the start of the variation effect and the stop of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition can execute the shaking variation, and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient. , It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable production.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine (1) comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). The control means (production control board 130) can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and can execute the production according to the signal (command, etc.). power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.), display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, at least one of the second condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding the effect pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), while the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the production design (70a) starts to change, and the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the second condition ( It is characterized in that it is possible to execute shaking variation in the production pattern (70a) determined based on the production pattern designation command).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine (1) comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). The control means (production control board 130) can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and can execute the production according to the signal (command, etc.). Power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, display means (image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), when the predetermined conditions (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the effect pattern (70a) are insufficient, the condition regarding the game state (game state designation command) and the condition regarding the stoppage of fluctuation of the effect pattern (70a) (special symbol determination) It is characterized in that control is possible so as not to start the variable performance regardless of the sufficiency or lack of command).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine (1) comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) is provided with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). The control means (production control board 130) can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9), and can execute the production according to the signal (command, etc.). Power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, display means (image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable effect of the production pattern (70a), and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) ) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the stop of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the swaying variation can be executed with the effect symbol determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command). It is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance when at least one of them is insufficient.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, When the radio wave detection sensor, etc.) is in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). When the second condition (performance design designation command) related to the performance design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern of the performance design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation performance is started, and the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) related to the stoppage of fluctuation of the performance design (70a) is insufficient. In the control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, When the radio wave detection sensor, etc.) is in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). When satisfying the second condition (performance design designation command) related to the performance design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern of the performance design (70a), it becomes the first state to start the variable performance, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) related to the stop of fluctuation of the performance design (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (performance design designation command) is determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command). In the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, if the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, a state in which the fluctuation performance is started as in the first state, and if the fourth condition (special design determination command) is insufficient, a state in which shaking fluctuation can be executed is obtained as in the second state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) is in a non-connected state (disconnection of connector, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a). When a specified command, variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the variation performance is started irrespective of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition regarding the game state (game state specification command), and when the condition (special pattern determination command) regarding the stoppage of the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is insufficient, the swing variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the predetermined condition (the performance pattern specification command, the variation pattern specification command).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, When the radio wave detection sensor, etc.) is in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). When the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation performance is started, and when the fourth condition (special design determination command) related to the stoppage of the variation of the performance design (70a) is insufficient, the performance design (70a) determined based on the second condition can be shaken. In the performance control means (performance control board 130) , when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the variable performance can be controlled not to start.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, When the radio wave detection sensor, etc.) is in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). However, if at least one of the second condition (performance design designation command) related to the performance design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern of the performance design is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the fluctuation performance, and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), while the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (performance design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the performance diagram. When the variation of the design (70a) is started and the fourth condition (special design determination command) for stopping the variation of the performance design (70a) is insufficient, the performance design (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command) can be shaken and varied.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, When the radio wave detection sensor, etc.) is in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. When the designated command, variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the variable performance can be controlled so as not to start regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition regarding the game state (game state designation command) and the condition regarding the stoppage of the variation of the performance symbol (70a) (special symbol determination command).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) is in a non-connected state (disconnection of connector, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), the production control means (production control board 130) can execute a variable production of the production pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71), and the production control means (production control board 130) lacks the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state. However, when the second condition (production design designation command) related to the production design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) related to the stop of fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient. In the board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the variable performance can be controlled not to start.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (start winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) , radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and during the power supply to the game machine, the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). When the is in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). 0a) when satisfying the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a), start the variable production, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) related to the stop of fluctuation of the production design (70a) When the fourth condition (special design determination command) is insufficient, the production design (70a) determined based on the second condition (production design specification command) It is possible to execute shaking fluctuation, and the production control means (production control board 130) ), when the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the variable performance can be controlled not to start.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (start winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) , radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and during the power supply to the game machine, the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). When the is in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). 0a) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a), the first state to start the variable production, and the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) related to the stop of the fluctuation of the production pattern (70a). In the production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, if the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the state is the same as the first state in which the variable performance is started, and if the fourth condition (special design decision command) is insufficient, the state is the same as the second state in which the swing fluctuation can be executed.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) , radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and during power supply to the game machine, the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). When the is in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display device 70, 71). When satisfying the specified command), regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition regarding the game state (game state specifying command), the variable performance is started, and when the condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the stoppage of the variation of the performance symbol (70a) is insufficient, the shaking variation can be executed with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the predetermined condition (performance symbol specification command, variation pattern specification command).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) , radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and during power supply to the game machine, the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). When the is in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). 0a) when satisfying the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a), the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) related to the stoppage of fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed in the production design (70a) determined based on the second condition. When (game state designating command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (performance design designating command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designating command) is insufficient, it is possible to perform control so as not to start the variable performance.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) , radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and during power supply to the game machine, the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). When the is in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). When at least one of the second condition (performance design designation command) related to the performance design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the performance pattern of the performance design is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable performance, and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), while the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (performance design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the performance design (70a). ) is started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern determination command) for stopping the variation of the performance pattern (70a) is insufficient, the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command) can be shaken and varied.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) , radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and during power supply to the game machine, the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). When the is in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display device 70, 71). specified command) is insufficient, regardless of the satisfaction or lack of the condition (game state specifying command) regarding the game state and the condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the stoppage of the variation of the performance symbol (70a), the variable performance can be controlled not to start.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing games, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) , radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the performance control means (performance control board 130) can execute a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and during power supply to the game machine, the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). When the is in a disconnected state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70 and 71). When the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation performance is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stoppage of the variation of the performance design (70a) is insufficient, it is possible to execute the swing fluctuation in the performance design determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command), and the performance control means (performance control board 130). In the above, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the variable performance can be controlled not to start.

(Regarding the time-saving game state)
In addition to or instead of the "low-probability short-time gaming state after the big win" executed after the end of the big-hit game, the above-mentioned "low-probability short-time gaming state" may set a "low-probability short-time gaming state with a specified number of times variation opportunity" triggered by the execution of a specified number of special symbol variations in the low-probability game state. The ``low-probability time-saving game state with a specified number of times variation opportunity'' is executed after, for example, 1000 specified times of pattern variation is performed in the low-probability game state including the low-probability time-saving game state, and in addition to the performance of whether or not a big win, the time-saving rush performance such as counting down the number of times of variation until the time-saving occurs can be combined.

In addition to or instead of the ``low-probability short-time gaming state after the big win'' and/or the ``low-probability short-time gaming state based on the specific symbol combination'', the ``low-probability short-time gaming state based on the specific symbol combination'' triggered by the display of a predetermined combination of special symbols in the low-probability gaming state may be set. The ``low-probability time-saving game state based on the specific pattern combination'' can be executed in combination with a performance such as a big hit or not executed after specific patterns such as ``1, 2, 3'' or ``7, 8, 7'' are displayed in a low-probability state, as well as a ready-to-win performance for whether or not the time-saving will occur, and other time-saving rush performances.

(Playing a game ball into the starting gate)
In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball is hit so as to pass through the left area of the game area 5a, it is possible to enter the second start opening 47 which is opened according to the winning result of the winning lottery of the normal pattern performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start opening 45 or the normal pattern gate 44.例文帳に追加In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball is hit so as to pass through the right area of the game area 5a, it is possible to enter the second start opening 47 which is opened according to the winning result of the winning lottery of the normal pattern performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start opening 45 or the normal pattern gate 44.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is easier to pass through the normal figure gate 44 when hitting the right area of the game area 5a than when hitting the left area of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled than the "non-time-saving game state" in the open mode (specific game state). It is possible to proceed with the game advantageously without doing so.

In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, the entrance of the warp device 41 is opened on the left side of the decoration frame 41, and a first start port 45 is provided directly below the stage part 42 where the game ball guided by the warp device 41 rolls so that the game ball can always win a prize (enter the ball). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is in the open mode, and in the "non-time-saving game state" (normal game state), the game ball is launched in the left side area of the game area 5a, and the player aims to win the first start port 45. becomes possible.

As described above, the game machine 1 of the embodiment is designed to give a difference between advantages and disadvantages for the player depending on which of the left side area and the right side area of the game area 5a is hit, and the area to be hit in the game area 5a may be switched according to the game state. In other words, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is required to proceed with the game aiming at winning at the start ports 45 and 47 according to the game state. However, since it is up to the player's shooting operation to determine which area, the right side or the left side, of the game area 5a is to be launched, there is a risk that the player may proceed with the game aiming at winning the wrong starting ports 45, 47.例文帳に追加

In both the "non-time-saving game state" and the "time-saving game state", even if the game machine allows the game ball to be shot in the same area (for example, the left side area) of the game area 5a, it is left to the player's shooting operation to determine which area, the right side or the left side, of the game area 5a.

(Production example 1)
FIG. 166 and FIG. 167 are diagrams showing an expectation display, a hold icon change effect, a lamp change effect, a notification sound effect, a movable member actuation effect, and a specific example 1 of the effect of continuous advance notice effect by these. In addition, various effects that make players expect execution of a jackpot game may be referred to as hit suggestion effects.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B.

After that, when the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 166(b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, a blue effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display to start the first performance of the continuous advance notice performance, the display mode of the first suspension icon shift-displayed on the second display part 70B2 is changed to a blue character icon to start the suspension icon change performance, and accordingly, the lamp change performance is started by changing the winning hole lamp NR from the extinguished state to the blue flashing state. In addition, an actuation effect in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the first movable member 73 vibrates vertically is executed for a predetermined period of time. The operation effect in the weak operation mode of the first movable member 73 is started at the timing before the effect pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, and is stopped before the effect pattern 70 is scrolled at high speed (for example, before the preparation operation).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Also, in the first image display device 70, a zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the zone background A, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Then, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 166(d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 166(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display, so that the second performance of the continuous advance notice performance is started, and the pending icon change performance, the lamp change performance and the zone performance are continued. In addition, an actuation effect in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the first movable member 73 vibrates vertically is executed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 166(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Then, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 166(g), after the performance symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the failure performance symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 166(h), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display, thereby starting the third performance of the continuous advance notice performance, but the effect image EF is displayed in red with a higher expectation for the big win game than in blue. In addition, the symbol effect image ZE is displayed in a color that indicates a higher expectation for the jackpot game than before. Also, the pending icon change effect is continuously displayed. In addition, by changing the state of the winning hole lamp NR from lighting in blue to blinking in red, a lamp change effect is executed in which the expectation for a big win is higher than in lighting in blue. In addition, an operation effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 moves greatly so as to fall from the upper side of the first image display device 70 to the front side of the first image display device. At this time, an actuation performance in which the second movable member 74 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the second movable member 74 vibrates in an oblique direction is executed for a predetermined period. In this way, the advance notification executed in the variable display provides a display with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the one previously executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(i), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effects of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are stopped. It should be noted that the zone effect is displayed by switching from the zone background A to the zone background B, which is a display with a higher expectation for a big win.

As shown in FIG. 167(j), the mini character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and, for example, the mini character MCB moving across the screen produces an effect that stirs expectations.

After that, as shown in FIG. 167(k), for example, the dialogue ``CHANCE!'' uttered by the teammate is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the first image display device 70, and the speech output device 9 displays the voice ``Chance has arrived!''

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(l), the production pattern 70a of "3" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the ready-to-win production (normal reach) is executed in which the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in the central fluctuation display area. At this time, the display mode of the first reserved icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to the red character icon, so that the reserved icon change performance with higher expectations for the jackpot game than the blue character icon is executed. Further, the winning hole lamp NR changes from red lighting to multicolor (rainbow color) lighting, thereby executing a lamp change performance with a higher expectation for a big win than red lighting.

After that, when it develops into SP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 167(m), the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased. The performance pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size changes from a normal display mode composed of a decoration portion including a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG which is a part of the character and a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character, and an identification portion including a hexagonal base image and a numeral portion (identification character) to a simple reduced display manner of only the identification portion.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 167(n), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a big hit ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished during the display of SP and/or SPSP ready-to-win, the lamp changing performance may be continued, or the winning opening lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g., white lighting) not used in the lamp changing performance (not suggesting the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot).

(Expectation display)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the production pattern 70a, it is possible to perform so-called expectation level display, such as color effects such as the effect image EF and the pattern effect image ZE, which make players expect the execution of the big winning game. As shown in FIG. 168, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the expectation degree display by the color effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the variable display of the production symbol 70a based on the first start condition (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the special 1 variable display) which is executed in the normal game state by the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole 45 (execution rate a3 < execution rate a1). That is, the expectation degree display by the color effect in the special 1 variation display is more difficult to perform in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 168, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the expectation degree display by the color effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the variable display of the production symbol 70a based on the second starting condition (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 2 variable display) which is executed in the specific game state by winning the game ball into the second winning hole 47 (execution rate a3 < execution rate a4). That is, the expectation level display by the color effect in the special 1 variation display is less likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such an execution ratio of the degree-of-expectation display, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45 even when the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The degree of expectation display is not limited to a color effect, but may be characters or decorations superimposed on an image such as a background image or a performance pattern, or performed around the image, as long as a big win game can be expected by the difference in content and color.

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 168 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of expectation level displays by color effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of expectation display by color effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern A32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is ``0'' (or the performance pattern A32 is not set), the expectation degree display of the performance pattern A12 can be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the expectation degree display of the performance pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern A12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the expectation degree display of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern A32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is ``0'' (or the performance pattern A32 is not set), the expectation degree display of the performance pattern A42 can be executed in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the expectation degree display of the performance pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern A42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the expectation degree display of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Zone production)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, it is possible to execute the zone effect accompanied by the scene change of the background image. The zone performance makes the execution of the jackpot game expected over a predetermined period, and can be executed at any timing of the predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one starting condition or the predetermined variable display period based on the determination of a plurality of starting conditions.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (execution rate b3 < execution rate b1). That is, the zone effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left to hit the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate b3 < execution rate b4). That is, the zone effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such an execution ratio of the zone performance, the player can be made to notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns in FIG. 169 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern B32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is '0' (or the performance pattern B32 is not set), the zone performance of the performance pattern B12 can be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the zone performance of the performance pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern B12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the zone effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern B32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is ``0'' (or the performance pattern B32 is not set), the zone performance of the performance pattern B42 can be executed in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the zone performance of the performance pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern B42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the zone effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The zone effect is not limited to being performed over a plurality of times of variable display, and the zone effect may be performed by one time of variable display. Then, when it is possible to execute a hit hint performance such as a zone performance over a predetermined number of variable displays, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may have a higher rate of short times (including 0 times) than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In other words, it can be said that the special 1 variation display in the specific game state facilitates execution of the hit hint performance such as the zone performance of a pattern over a short number of times of variation display than the special 1 variation display in the regular game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to change the scene of the background, etc., change the telop flowing on the screen, change the pattern decorativeness changing to the effect pattern 70a for zone production, etc. However, in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the scene change such as the background, the telop flowing on the screen, the pattern decoration change changing to the production pattern 70a for the zone production.

Even if it is done in this manner, even if the player hits the ball erroneously to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first prize winning port 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Notification sound production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 166(b), when a hold icon or a blue character icon as the icon is generated (changed to), a second generated notification sound (first change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 167(l), when a hold icon or a red character icon as the icon is generated (changed to), a third generated notification sound (second change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). Furthermore, when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generated notification sound (third change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at icon change.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of a plurality of icon display modes (four types). However, two types of notification sounds may be used, namely, the notification sound generated when the CD icon is generated and the change notification sound when the icon changes to the blue character icon, the red character icon, and the rainbow character icon. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types of special change notification sounds may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the change notification sound effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (execution rate c3<execution rate c1). That is, the change notification sound effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the change notification sound effect is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state (execution rate c3<execution rate c4). That is, the change notification sound effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such an execution ratio of the change notification sound presentation, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state.

The change notification sound production is not limited to when the pending icon changes, but may be executed with a stimulating sound at the time of winning, the start of fluctuation, or the stop of fluctuation.

For example, when the execution ratio of the specific change notification sound for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the notification sound performance by the predetermined change notification sound can be executed for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the notification sound performance by the specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the specific change notification sound for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the notification sound performance by the predetermined change notification sound can be executed for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the notification sound performance by the specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The notification sound effect is not limited to being performed in association with the change of the pending (relevant) icon. For example, when a game ball enters a starting hole, when executing a fixed effect (confirmation effect) such as "Kyoon", button change sound when a buried operation button such as "Kyuin" appears, operating sound of movable members 73 and 74, change start sound / return sound when a plurality of movable members are combined to form a specific design, completion sound when a specific design is formed, etc. Associate with various conditions. can be done.

When the information sound performance can be executed in association with the prescribed condition, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have the same or smaller execution rate of the prescribed condition and the execution ratio of the information sound performance than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, the production by the fixed notification sound in the information sound production can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution of the production by the fixed information sound may be regulated. It should be noted that not only the fixed notification sound but also the various notification sound effects described above can be used in the same way. That is, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the performance by the predetermined notification sound among the notification sound performances, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to regulate the execution of the performance by the predetermined notification sound.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Hold icon change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the production pattern 70a, by changing the form and color of the pending icon, it is possible to execute the pending icon effect that expects a big win game. The hold icon change of the present embodiment makes the execution of the jackpot game expected over a predetermined period, and can be executed at any timing of a predetermined variable display period based on determination of one start condition, or a predetermined variable display period based on determination of a plurality of start conditions.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the pending icon change effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (execution rate d3 < execution rate d1). That is, the holding icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the pending icon change effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate d3<execution rate d4). That is, when hitting left in the specific game state, the holding icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display than when hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such an execution ratio of the holding icon change performance, the player can be made to notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 171 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state.

The pending icon change performance is not limited to the color change of the pending icon (including the icon) or the mode change of the icon itself, but may be a change in the icon itself or the performance attached to the icon, such as an effect or character attached to the icon. Further, the pending icon effect is not limited to changing the round CD icon to the character icon as in the embodiment, but may change the shape of a triangle, a square, or the like.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern D32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the performance pattern D32 is not set), the pending icon change performance of the performance pattern D12 can be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the zone performance of the performance pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern D12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the pending icon change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern D32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is ``0'' (or the performance pattern D32 is not set), the pending icon change performance of the performance pattern D42 can be executed in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the pending icon change performance of the performance pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern D42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the pending icon change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of pending icons that can be displayed may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Further, in the pending icon change effect, the CD icon may change stepwise from blue to red to rainbow or the like, or may selectively change from the CD icon to blue, red, or rainbow. The special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have fewer types of display modes to be changed from the current display mode of the pending icon than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, the reserved icon change performance can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution of the reserved icon change performance may be regulated. In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the performance for change performed when changing, for example, the reserved icon change can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution of the performance for change may be regulated. Note that even when the pending icon effect is not executed, icon decorations displayed accompanying the pending icon, such as a pedestal on which the pending icon is placed and a frame surrounding the pending icon, may be displayed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Lamp change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp NR over one or a plurality of variable displays, it is possible to execute a lamp change performance, which is a type of fore-reading forewarning performance to make the player expect a big win game to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the ramp change effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (execution rate e3<execution rate e1). That is, the lamp icon change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the ramp change effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate e3<execution rate e4). That is, the ramp change effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such a ramp change performance execution ratio, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 172 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state.

The lamp changing performance is not limited to the prize winning hole lamp NR, and may be executed in conjunction with other lighting devices such as the movable members 73 and 74, the decorative frame 40, the game board 5 and the frame lighting device 10 of the glass frame 4 in addition to the prize winning hole lamp NR.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern E32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the performance pattern E32 is not set), the lamp change performance of the performance pattern E12 can be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the lamp change performance of the performance pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern E12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the ramp change effect of the production mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern E32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is ``0'' (or the performance pattern E32 is not set), the lamp change performance of the performance pattern E42 can be executed for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the lamp change performance of the performance pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern E42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the ramp change effect of the production mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state.

The special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have fewer kinds of lamp change effects than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Further, in the lamp change effect, the color may be changed stepwise from no light emission→blue→red→rainbow, or the like, or may be selectively changed from no light emission to blue, red, or rainbow. The special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have fewer types of light emission modes that can be changed from the current light emission mode than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, a predetermined pattern of the lamp change performance can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution of the lamp change performance of the predetermined pattern may be regulated.

The light emission (light emission pattern) that constitutes the lamp change effect includes, for example, a change in the pending (relevant) icon, when a game ball wins a prize in the start opening, when executing a fixed effect (fixed effect) such as "Kuen", button change sound when a buried operation button such as "Kuin" appears, operating sound of movable members 73 and 74, change start / return sound when a plurality of movable members are combined to form a specific design, completion sound when a specific design is made, etc. can be done in association.

When the lamp change performance can be executed in association with the prescribed condition, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have the same or a smaller ratio of execution of the prescribed condition and a smaller ratio of execution of the ramp change performance than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, among the lamp change performances, it is possible to execute the performance by the winning entrance lamp NR and the lighting device for the board (illumination device for the frame). That is, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute an effect by a predetermined portion (region, member unit, etc.) of the lamp change effect, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to regulate the execution of the effect by the predetermined portion.

The pattern selected in the ramp change effect or the ramp change effect may change depending on the timing (for example, at the time of winning, at the start of fluctuation, at the stop of fluctuation, how many times in a row, start/stop/determine operation of the movable member, vibration or operation of the operation button, etc.). In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the lamp change performance can be executed at a predetermined timing when winning a prize and a specific timing when the movable member is operated, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution of the lamp change performance at the predetermined timing and the specific timing may be regulated.

The execution period of the lamp change performance (predetermined pattern of the lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be shorter than the execution period of the lamp change performance (predetermined pattern of the lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

The number of types of parts (regions, members, etc.) that emit light in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state (lamp change performance) may be smaller than the number of types of parts (regions, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emission performance (lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Further, the range of emitting light in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state (lamp change performance) may be smaller than the range of light emission in the special 1 variable display of the normal game state or the special 2 variable display of the specific game state (lamp change performance). Here, the light emission effect may be such that the light emission number or the light emission range changes stepwise by changing the light emission number of the LEDs arranged side by side, or the light emission state changes by overlapping the light guide plate or the like with the image display device or the board lighting device.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Operation production of movable parts)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, by operating the first movable member 73 in operation modes including a weak actuation mode and a strong actuation mode in which the action is performed more (conspicuously) than the weak actuation mode, it is possible to execute an actuation effect that makes the player expect a big win game to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio in the weak operation mode of the operation effect by the first movable member 73 than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (execution rate f31<execution rate f11). That is, in the case of left-handed hitting in the specific game state, it is more difficult to execute the operation presentation of the weak operation mode in the special 1 fluctuation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the weak operation mode of the operation effect by the first movable member 73 is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate f31<execution rate f41). That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state, it is more difficult to execute the operation effect of the weak operation mode in the special 1 figure fluctuation display.

With such an execution ratio of the operation presentation, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made to notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the execution ratio of the strong actuation mode in the actuation effect may be smaller, the same, or larger than that of the weak actuation mode. Also, in the strong operation mode, the relationship between the winning to the starting ports 45 and 47 and the game state may be the same as in the weak operation mode, may be reversed to that in the weak operation mode, or may be the same execution ratio.

Here, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may have a smaller number of types of patterns of operation effects than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of patterns of operation effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state.

In this embodiment, the actuation effect of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the actuation effect of other movable parts such as the second movable member 74 may be the same as that of the first movable member 73 . In this case, the first movable member 73 and other movable accessories may be linked (associated) and operated.

For example, when the execution ratio of the operation performance of the specific operation mode for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), the operation performance by the predetermined operation mode can be executed for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the operation performance of the specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the operation performance of the specific operation mode for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), the operation performance by the predetermined operation mode can be executed for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the operation performance of the specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The operation effect can be executed at various timings such as when the fluctuation starts, when the effect develops, when the reach occurs, when the swing occurs, and when the final effect (fixed effect) occurs. In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the weak operation and the strong operation performance can be executed at a predetermined timing such as the start of the fluctuation and the specific timing such as the determined performance, but in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the execution of the strong operation at the predetermined timing can be regulated, and the strong operation at the specific timing can be executed. In this way, it is also possible to provide a difference in the operation mode and whether or not the operation effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The operation effect can be executed in association with a light emission effect by light emitting means such as an LED provided on the movable member. In this case, for the light emission effect, it is possible to select light emission patterns, light emission colors, light emission ranges, and the like, such as aspects in which the degree of expectation varies step by step, such as blue light emission→red light emission→rainbow light emission. In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the operation performance of the predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission and the specific light emission mode of rainbow light emission, for example, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the execution of the operation performance in the predetermined light emission mode may be restricted, while the operation performance in the specific light emission mode may be executed. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute, for example, a predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission and a specific light emission state of, for example, rainbow light emission in the operation effect, but in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, it is possible to regulate the execution of the light emission effect of the predetermined light effect in the operation effect, but it is also possible to execute the light emission effect of the specific light effect. In the case of having a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed in weak operation and a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed in strong operation, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have a smaller execution ratio of the predetermined light emission pattern than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display effect by display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in FIG. 174, in the light guide plate provided on the front side of the first image display device 70, by displaying the light guide plate image DG over one or a plurality of variable displays, it is possible to execute a light guide plate display effect, which is a type of pre-reading notice effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 174(a), in the first continuous notice effect, for example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character is displayed, as shown in FIG. A light guide plate image DG imitating a character in the same pose but in a different color (a red character or a rainbow character) is displayed. The timing of the light guide plate display effect is not limited to the start of the variation, but may be during the variation display or at the end of the variation display.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the light guide plate display effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (execution rate g3 < execution rate g1). That is, the light guide plate display effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the light guide plate display effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state (execution rate g3 < execution rate g4). That is, the light guide plate display effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such an execution ratio of the light guide plate display performance, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Here, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of light guide plate display effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

In the present embodiment, the display effect of the light guide plate has been described, but the display effect performed by the display means different from the first image display device 71, such as the second image display device 71 and the 3D filter, may be the same as the light guide plate display effect, or the execution ratio may be different. In this case, the light guide plate display effect and other display effects may be linked (associated) and executed.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern G32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the performance pattern G32 is not set), the light guide plate display performance of the performance pattern G12 can be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the light guide plate display performance of the performance pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern G12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate display effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the performance pattern G32 in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is ``0'' (or the performance pattern G32 is not set), the light guide plate change performance of the performance pattern G42 can be executed in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, but the light guide plate change performance of the performance pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern G42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various timings such as when the fluctuation starts, when the effect develops, when the reach occurs, when the swing occurs, and when the final effect (fixed effect) occurs. In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display performance can be executed at a predetermined timing such as the start of the variation and a specific timing such as a fixed performance, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution of the light guide plate display performance at the predetermined timing can be regulated, and the light guide plate display performance at the specific timing can be executed. In this manner, a difference may be provided in the display mode and whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed in association with other hit indication effect such as an actuation effect using a movable member. In this case, the light guide plate display effects can be selected from light emission patterns, light emission colors, light emission ranges, and the like, such as modes with different levels of expectation in stages such as blue light emission→red light emission→rainbow light emission. In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display performance of a predetermined display mode of blue light emission and the specific display mode of rainbow light emission, for example, can be executed together with other win hint performance such as an operation performance, but in the special game state of special 1 variable display, the execution of the other win hint performance in the predetermined display mode can be regulated, while the other win hint performance in the specific display mode can be executed. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined display mode of, for example, blue light emission and, for example, a specific display state of, for example, rainbow light emission together with the operation effect. In the case of having a predetermined display pattern (executable in weak operation) and a predetermined display pattern (executable in strong operation), the execution ratio of the predetermined display pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The display effects other than the first image display device 71 are not limited to the light guide plate, and may be sub-liquid crystals provided on the game board such as the second image display device, sub-liquid crystals provided in the frame, or the like, and display effects may be performed by combining these display means including the light guide plate.

(Continuous notice effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166, 167 and 174, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is capable of executing a continuous notice performance, which is a kind of look-ahead notice performance that makes a player expect that a big winning game will be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or a plurality of variable displays. In the present embodiment, color effects, zone effects, change notification sound effects, hold icon change effects, lamp change effects, display effects using a light guide plate, etc. are executed in a coordinated manner.

Therefore, according to FIGS. 169 to 173 and 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, it is more difficult to execute the continuous notice performance in the special 1 variable display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, it is more difficult to execute the continuous notice performance in the special 1 variable display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such an execution ratio of the continuous advance notice performance, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Here, the number of types of continuous advance notice effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of continuous advance notice effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The continuous advance notice performance may include not only a linked performance performed continuously or in association with a plurality of times of variable display, but also a development performance (such as development fanning performance, step-up (SU) type performance, etc.) in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot game increases by a stepwise or continuous change as the number of variable displays is increased or a predetermined condition such as the passage of time progresses. Note that the development effect may be a change effect such as a countdown or a timer effect in which the mode (display mode or content) changes when a predetermined condition (e.g., elapsed time) is satisfied.

A selection effect that suggests a difference in the result depending on the selected option, such as a roulette effect, a effect that increases the design at the time of reach, a preview effect that predicts the occurrence of an event that will lead to a big win, such as a look-ahead suggestive character, a liquid crystal conversation notice / cut-in notice, a development roulette effect, etc. The gauge accumulates while the button is pressed, and the button vibrates with each reaching level), the operation of the movable role (including the dedicated movable role and the role with other functions such as the light guide plate) (weak notice (suggestion) operation, strong notice (suggestion) operation, suggestion, development, decision effect), and other advance notification effects such as operation button vibration may be executed at a rate based on the above-described relationship between the game state and the start condition.

For example, when the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice performance of the specific performance mode in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is '0' (or the specific operation mode is not set), the continuous advance notice performance in the predetermined performance mode can be executed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, but the continuous advance notice performance in the specific performance mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined performance mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice performance of the specific performance mode in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is ``0'' (or the specific operation mode is not set), the continuous advance notice performance in the predetermined performance mode can be executed in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, but the continuous advance notice performance in the specific performance mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined performance mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, at the winning timing of the game ball to the first winning opening 45 and/or the variation start timing of the performance pattern 70a (first special pattern), the light emission performance of the special 1 starting port 45 can be executed, and the operation performance of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 can be executed. Similarly, in the special game state 2 variable display, at the winning timing of the game ball to the second winning hole 47 and/or the fluctuation start timing of the performance symbol 70a (second special symbol), the special 2 start opening 45 can be executed and the operation performance of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 can be executed.

On the other hand, in the special 1 variable display of the normal game state, at the winning timing of the game ball into the first winning hole 45 and/or the fluctuation start timing of the performance pattern 70a (first special pattern), the special 1 starting port 45 is not executed and the operation performance of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is not executed. That is, when hitting left in the normal game state, the light emitting effect and action effect are executed, but when hitting left in the specific game state, the execution of the light emitting effect and action effect is regulated.

In this way, by making the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state different in the light emission performance and the operation performance, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first prize winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the three production patterns 70a appear (stop) with a specific pattern (a specific outcome = a chance), it may trigger a so-called sudden definite change (2R definite change), or develop into an SP reach (which has a high possibility of a big hit among reach). The variable display in which such a chance eye appears may be performed once or a plurality of times. In this case, the probability of appearance of the chance eye may be smaller in the special game state 1 change display than in the special game state 2 change display or the special game state 2 change display. In addition, chance numbers may appear in a plurality of variations in the special game state special 1 fluctuation display than in the special game state special game state 1 fluctuation display or the special game state special game state 2 fluctuation display.

The production pattern 70a may be selected from various modes, such as a predetermined display mode consisting of identification parts such as numbers (1 to 9) and letters (A, B, etc.) and decoration parts such as characters, and a specific display mode consisting only of identification parts. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of predetermined display modes. In addition to the performance pattern 70a or instead of the performance pattern 70a, a pseudo-continuous pattern such as ``NEXT'' may be displayed, and a performance (pseudo-continuous) may be executed in which the game is varied a plurality of times regardless of one starting condition (one winning). In addition to the performance pattern 70a or in place of the performance pattern 70a, for example, by the appearance of these patterns such as a change pattern, a mode entry pattern, a development pattern, etc., a mode different from the present (for example, a performance mode) or execution of performance may be expected. Special symbols such as pseudo-continuous symbols, change symbols, mode entry symbols, and development symbols have information (expectation degree of execution of the jackpot game) different from the normal performance symbols 70a. Appearance of such a special pattern can also be one of the elements of the linked effect.

The appearance ratio of the special symbols may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, the total number of types of symbols that can be displayed (ordinary performance symbols + special symbols) may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, the execution ratio of the linkage performance performed in conjunction with the appearance of the special pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Production example 2)
A specific example 2 of effect of variable display is shown.

(Special 1 fluctuation display in normal game state)
175 and 176, the special 1 variation display in the normal game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 175, at the timing of P0, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176(a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as part of the decoration part operating and whole or part expanding and contracting operations as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 176(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176(c)).

At the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176(d)).

After that, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("259"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 176(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("259") (see FIG. 176(f)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Also, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and after performing the preparatory operation, the scrolling is started (see FIG. 176(g)).

At the timing of P7, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176(h)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 176(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 176 (j)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal game state according to the flow described above.

Although the special 1 variable display in the normal game state has been described, the basic flow is the same as the special 1 variable display in the special 2 variable display in the normal game state and the special 2 variable display in the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variable game state).

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp design, the first starting port 45, the second reservation number, the second special design, the second special design display 61, the second special design reservation display 64, The sub second variable display 82, the second sub reservation display 84, the second reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Special 1 fluctuation display of specific game state)
177 and 178, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 177, at the timing of P0, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the pending icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the pending icon T1 is not displayed (not shifted) in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(c)).

At the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(d)).

After that, at the timing of P4, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production, the production pattern 70a remains in the stopped state (see FIG. 178(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the effect pattern 70a remains in a stopped state. Also, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("259") (see FIG. 178(f)), and the first lamp symbol is permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the pending icon T1 is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(g)).

At the timing of P7, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(h)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a remain in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the effect pattern 70a remains in a stopped state, but the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 178 (j)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the specific game state along the flow described above. In the above example, the effect pattern 70a is not changed, but the effect pattern 70a may be changed.

The game machine 1 of the embodiment can execute the specific variation display in which the special pattern TZ fluctuates without displaying the holding icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, and in the specific variation display of the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is not changed. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the above-mentioned specific variation display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display, and the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are changed while displaying the pending icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine 1 of the embodiment can execute the specific variation display in which the special pattern TZ fluctuates without displaying the holding icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, and in the specific variation display of the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is not changed. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the above-mentioned specific variation display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display, and the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are changed while displaying the pending icon T2 from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the specific variation display, at least one of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ can be varied. For example, even if both the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ fluctuate, even if the production pattern 70a fluctuates and the special pattern TZ does not fluctuate, the special pattern TZ fluctuates but the production pattern 70a is not displayed.

In the embodiment, in the normal game state, it is possible to variably display the pending icon and the pending number according to the increase or decrease of the pending number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the reserved icon corresponding to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a specific manner of only the reserved number different from the predetermined manner.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the embodiment, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the pending icon and the pending number according to the increase or decrease of the pending number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the reserved icon corresponding to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a specific manner of only the reserved number different from the predetermined manner.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, information about the number of reservations is displayed by a reservation icon, a reservation number and a display device, while in the special game state 1 variation display, the reservation number and a display device are displayed. That is, the total number of types of information related to the number of holds is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, it can be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) the information on the number of holdings in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state.

Also, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the pending (relevant) icon may not be displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, in the special game state special 1 variable display, the reserved (relevant) icon may not be shift-displayed based on the increase or decrease in the number of reservations, or the reserved (relevant) icon may not be operated. That is, in the special game state special 1 variation display or the special game state special 2 variation display, it is possible to shift display of the pending icon, but in the special game state special 1 variable display, execution of the reserve icon shift display can be regulated. In addition, in the special 1 variation display of the normal game state or the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, it is possible to display the reserved icon in a predetermined mode, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, it is possible to regulate the execution of the display of the reserved icon in the predetermined mode.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Production example 3)
A specific example 3 of effect of variable display is shown.

(Special 1 fluctuation display of the number of holds "1" in the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 179, an example of special 1 variation display when the number of holdings is "1" in the normal game state will be described. It is assumed that the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 179(a)).

Next, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as part of the decoration part operating and the whole or part expanding and contracting operations as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 179(b)).

At this time, the scrolling of the performance design 70a starts in the order of the left performance design 70a, the center performance design 70a, and the right performance design 70a (see FIGS. 179(c) to (e)).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops in the order of the left production pattern 70a, the center production pattern 70a, and the right production pattern 70a (see FIGS. 179(f) to (h)). Further, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIGS. 179(f) to (h)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 179 (i)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

(Special 1 fluctuation display of the number of holds "4" in the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 180, an example of special 1 variation display when the number of holdings is "4" in the normal game state will be described. It is assumed that the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 180, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 180(a)).

Next, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as part of the decoration portion operating and the whole or part expanding and contracting operations as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 180(b)).

At this time, the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a and the right side effect pattern 70a start scrolling at the same time (see FIG. 180(c)).

The first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. - 特許庁At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 180(d)).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a and the right side effect pattern 70a are temporarily stopped at the same time (see FIG. 180(e)). Further, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 180(e)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 180(f)), and the first lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal game state with the variation pattern selected along the flow described above.

Although the special 1 variable display in the normal game state has been described, the basic flow is the same as the special 1 variable display in the special 2 variable display in the normal game state and the special 2 variable display in the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variable game state).

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp design, the first starting port 45, the second reservation number, the second special design, the second special design display 61, the second special design reservation display 64, The sub second variable display 82, the second sub reservation display 84, the second reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

In the embodiment, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 180 in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling at the same time and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a sequentially start scrolling and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in order.

As shown in FIG. 181, the average variation time of the special 1 variation display in the normal game state is different between at least the holding numbers "1" and "4". For example, the larger the holding number, the longer the average variation time. The special 1 variation display in the normal game state has the longest average variation time when the number of reservations is "1" and the shortest average variation time when the number of reservations is "4". Similarly, the average variation time of the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state is different between at least the number of holds "1" and "4". For example, the larger the number of holds, the longer the average change time. The special 2 variation display in the specific game state has the longest average variation time when the number of reservations is "1" and the shortest average variation time when the number of reservations is "4". In addition, even if the average fluctuation time is the same or different between the number of reservations "2" and the number of reservations "3", the average fluctuation time of the numbers of reservations "2" to "4" may be the same or different.

On the other hand, the average variation time of special 1 variation display in the specific game state is the same or different between at least the number of reservations "1" and "4", for example, when different, the average variation time is the longest when the number of reservations is "1" and the average variation time is the shortest when the number of reservations is "4".

Here, the difference between the average variation display time with the number of reservations "4" and the average variation display time with the number of reservations "1" in the case of executing the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is smaller than the difference between the average variation display time with the number of reservations "4" and the average variation display time with the number of reservations "1" when the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal game state. That is, even if the mean variation time differs between the holding numbers "4" and "1", the difference in the special game state special 1 variation display is smaller than the special game state special 1 variation display.

Further, the difference between the average variation display time with the number of reservations "4" and the average variation display time with the number of reservations "1" in the case of executing the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is smaller than the difference between the average variation display time with the number of reservations "4" and the average variation display time with the number of reservations "1" when the special 2 variation display is performed in the specific game state. That is, even if the mean variation time differs between the holding numbers "4" and "1", the difference in the special game state special 1 variation display is smaller than the special game state special 1 variation display.

In addition, in the embodiment, the difference in the average variation time between the holding number "4" and the holding number "1" of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state is smaller than the difference in the average fluctuation time between the holding number "4" and the holding number "1" of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. The difference in fluctuation time is smaller (Normal Special 1>Specific Special 2>Specific Special 1).

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the embodiment, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 180 in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling at the same time and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time than the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a sequentially start scrolling and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in order.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the variation pattern in FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180 when the number of reservations is "1" to "3". That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In this way, the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations when performing the special 1 variable display of the loss determination in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of the variation display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations when the special 1 variable display of the loss determination is performed in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern in FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In this way, the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations when performing the special 1 variable display of the loss determination in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of the variation display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations when the special 2 variation display of the loss determination is performed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Then, the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the number of suspensions determined by the number of suspensions of '4' to '1' in the case of executing the special 1 variation display of the failure determination in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of the variation display time determined by the number of suspensions of '4' to '1' when the special 1 variation display of the loss determination is performed in the normal game state or when the special 2 variation display of the loss determination is performed in the specific game state. In this way, when comparing the total number of patterns of variable display time that can be determined by the number of reservations from ``4'' to ``1'' instead of comparing each number of reservations as described above, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss judgment in the specific game state is smaller than the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss judgment in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display of the gap judgment in the specific game state. Even in this way, the above-described effects can be obtained.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the variation pattern in FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180 when the number of reservations is "1" to "3". That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In other words, the execution rate of the same variation pattern for the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1" is higher in the case of performing the special 1 variation display of the loss determination in the specific game state than in the case of performing the special 1 variation display of the loss determination in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern in FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In other words, the execution rate of the same variation pattern for the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1" is higher in the case of performing the special 1 variation display of the loss determination in the specific game state than in the case of performing the special 2 variation display of the loss determination in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of the same stop mode or start mode variation pattern is higher in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, regardless of the number of reservations (even with the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1"). And, it can be said that the total number of variation patterns with different stop modes (start modes) is smaller in the special game state 1 variation display than in the special game state 2 variation display or the special game state 2 variation display.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the effect design 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory actions such as movement of a part of the decorative portion and expansion/contraction of the whole or a part thereof. Execution of a jackpot game is expected depending on the presence or absence of such a preparatory action and the type of the preparatory action.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparatory motion is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (execution rate h3 < execution rate h1). That is, the preparatory action is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparatory motion is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state (execution rate h3<execution rate h4). That is, the preparatory action is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such execution ratio of the preparatory motion, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of preparatory motions is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (the number of types of variation pattern H3<the number of types of variation pattern H1). That is, the same pattern of preparatory motions in the special 1 variation display is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of preparatory motions is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state (the number of types of variation pattern H3<the number of types of variation pattern H4). That is, the same pattern of preparatory motions in the special 1 variation display is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

With such a number of types of preparatory motions, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, when the game is temporarily stopped, the production pattern 70a is slightly shaken (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the production pattern 70a are swayed (produced).

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop action is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (execution rate i3<execution rate i1). That is, the stop action is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left to hit the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop action is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state (execution rate i3<execution rate i4). That is, the preparatory action is less likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state.

With such an execution ratio of the stop motion, the player can be made to notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of stop motions is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (the number of types of variation pattern I3<the number of types of variation pattern I1). In other words, the same pattern of stop motions in the special 1 variation display is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of stop motions is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state (the number of types of variation pattern I3<the number of types of variation pattern I4). That is, in the case of left-handed hitting in the specific game state, the stop action is more likely to be executed in the same pattern in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

With such a number of types of stop motions, the player can be made to notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Only one of the preparatory operation and the stopping operation may be performed instead of performing both.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the loss determination, there is a variable stop pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are sequentially stopped (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 179, and a variable stop pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped together as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 184, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped together is smaller in the special 1 variation display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state than the special 1 variable display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state. That is, the mode in which three performance symbols 70a are stopped together in the special 1 variation display of the holding number "4" is more difficult to execute in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184, the special 1 variation display which becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state has a higher execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order than the special 1 variation display which becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state. That is, the mode in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order in the special 1 variation display of the holding number "4" is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the loss determination, there is a variable stop pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped (temporarily stopped) in order as shown in FIG. 179, and a variable stop pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped together as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 184, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three performance patterns 70a are stopped together is smaller in the special 1 variation display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state than the special 2 variable display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state. That is, it is more difficult to execute a mode in which three performance symbols 70a are aligned and stopped in the special 1 variation display of the holding number "4" when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 184, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped in order is higher in the special 1 variation display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state than the special 2 variable display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state. That is, the mode in which the three performance symbols 70a are sequentially stopped in the special 1 variation display of the holding number "4" is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting right in the specific game state.

As shown in FIG. 184, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped together is the same in the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the reservation number is "1" in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the reservation number is "1" in the specific game state, and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the reservation number is "1" in the specific game state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 184, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production symbols 70a are stopped in order is the same between the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state.

In the embodiment, there is a variation start pattern for sequentially scrolling three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179 and a variation start pattern for simultaneously scrolling three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 185, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and the scrolling starts is smaller in the special 1 variation display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state than the special 1 variable display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the normal game state. That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, it is more difficult to execute the mode in which three performance symbols 70a are aligned and start scrolling in the special 1 variable display with the number of reservations "4" than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a sequentially start scrolling is larger in the special 1 variation display which becomes the loss judgment executed when the reservation number is "4" in the specific game state than the special 1 fluctuation display which becomes the loss judgment executed when the reservation number is "4" in the normal game state. That is, the mode in which the three performance symbols 70a sequentially start scrolling in the special 1 variable display of the holding number "4" is more likely to be executed in the case of left hitting in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game region 5a in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the failure determination, there is a variation start pattern in which scrolling of three performance symbols 70a is started in order as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 185, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and scrolling is started is smaller in the special 1 variation display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state than the special 2 variable display which is executed when the reserved number is "4" in the specific game state. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state, it is more difficult to execute a mode in which three performance symbols 70a are aligned in the special 1 variable display with the number of reservations "4" and scrolling is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 185, the special 1 variation display which becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state has a higher execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a sequentially start scrolling than the special 2 variation display which becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state, the manner in which three performance patterns 70a sequentially start scrolling in the special 1 variable display with the number of reservations '4' is more likely to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 185, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and scrolling is started is the same between the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 185, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production symbols 70a start scrolling in order is the same between the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the reservation number is "1" in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the reservation number is "1" in the specific game state, and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the reservation number is "1" in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the displayed performance pattern 70a is not scrolled, the decoration part such as the character is partly disappeared from the performance pattern 70a, or the performance pattern 70a is not displayed. That is, it can be said that the ratio of the performance symbol 70a displayed in the special mode different from the mode displayed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state is higher in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

A special symbol such as the above-described pseudo consecutive symbol may be displayed superimposed on the effect symbol 70a or instead of the effect symbol 70a. In this case, by displaying the special pattern, all or part of the normal scrolling of the production pattern 70a and the operation (preparation operation and stop operation) of the decoration part such as the character of the production pattern become invisible. Then, the special 1 variation display in the specified game state has a smaller ratio or hidden range of the normal pattern by the display of the special pattern than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Production example 4)
Effect specific example 4 of variable display will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 185(a), it is assumed that the ready-to-win performance is executed to variably display the performance pattern 70a in the center variable display region while stopping (temporarily stopping) the performance pattern 70a of "8" in the left and right variable display regions of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186(b), an effect display is performed in which the temporarily stopped left and right effect symbols 70a change to a display mode different from the previous display mode (FIG. 186(b), which suggests that the expectation for the jackpot game is high. Then, a symbol size change effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen, and a predetermined effect such as inserting a moving image is performed on the first image display device 70. Note that the effect symbol that is displayed in a reduced size is displayed. 70a is changed from a normal display mode composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a decoration part consisting of a bar-shaped image SG as a part of the character and a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character, and an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character) to a simple reduced display form of only the identification part.

As shown in FIGS. 185(d) and (f), the pseudo performance symbols (pseudo symbols) GZ are displayed so as to increase in three vertical rows, thereby increasing the expectation for the big winning game. After that, when the execution period of the ready-to-win production that becomes a big hit ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG.

In the embodiment, the variable display can be performed by the normal mode performance pattern 70a and the specific mode performance pattern 70a displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display (for example, when the ready-to-win performance enters or is in the middle of the ready-to-win performance, when the fluctuation starts, is in the middle of the fluctuation, or when the fluctuation stops). The performance pattern 70a of the specific mode may be not only a changed performance pattern 70a (change pattern) or a pseudo pattern GZ as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 186, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a smaller ratio of displaying the specific mode effect symbols 70a than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (m32<m12). That is, it is more difficult to display the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 186, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a smaller ratio of displaying the specific mode effect symbols 70a than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (m32<m42). In other words, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a higher ratio of displaying the production pattern 70a in the normal mode than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. That is, it is more difficult to display the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 185, it is possible to execute a display size change effect for changing the display size of the effect pattern 70a in the variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 187, the execution ratio of the display size change effect for changing the display size of the effect symbol 70a is smaller in the special 1 variation display that is performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display that is determined as a loss in the normal game state (n3<n1). That is, the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 187, the execution ratio of the display size change effect for changing the display size of the effect symbol 70a is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display that is the loss judgment in the specific game state (n3<n4). That is, the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a is more difficult to execute when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The display size change effect is not limited to being executed along with the ready-to-win effect, and can be executed at a predetermined timing such as at the start of variation or during variation. The display size change effect may be executed in association with a predetermined condition such as a win suggestion effect such as an actuation effect of a movable member, a pending number, or an operation of an operation button.

The execution ratio of the pattern change performance may be smaller for the special 1 variation display for losing judgment executed when the reserved number is ``4'' in the specific game state than the special 1 fluctuation display for losing judgment executed when the reserved number is ``4'' in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display for losing judgment executed when the reserved number is ``4'' in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the pattern change performance may be smaller for the special 1 variation display for losing judgment executed when the reserved number is '1' in the specific game state than the special 1 variation display for losing judgment executed when the reserved number is '1' in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display for losing judgment executed when the reserved number is '1' in the specific game state.

The execution ratio of the pattern change performance may be the same between the special 1 variation display as a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is ``4'' in the specific game state and the special 1 variation display as a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is ``1'' in the specific game state. In addition, the special 1 variation display which becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state may be smaller or larger than the special 1 variation display which becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state.

The performance (design change performance) for expecting the execution of a big winning game by changing the design is not limited to the display size change performance, and may be other modes such as changing the position where the performance design 70a is displayed or changing the display order of the performance design 70a. Further, when the pattern change performance has a plurality of patterns different in display size, display position, display order, etc., the total number of patterns of pattern change performance may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 186, the variable display is ready-to-win effects (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, ready-to-reach development fanning effects, etc.). Then, as shown in FIG. 188, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display which is executed in the specific game state as the loss judgment than in the special 1 fluctuation display as the loss judgment in the normal game state (o3<o1). That is, the ready-to-win effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 188, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display that is executed in the specific game state as the loss determination than in the special 2 variation display that is the loss determination in the specific game state (o3<o4). That is, the ready-to-win effect is less likely to be executed when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Prior to the ready-to-win performance, the ready-to-win performance is performed after the advance notification performance is repeated a plurality of times so that the second performance such as the roulette performance and the development performance is performed after the first performance such as the mode entry performance and the development performance is performed, thereby increasing the expectation for the big win. Here, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have a smaller execution ratio of the advance notification effect executed before the ready-to-win effect than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In other words, the ready-to-win effect executed from the pre-notification effect is smaller in the special game state special 1 fluctuation display than in the special game state special 1 fluctuation display or the special game state special 2 fluctuation display. Further, the number of pre-notification effects executed before the ready-to-win effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In other words, the ratio of execution of the ready-to-win effect after the pre-notification effect is performed is smaller in the special game state special 1 change display than in the special game state special game state 1 change display or the special game state special game state 2 change display.

The special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state has a lower expectation of shifting to the jackpot game after the ready-to-win performance is executed than the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, and the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state has a lower expectation to shift to the jackpot game after the ready-to-win performance is executed (special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state>special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state>special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state).

When the ready-to-win performance is selected from a plurality of patterns and executed, the total number of ready-to-win performances may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

It is possible to select from a plurality of patterns and execute related effects such as the operation effect of the movable member and the vibration effect of the operation button performed in association with the ready-to-win effect at an appropriate timing such as during or before execution of the ready-to-win effect. In this case, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the related effect performed in relation to the ready-to-win effect than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. Further, the number of types of related effects performed in relation to the ready-to-win effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

The rate of development from normal reach to SP reach or SP reach is smaller in the special game state 1 change display than in the special game state 1 change display or the special game state 2 change display. The execution period of the ready-to-win effect is shorter in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect over a plurality of variations is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Production example 5)
Effect specific example 5 of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. In addition, in the production example 5, the specific game state is set, and the first specific notification SR1 is performed in the upper right area of the first image display device 70 to guide the player to hit to the right.

As shown in FIG. 189, at the timing of P0, the second holding number U2 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47. At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "3" to "4". In addition, the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "0".

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the second sub-holding indicator 84 is changed from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T2 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the second pending icon display area 70D (see FIG. 190(a)). Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is "0". Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub display 83 is "0", and the pending icon T1 is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the second pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the second pending number U2 memorized (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the second sub-holding indicator 84 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the suspended icon T2 displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the second sub-variation display 81 is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decoration part operating and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 190(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190(c)).

In addition to the first specific notification SR1, based on the winning of the first winning hole 45, a display such as "Right shot" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which a voice output such as "Please hit right."

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 190(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 61 in a losing mode. Further, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 190(e)), and the second lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

Next, at the timing of P5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the second reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "2", and a process for starting the variable production is performed. Although the main control unit 110m also has a first pending memory based on the winning to the first winning port 45, the second pending memory based on the winning to the second start port 47 is given priority, and the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the second sub-holding indicator 84 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the suspended icon T2 displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the second sub-variation display 81 is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decoration part operating and whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 190(f)).

At the timing of P6, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190(g)).

In addition to the first specific notification SR1, based on the winning of the first winning hole 45, a display such as "Right shot" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which a voice output such as "Please hit right."

After that, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode ("913"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 190(h)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 61 in a losing mode. Further, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("913") (see FIG. 190 (j)), and the second lamp pattern is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

In this way, it is possible to execute the first specific notification suggesting the specific game state and the second specific notification performed in addition to the first specific notification based on the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole 45 while the first specific notification is being executed. By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second specific notification SR2 is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in the specific game state, unlike the right-handed notification notified at the start of the jackpot game.

When executing only the first specific notification SR1, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (hit hint effect) such as a notification sound effect, a light emitting effect such as a start port, a holding icon change effect, etc., but when executing the second specific information SR1, it is possible to regulate the execution of a predetermined effect (hit hint effect) such as an information sound effect, a light emitting effect such as a start port, and a hold icon effect. It can also be said that R is executable.

Further, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (hit hint effect) is smaller when both the first specific notification SR1 and the second specific notification SR2 are executed than when only the first specific notification SR1 is executed.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Production example 6)
As a notification performance (advance notification performance) for expecting the execution of a jackpot game, there are a first notification executed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation) and a second notification executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (at the time of start-up winning). For example, in the embodiment, when the effect pattern 70a (special pattern) starts to fluctuate, the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) blinks in blue, for example, in a first lighting mode (see FIG. 191 (a)), and the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) is different from the first lighting mode, for example, in a second lighting mode in which it blinks in red (see FIG. 191 (b)). In addition, when the game ball enters the starting ports 45 and 47, it is different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, for example, the third light emission mode (see FIGS. 191 (d) and (e)) that emits light by combining the winning opening lamp NR, the board lighting device 76 such as the decorative frame 41, and the frame lighting device 10. It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second notification. Note that the first light emission mode and/or the second light emission mode may be executed even in the second notification. Further, as a notification effect, there is provided a fourth light emission mode (see FIGS. 192(c) and (f)) which is different from the first to third light emission modes and which does not involve light emission from the prize winning entrance lamp NR, for example.

As shown in FIG. 192, the execution ratio of the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode and the third light emission mode in the notification effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (p31<p11). In addition, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth light emission mode is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification effect are less likely to be executed when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emitting mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As the notification effect, the first notification can be executed in the first lighting mode, the second lighting mode, and the third lighting mode, and the second lighting can be performed in the first lighting mode and the second lighting mode. However, the third lighting mode may be disabled in the second notification. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 192, the execution ratio of the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (p31<p11). In addition, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth light emission mode is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification effect are less likely to be executed when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emitting mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

Even in this way, the player can be made to notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 191, the operation button 17 produces a vibration effect in conjunction with the notification effect described above. The vibration effect is to make the operation button 17 vibrate so that a big winning game can be expected, and may be executed in combination with the button light emission effect of causing the operation button 17 to emit light. In the notification effect, the first notification effect can be executed in a first light emission mode (see FIG. 191(a)) in which the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) blinks in blue, for example, and a second lighting mode (see FIG. 191(b)) in which the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) blinks in red, for example, different from the first lighting mode. In addition, different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, for example, the third light emission mode (see FIGS. 191 (d) and (e)) that emits light by combining the winning opening lamp NR and other light emitting means such as the board lighting device 76 such as the decorative frame 41 and the frame lighting device 10. It is possible to execute the second notification by the second notification.

As shown in FIG. 193, in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the normal game state, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 is larger in the second notification than in the first notification (q12>q11). That is, in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the vibration performance is more likely to be executed in combination with the second notification than in combination with the first notification. In addition, the execution ratio of the vibration presentation by the operation button 17 is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (r3<r1). That is, the vibrating effect is less likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

The vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of vibration patterns, such as a pattern that is executed over a certain period of time, a pattern that is executed intermittently at predetermined intervals, and the like. Also, the vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of effect patterns such as a weak effect pattern such as vibrating without emitting light, and a strong effect pattern such as vibrating while emitting light. Then, the total pattern of vibration performance may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Also, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the vibration performance of the weak performance pattern and the strong performance pattern can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the execution of the vibration performance of the weak performance pattern can be regulated and the vibration performance of the strong performance pattern can be executed.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The light emitting effect is not limited to the starter lamp NR, and other parts such as a game board or a frame may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 191, in accordance with the timing of the start of fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a, it is possible to execute the light emission performance by the winning entrance lamp NR, the operation performance of the first movable member 73, and the vibration performance of the operation button 17. Here, the light emitting effect can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns such as a mode in which only the winning hole lamp NR emits light, a mode in which the winning hole lamp NR and other specific positions such as the first movable member 73, the operation button 17, the game board (lighting device for the board), the frame, etc. are combined to emit light. In addition, the light emission effect can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns of emission colors such as blue, red, and rainbow colors. Also, the actuation effect of the first movable member 73 can be selected from a plurality of patterns such as weak actuation and strong actuation. Furthermore, the vibration presentation of the operation button 17 can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns with different periods, intensities, and intervals. As shown in FIG. 191, in this embodiment, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the lighting effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the motion effect of the movable accessories (movable member 73 and operation button 17) can be executed at the timing of the start of variation. Similarly, in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the light emitting effect of the winning hole lamp NR and the motion effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may be executed at the timing of starting the change. On the other hand, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the light emission effect of the winning hole lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the timing of the start of the change. In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the light emitting effect of the winning hole lamp NR and the action effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may not be executed at the same time but may be executed at different times.

In this way, the total number of types of winning hint effects to be executed at the same time is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. It should be noted that the timing for executing the effect may be during a fluctuation, a fluctuation stop, or the like, such as when winning a prize.

In this way, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modified examples of production examples 1 to 6)
Although the performance pattern 70a is displayed in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state, the performance pattern 70a may not be displayed in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state, or may not be scrolled even if it is displayed. In addition, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state, but in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state, the performance pattern 70a may not be displayed or may not be scrolled even if it is displayed. In this way, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware of the disadvantage of winning the game ball into the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, even if the pending icon is not displayed, a related display such as a pedestal decorating the pending icon may be displayed.

The effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be shared or separated. Also, the performance symbol 70a used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the performance symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may be shared or separated.

The special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be separate without being shared. Further, the special symbol TZ used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may be separate without sharing. The display position of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Also, the display position and/or display mode of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 2 variation display in the specific game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state.

The reserved number used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the reserved number used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be shared without being separated. Also, the reserved number used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the reserved number used in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state may be shared without being separated.

Advance notice effects with different execution times can be combined and executed. At the time of start of variation, the degree of expectation for the big winning game can be suggested by the action at the time of starting the variation of the performance pattern itself or the character of the performance pattern, the order of starting the variation of the performance pattern, or the like. Further, at the end (stop) of variation, the degree of expectation for the big winning game can be suggested by the action at the start of variation of the performance pattern itself or the character of the performance pattern, the order of starting variation of the performance pattern, or the like. Furthermore, in the first half of the execution period of the advance notice effect in one or more variable displays, in the first half (first period) of the variable display, a conversation notice on display means such as a liquid crystal, a cut-in notice, a development destination roulette effect, a long-press effect or repeated hit effect of the operation button 17, a change in the hold icon or the icon, a display effect of the light guide plate, an operation effect of the movable members 73 and 74 (suggestion/development/decision effect), a vibration effect of the operation button (suggestion/development/decision effect), a timer effect, and the start ports 45 and 47. It is possible to execute the lamp lighting effects and the like singly or in combination. Furthermore, in the second half of the execution period of the advance notice effect with one or more variable displays, development effect and decision effect by display means such as liquid crystal, display effect of the light guide plate (light emission according to the result of the decision effect, etc.), vibration effect of the operation button 17 (suggestion, development, decision effect), operation effect of the frame role and board role (movable members 73, 74), jackpot type suggestion effect (XX bonus, etc.), timer effect, holding change, etc. It can be executed singly or in combination.

In this case, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Further, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Further, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

When there are a first performance performed in the first half of the execution period and a second performance performed in the second half of the execution period as advance notice performances, the first performance and the second performance can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, but while the first performance can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, the execution of the second performance may be regulated. Also, the first performance and the second performance can be executed in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, but the first performance can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, and the execution of the second performance may be restricted.

Even in this way, the player can be made to notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of various effects that expect the execution of the jackpot game, which is performed in the special 1 variation display in the above-described specific game state (time reduction game state or variable probability game state), may be "0".

Various performances (generally referred to as winning suggestion performances) expecting execution of the above-mentioned jackpot game may be set with only one performance (display) pattern, but may be executed by selecting from a plurality of performance (display) patterns. The hit hint performance is not limited to different execution ratios depending on the relationship between the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, and the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

For example, when the win suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution ratio of the specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be smaller than that of the predetermined pattern. On the other hand, when the hit hint performance is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the first pattern same as or corresponding to the predetermined pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state and the second pattern the same as or corresponding to the specific pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have the same execution ratio or may differ in execution ratio from the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Such a difference in pattern execution ratio also makes it possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the ball is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

For example, when the expectation degree display by the color effect is selected from ``blue'', ``red'' and ``rainbow'', the execution ratio of the ``red'' color effect selectable in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than the ``red'' color effect selectable in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In this case, the execution ratio of the "blue" and "rainbow" color effects may be the same or different. It should be noted that this is not limited to the degree of expectation display, and can be similarly applied to various effects that make players expect execution of the above-described big win game. That is, when the hit hint effect is selected from a plurality of patterns, the execution ratio of the specific pattern same as or corresponding to the predetermined pattern selectable in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than the predetermined pattern selectable in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first prize winning port 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Here, the patterns selected for the winning hint performance or the winning hint performance may be linked to predetermined conditions such as timing (for example, when the variation starts, when the variation stops, how many times in a row), the game state, and other patterns (for example, the variation pattern, the variation time, etc.), and their execution ratios may differ. For example, when a variation pattern in which three performance symbols 70a stop in order is selected, the execution ratio of the ``red'' color effect executed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than the ``red'' color effect performed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Similarly, when a variation pattern with a short variation time of the performance pattern 70a is selected, the execution ratio of the ``red'' color luminescence effect executed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than the ``red'' color luminescence performance performed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. It should be noted that it is not limited to the degree of expectation display and the light emission effect of the starting opening, and can be similarly applied to various effects that make the player expect execution of the above-described jackpot game. That is, when the winning hint performance is executed under a predetermined condition, the execution ratio of the winning hint performance (predetermined pattern of winning hint performance) performed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than that performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first prize winning port 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution period of the winning hint performance (predetermined pattern of winning hint performance) performed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be shorter than the execution period of the winning hint performance (predetermined pattern of the winning hint performance) performed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state.

When it is possible to execute a joint performance in which a plurality of kinds of hit hint performances are performed at the same time, the execution ratio of the joint performance may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. When there is a joint performance, which is a combination of a plurality of kinds of winning hint performances performed at the same time, the execution ratio of the predetermined winning hint performance in the joint performance may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. When there is a joint performance which is a combination of a plurality of kinds of winning hint performances performed at the same time, in special 1 variable display in the normal game state or special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the predetermined winning hint performance and the specific winning hint performance can be executed, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the execution of the predetermined winning hint performance in the joint performance may be regulated, while the specific winning hint performance may be executable.

As fixed performances (including rich big win performances), there are a first performance in which the movable members 73 and 74 are operated and the operation button 17 is vibrated at a predetermined timing, and a display in a predetermined mode such as rainbow display or rainbow light emission is performed, and a second performance is performed at a timing different from the first performance (for example, at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation, at the time of stop of fluctuation, etc.). The second performance can be executed singly or in combination and has a plurality of patterns, such as a definite notification sound output at the start of variation, a pending change in a rainbow mode, or a definite variable definite performance that expects execution of definite variable according to a performance such as victory in a battle.

As for the fixed performance, the execution ratio of the first performance and/or the first performance of the fixed performance differs between the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. In this case, the execution ratio of the first effect of the fixed effect may be smaller in the special game state 1 fluctuation display than in the special game state 2 fluctuation display or the special game state 2 fluctuation display. Further, the execution ratio of the second effect of the fixed effect may be smaller in the special game state 1 variable display than in the special game state 2 variable display or the special game state 2 variable display. Furthermore, the execution ratio of one of the first and second fixed effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. At this time, the execution ratio of the other of the first effect and the second effect of the fixed effect may be the same or different.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the first performance and the second performance of the fixed performance can be executed, but in the special 1 variation performance in the specific game state, it is preferable to regulate the execution of at least the predetermined pattern of the second performance. For example, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the first performance accompanied by the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is executed as the fixed performance, while the pattern of the second performance accompanied by the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is not executed.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first prize winning port 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The win hint performance in the variable display of the loss determination has been explained, but also in the variable display of the win determination, the relationship between the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be the same as in the case of the loss determination.

As explained above, it is conceivable that a player who has a sense of incongruity in the execution degree and type of the performance expected in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state (hit hint performance) suspects an error in the gaming machine 1 itself. In this case, it is assumed that the hall manager will check the control part that governs the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the structure of the effect in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state described above, the structure of the board case described later makes it easy for the hall manager to confirm, reduces the stress of the player, and improves the interest of the game.

◇ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the An expectation level display (e.g., color effect) for expecting execution of the special game can be executed based on the determination, and the execution ratio of the expectation level display (e.g., color effect) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the determination A special effect (for example, zone effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected over a predetermined period based on is executable at the timing of either a predetermined variable display period based on one determination or a predetermined variable display period based on a plurality of the determinations, and the execution ratio of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the determination A notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when the holding icon changes) that makes the execution of the special game expected based on can be executed, and the execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the holding icon changes) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

◆ According to the game machine (1) of the present invention, in order to solve the above issues, a judgment is made based on the establishment of the starting conditions (winning to 45,47 awards), and when the fluctuation display of the pattern to be executed based on the judgment (direct pattern 70A) is prescribed, a special gaming that is advantageous for players (large gaming technique) is advantageous for players. In the game machine (1), which is executed, there is a normal game status and a specific gaming status (time -saving gaming state, probable gaming status) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first starting conditions for the first prize method (1st prize -winning mouth 45), or the play to the second prize in the second prize (2nd prize -winning method 47). Based on the second starting conditions established by the winning of the papers, the fluctuation display of the above pattern (directing pattern 70A) can be executed in the display method (1st image display device 70), and in multiple times the fluctuation display is continuously or relevant (eg, the news of the color effect, the flashing production, the retention production. It is possible to execute icon change production, operating production of movable members, etc.), etc.) From the vibration display based on the first starting conditions in the normal gaming state, the display display based on the first starting conditions in the specified gaming status (for example, the color effect, the flashy production, the flashy production production). It is characterized by a small executive ratio of directing, operation production of movable members, etc.).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the starting It is possible to execute a suspended icon change effect in which the display mode of the suspended icons (T1, T2, TH) displayed when a condition is established changes from a normal mode (for example, a CD icon) to a specific mode (for example, a color character icon), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the suspended icon change effect than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the second A lighting effect (e.g., light emission of a winning hole lamp NR) based on winning to one winning means (first winning hole 45) can be executed, and an execution ratio of the light emitting effect (e.g., light emission of a winning hole lamp NR) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and has the first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) different from the first display means. Based on a second starting condition established by a prize, the first display means (the first image display device 70) can perform the variable display of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a), the second display means (the second image display device 71, the light guide plate, etc.) can perform the display effect in a display mode including a first mode (for example, a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (for example, a rainbow color effect, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state can perform the specific display. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the gaming state is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display performance by the first mode (for example, blue effect) on the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is small.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the first It is possible to execute the operation effect of the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in an operation mode including an operation mode (e.g., weak operation) and a second operation mode (e.g., strong action such as a decision), and the first operation mode (e.g., weak operation) of the operation effect by the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is better for the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. is characterized by a small execution ratio of

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the determination An expectation level display (e.g., color effect) for expecting execution of the special game can be executed based on, and the execution ratio of the expectation level display (e.g., color effect) is smaller in the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than in the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the determination A special effect (for example, zone effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected over a predetermined period based on is executable at the timing of either a predetermined variable display period based on one of the determinations or a predetermined variable display period based on a plurality of the determinations, and the execution ratio of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the determination A notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when the holding icon changes) that makes the execution of the special game expected based on can be executed, and the execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the holding icon changes) is smaller in the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than in the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

◆ According to the game machine (1) of the present invention, in order to solve the above issues, a judgment is made based on the establishment of the starting conditions (winning to 45,47 awards), and when the fluctuation display of the pattern to be executed based on the judgment (direct pattern 70A) is prescribed, a special gaming that is advantageous for players (large gaming technique) is advantageous for players. In the game machine (1), which is executed, there is a normal game status and a specific gaming status (time -saving gaming state, probable gaming status) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first starting conditions for the first prize method (1st prize -winning mouth 45), or the play to the second prize in the second prize (2nd prize -winning method 47). Based on the second starting conditions established by the winning of the papers, the fluctuation display of the above pattern (directing pattern 70A) can be executed in the display method (1st image display device 70), and in multiple times the fluctuation display is continuously or relevant (eg, the news of the color effect, the flashing production, the retention production. It is possible to execute icon change production, operation production of movable members, etc.), etc., based on the fluctuation display based on the second starting conditions in the above -mentioned specific gaming status, the vibration display based on the first starting condition in the specified gaming status is the co -production production (for example, the color effect, the news, the flashing icon production, the flashy production. It is characterized by a small executive ratio of directing, operation production of movable members, etc.).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the starting It is possible to execute a suspended icon change effect in which the display mode of the suspended icons (T1, T2, TH) displayed when a condition is satisfied changes from a normal mode (e.g., a CD icon) to a specific mode (e.g., a color character icon), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a lower execution ratio of the suspended icon change effect than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the second A light emission effect (e.g., light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on winning to one winning means (first winning hole 45) can be executed, and the execution ratio of the light emission effect (e.g., light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and has the first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) different from the first display means. Based on a second starting condition established by a prize, the first display means (the first image display device 70) can execute the variable display of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a), the second display means (the second image display device 71, the light guide plate, etc.) can execute the display effect in a display mode including a first mode (for example, a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (for example, a rainbow color effect, etc.), and the specific game state can be changed from the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the gaming state is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display performance by the first mode (for example, blue effect) on the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is small.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the first It is possible to execute the operation effect of the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in an operation mode including an operation mode (e.g., weak actuation) and a second actuation mode (e.g., strong actuation such as a decision), and the first actuation mode (e.g., weak actuation) of the actuation effect by the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is better for the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific game state. is characterized by a small execution ratio of

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified When the first starting condition is satisfied in the game state, a specific variable display (for example, at least one of the effect symbol 70a or the special effect symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner without displaying or operating the holding icon from the start to the end of the variable display) can be executed, and when the first starting condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the specific variable display is not performed.
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when a variable display of symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the When executing the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, color effect, zone effect, hold icon change, notification sound, light emission, operation of movable members, etc.) that cannot be executed in the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified When the first starting condition is satisfied in the game state, a specific variable display (for example, at least one of the effect symbol 70a or the special effect symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner without displaying or operating the pending icon from the start to the end of the variable display) can be executed, and when the second starting condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the specific variable display is not performed.
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when a variable display of symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the When executing the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, color effect, zone effect, hold icon change, notification sound, light emission, operation of movable member, etc.) that cannot be performed in the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the normal In the game state, it is possible to display a holding display according to the increase or decrease in the number of holdings based on the first starting condition in a predetermined mode (for example, an operation such as rotation), and in the specific game state, the holding display according to the increase or decrease in the number of holdings based on the first starting condition.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified In the game state, it is possible to display a holding display according to the increase or decrease in the number of holdings based on the second starting condition in a predetermined mode (for example, an operation such as rotation), and in the specific game state, the holding display according to the increase or decrease in the holding number based on the first starting condition.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the normal The difference between the average variation display time at the maximum number of reservations (for example, 4) and the average variation display time at a predetermined number of reservations less than the maximum number of reservations (for example, 1) when performing the variable display of the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the gaming state, the average variation display time at the maximum number of reservations (for example, 4) and the predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) less than the maximum number of reservations when performing the variation display of the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the difference from the average fluctuation display time is smaller.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the normal The number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations when executing the variable display of the loss determination by the first starting condition in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations when the variable display of the loss determination by the first starting condition is executed in the game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the normal It is characterized in that the ratio of execution of the same variation pattern between the first retention number (for example, 4) and the second retention number (for example, 1) is higher in the case where the variation display for the loss determination based on the first start condition is performed in the specific game state than when the variation display for the loss determination based on the first start condition is performed in the game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified From the difference between the average variation display time at the maximum holding number (for example, 4) and the average variation display time at a predetermined holding number (for example, 1) less than the maximum holding number when executing the variable display of the loss determination under the second starting condition in the gaming state, the average variation display time at the maximum holding number (for example, holding 4) and the predetermined holding number (for example, 1) less than the maximum holding number when executing the variable display for the loss determination under the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the difference from the average fluctuation display time is smaller.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified The number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations when performing the variable display of the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is smaller than the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations when the variable display of the loss determination based on the second starting condition is performed in the game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified It is characterized in that the ratio of execution of the same variation pattern between the first reservation number (for example, 4) and the second reservation number (for example, 1) is higher in the case of executing the variation display of the loss determination under the first start condition in the specific game state than in the case of executing the variation display of the loss determination under the second start condition in the game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable At the start and/or end of the display, an action effect (for example, a preparation action or a stop action) of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a) can be executed, and the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific game state is characterized in that the execution ratio of the action effect (for example, the preparation action or the stop action) of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display is smaller than the variation display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable At the start and/or end of the display, an action effect (for example, a preparation action or a stop action) of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a) can be executed, and the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific game state has fewer types of action effects (for example, preparation action or stop action) of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variation display based on the first start condition in the normal game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable. The display can be performed with the symbols of the first mode (for example, 1 to 9) and the symbols of the second mode (for example, special symbols having no numerical information) displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display, and the rate of displaying the symbols of the second mode (for example, special symbols having no numerical information) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. .

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable At the start and/or end of the display, an action effect (for example, preparation action or stop action) of the pattern (production pattern 70a) can be executed, and the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific game state is characterized by a smaller execution ratio of the action effect (for example, preparation action or stop action) of the pattern (production pattern 70a) at the start and/or end of the variable display than the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable At the start and/or end of the display, an action effect (for example, preparation action or stop action) of the pattern (production pattern 70a) can be executed, and the number of types of action effects (for example, preparation action or stop action) of the pattern (production pattern 70a) performed at the start and/or end of the variable display is smaller in the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific game state than in the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable In the display, the symbols can be displayed in a first pattern of a predetermined mode (for example, 1 to 9) and a second pattern of a specific mode (for example, a special pattern that does not have numerical information), and the variation display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state is characterized in that the ratio of the first pattern to be displayed is larger in the variable presentation based on the first starting condition in the specific game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable. There are a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode (for example, a long time until stop) in which the pattern (effect pattern 70a) is stopped and displayed in the display (for example, the time until stop is short), and the variable display that is the loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum hold number is in the specific game state is better than the change display that is the loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum hold number is in the normal game state. , the execution ratio of the first stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short) is small.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable The stop display mode for stop-displaying the design (effect pattern 70a) in the display includes a first stop display mode (for example, simultaneous stop) in which the design (effect design 70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode (for example, stop in sequence) in which the design (effect design 70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode. Therefore, the variable display that becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the number of holds is maximum in the specific game state has a higher execution ratio of the second stop display mode (for example, stop in order).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the normal The variable display that results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the pattern change performance for changing the display size of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) than the variable display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition in the game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the normal The execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance is smaller in the variable display that results in the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display that results in the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable There are a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode (for example, a long time until stop) in which the symbols (effect symbols 70a) are stopped and displayed in the display (for example, the time until stop is short). , the execution ratio of the first stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short) is small.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the variable The stop display mode for stopping and displaying the design (effect design 70a) in the display includes a first stop display mode (for example, simultaneous stop) in which the design (effect design 70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode (for example, stop in sequence) in which the design (effect design 70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and the fluctuation display that becomes a loss determination based on the second start condition when the maximum number of reservations is reached in the specific game state. Therefore, the variable display that becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the number of holds is maximum in the specific game state has a higher execution ratio of the second stop display mode (for example, stop in order).

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified The variable display for losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the pattern change performance for changing the display size of the pattern (performance pattern 70a) than the variable display for losing determination based on the second starting condition in the game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified The execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance is smaller in the variable display that results in the loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display that results in the loss determination based on the second starting condition in the game state.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to a first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to a second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the specified A first specific notification (e.g., right-handed display) that suggests a gaming state, and a second specific notification (a display or notification different from the right-handed display) that is performed in addition to the first specific notification (right-handed display) based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning means when the first specific notification (right-handed display) is executed.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), the variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the normal A light emitting effect at a predetermined position (for example, the start lamp NR) and an operation effect of the movable accessory (for example, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) based on the first starting condition in the game state can be executed at a predetermined timing (such as a winning timing and a variation start timing), and a light emitting effect at the predetermined position (for example, the starting lamp NR) and an operation effect of the movable accessory (for example, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) based on the first starting condition in the specific game state. can be regulated to be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.).

◆ According to the game machine (1) of the present invention, in order to solve the above issues, a judgment is made based on the establishment of the starting conditions (winning to 45,47 awards), and when the fluctuation display of the pattern to be executed based on the judgment (direct pattern 70A) is prescribed, a special gaming that is advantageous for players (large gaming technique) is advantageous for players. In the game machine (1), which is executed, there is a normal game status and a specific gaming status (time -saving gaming state, probable gaming status) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and based on the first starting conditions for the first prize method (1st prize -winning mouth 45), or the play to the second prize in the second prize (2nd prize -winning method 47). Based on the second starting conditions established by the winning of the papers, the fluctuation display of the pattern (directing pattern 70a) can be executed in the display method (1st image display device 70), and as a news production that expects the execution of a special gaming, the first news is performed at the predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuations). It is possible to execute the second alarm performed at a timing different from the news (at the time of the start of the starting port). As the first alert, it can be executed in the first embodiment (for example, the startout lamp NR blinking blinking) and the second embodiment (for example, the startout lamp NR blinking), which is different from the first concept, the first concept. It can be executed in the third embodiment (for example, the starting port lamp NR and / / or a frame lighting device, etc.), which is different from the second embodiment, and the vibration display based on the above -mentioned fluctuation display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, the above -mentioned fluctuation display based on the above -mentioned starting conditions in the specified gaming status. It is characterized by the large executive ratio of the first to third constitution in the news of the news (for example, the 4th embankment (for example, the starting lamp NR does not emit light), which is different from the 1st to 3rd constitution, and the execution ratio of the newsletter is large.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and when the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the special As a notification effect that makes the execution of the game expected, a first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) and a second notification performed at a timing different from the first notification (at the time of starting entrance winning) can be executed. and / or light emission of the lighting device for the frame, etc.), and as the second notification, it is executable in the same mode as the first mode and the second mode, and is unexecutable in the same mode as the third mode, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is smaller than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the notification effects of the four modes (for example, the starter lamp NR does not emit light) is large.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and if the variable display of the symbols (effect symbols 70a) executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. It has a game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), and based on a first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or based on a second starting condition established by winning a game ball to the second winning means (second winning port 47), The variable display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) can be executed on the display means (first image display device 70), and the special As a light emitting effect to expect the execution of the game, a first light emitting mode using the first winning means (starting opening lamp NR) and a second light emitting mode using other light emitting means (for example, a board and / or frame lighting device) in conjunction with the first winning means It is possible to execute, and in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, the second light emitting mode has a higher execution ratio of the vibration effect by the vibration means (operation button) than the first light emitting mode, and the normal game The variable display based on the first starting condition executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the vibration presentation than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the state.
[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to an embodiment (third embodiment) shown in the drawings.
<Basic configuration of game machine>
194 is a front view showing an example of the gaming machine according to this embodiment, FIG. 195 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to this embodiment, and FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device provided in the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

In the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 194, an inner frame (openable/closable frame) 3 is openably attached to an outer frame 2 attached to an island structure of a game hall, and a glass frame 4 is attached openable and closable.
A window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate (glass plate) 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game board 10z having a board surface on which game balls are hit is mounted on the inner frame 3, and a game area 10az in which the game balls can roll and flow is formed between the board surface of the game board 10z and the transparent plate in front thereof. The transparent plate 4b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4. As shown in FIG.

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 5z at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the game machine), and is rotatable in a direction in which the other end in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when facing the game machine) is released from the outer frame 2 with the hinge mechanism 5z as a fulcrum. The glass frame 4 covers the game board 10z together with the transparent plate, and rotates around the hinge mechanism 5z like a door to open the inner part of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10z. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided on the other end of the glass frame 4 . Fixation by the lock mechanism can be released with a dedicated key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with an open detection switch 105z for detecting whether the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or not.

A tray unit 7z having a storage tray 6z (upper tray 6az and lower tray 6bz) for storing game balls is provided at the bottom of the glass frame 4 (lower side of the window 4a). The tray unit 7z is equipped with a production button 8z (Fig. 194) that can be pressed by the player, a cross key 40z that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and an ejection button 9z that ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 6bz to the outside of the gaming machine. It is
The effect button 8z is activated only when, for example, a message for operating the effect button 8z is displayed on the image display device 31z, which will be described later. The production button 8z is provided with a production button detection switch 8az (see FIG. 196), and when the production button detection switch 8az detects a player's operation, a further production is executed in response to this operation.
The cross key 40z is provided with cross key detection switches (up key detection switch, down key detection switch, left key detection switch, right key detection switch).

An operation handle 11z is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4 . When the player touches the operating handle 11z, the touch sensor 11az (see FIG. 196) in the operating handle 11z detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11z and transmits a touch signal to the shooting control board 75z. The firing control board 75z, upon receiving a touch signal from the touch sensor 11az, permits energization of the firing solenoid 12az. When the rotation angle of the operating handle 11z is changed, the knob of the volume 11bz rotates. A voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the shooting volume 11bz is applied to the shooting solenoid 12az provided in the game ball shooting mechanism. When a voltage is applied to the shooting solenoid 12az, the shooting solenoid 12az operates according to the applied voltage, and a game ball is shot to the game area 10az of the game board 10z with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 11z.

An outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the game area 10az on the game board 10z. These outer rail R1 and inner rail R2 guide the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism when the operation handle 11z is operated to the upper part of the game area 10az. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10az falls within the game area 10az. At this time, the game ball is unpredictably dropped by a plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 10az.
A center member 12z is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 10z. The center member 12z is provided with an image display device 31z such as a liquid crystal display device, and a performance accessory device 32 imitating a "sword".

In addition, a first starting hole 13z into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10az on the central lower side of the center member 12z. A second starting port 14z is provided below the first starting port 13z. The second starting port 14z has an opening/closing door 14bz, and is movably controlled between a first mode in which the opening/closing door 14bz is maintained in a closed state and a second mode in which the opening/closing door 14bz is in an open state. Therefore, when the second starting port 14z is in the first mode, there is no winning chance for the game ball, and when in the second mode, the winning chance for the game ball increases.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the second starting port 14z is controlled in the first mode, the game ball is prevented from entering the second starting port 14z. However, if the chance of a game ball entering the game ball in the first mode is less than in the second mode, the game ball may enter the second starting port 14z in the first mode. In other words, the first aspect includes a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 14z.

The first start hole 13z and the second start hole 14z are provided with a first start hole detection switch 13az (see FIG. 196) and a second start hole detection switch 14az for detecting the entry of a game ball. Also, when the first start hole detection switch 13az and the second start hole detection switch 14az detect the entry of game balls, predetermined prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 13z and the second start hole 14z, for example, three game balls are put out, but it is not always necessary to pay out the game balls when they enter. Further, the number of dispensing may be different for each starting opening, for example, the number of dispensing of the first starting opening 13z is three and the number of dispensing of the second starting opening 14z is one.

The game areas 10az on both sides of the center member 12z are provided with gates 15z through which game balls can pass. The gate 15z is provided with a gate detection switch 15az (see FIG. 196) for detecting the passage of a game ball, and when the gate detection switch 15az detects the passage of a game ball, a lottery for normal symbols, which will be described later, is performed.
Furthermore, the game area 10az on the right side of the center member 12z is provided with a first big winning hole 16 and a second big winning hole 17z into which game balls can enter. For this reason, the operation handle 11z is largely rotated and the game ball is not entered into the first big prize hole 16 and the second big prize hole 17z unless the game ball is hit with a strong force.

The first big winning port 16 is normally kept closed by an opening/closing door 16bz, making it impossible for game balls to enter. On the other hand, when a jackpot game to be described later is started, the opening/closing door 16bz is opened, and the opening/closing door 16bz functions as a tray for guiding the game ball into the first big winning hole 16, so that the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 16.例文帳に追加A first big winning hole detecting switch 16az is provided in the first big winning hole 16, and when the first big winning hole detecting switch 16az detects the entry of game balls, preset prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second big winning opening 17z is normally kept in a closed state by the movable piece 17bz, making it impossible for game balls to enter. On the other hand, when a jackpot game to be described later is started, the movable piece 17bz is actuated and opened, and this movable piece 17bz functions as a guide path for guiding the game ball into the second big prize winning port 17z, so that the game ball can enter the second big prize winning port 17z. A second big winning hole detection switch 17az is provided in the second big winning hole 17z, and when the second big winning hole detection switch 17az detects the entry of game balls, preset prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.
Furthermore, the game area 10az is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 18z. When game balls enter these general winning holes 18z, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

At the bottom of the game area 10az, an out port 19z for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the general winning port 18z, the first starting port 13z, the second starting port 14z, the first big winning port 16 and the second big winning port 17z is provided.
The image display device 31z displays an image during standby when no game is played, or displays an image according to the progress of the game. Above all, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13z or the second starting hole 14z, the performance pattern 35z for informing the player of the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner.
The performance pattern 35 is, for example, a first pattern (left pattern), a second pattern (right pattern), and a third pattern (center pattern), which are respectively scrolled and displayed, and after a predetermined period of time, the scrolling is stopped and specific patterns (numbers) are displayed in an array.

Thus, during the scrolling of the patterns, the player is given an impression as if a lottery is currently being performed, and the player is informed of the result of the lottery by means of the patterns displayed when the scrolling is stopped. By displaying various images, characters, etc. during the variable display of the effect pattern 35z, the player is given a high expectation that he may win a big prize.
In addition, although not shown, the image display device 31z displays a fourth pattern in addition to the effect pattern 35z. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating the change state of the performance symbol 35z used for notification of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery process.
The fourth pattern does not necessarily have to be displayed on the image display device 31z, and may be displayed by separately providing a fourth pattern display lamp.

A pair of left and right lighting devices 33 for presentation are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 4. - 特許庁The production lighting device 33 is provided with a plurality of lights, and performs various productions by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of light from each light.
In addition, the production lighting device 33 is provided with a plurality of lights, and various productions are performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each light.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 194, the game machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 196) consisting of a speaker, and in addition to the above effects devices, it outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., and performs sound effects.

Display areas such as a first special symbol display device 20z, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display device 23, a second special symbol reservation display device 24, a normal design reservation display device 25z, and a round count display device 26z are provided below the left side of the game area 10az.
The first special symbol display device 20z notifies the lottery result of the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 13z, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. That is, a plurality of special patterns corresponding to the lottery result of the big win are provided, and the lottery result is notified to the player by displaying the special pattern (lighting mode) corresponding to the lottery result of the big win on the first special pattern display device 20z. The special symbols displayed in this manner are not displayed immediately, but are stopped after being variably displayed (blinking) for a predetermined period of time.
More specifically, when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z, a lottery for a big win is carried out, but the lottery result for the big win is not immediately reported to the player, but after a prescribed time has elapsed. Then, when a predetermined time has passed, the special symbols corresponding to the big win lottery result are stopped and displayed to notify the player of the lottery result.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the result of the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 14z, and its display mode is the same as the display mode of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 20z.
The normal symbol display device 22 is for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 15z. Although details will be described later, when a predetermined hit is won by the lottery of the normal symbols, the normal symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting port 14z is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined time. As for this normal pattern, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 15z, but the normal pattern is displayed variably by blinking the normal pattern display device 22 until a predetermined time elapses.
Furthermore, when the game balls enter the first start port 13z or the second start port 14z and the big win lottery cannot be performed immediately during the variable display of the special symbols or during the special game to be described later, the right of the big win lottery is reserved under certain conditions. More specifically, the right of the jackpot lottery reserved when the game ball enters the first start port 13z is reserved as the first reserve, and the jackpot lottery right reserved when the game ball enters the second start port 14z is reserved as the second reserve.

Both of these reservations set the upper limit reserved number to 4 respectively, and the reserved numbers are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24, respectively.
The upper limit reserved number of normal symbols is also set to 4, and the reserved number is displayed in a normal symbol reservation display 25z in the same manner as the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24.例文帳に追加
The number-of-rounds indicator 26z is for notifying the number of rounds of a round game performed during a special game, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 196, the rear surface of the game machine 1 is provided with a main control board 50z, a performance control board 55z, a payout control board 60z, a lamp control board 65z, an image control board 70z, a launch control board 75z, a power supply board 80z, and a game information output terminal board 27z. A power plug 81z for supplying power to the gaming machine and a power switch (not shown) are provided on the power board 80z.
The image control board 70z is provided with a volume selector switch 36z for switching the volume of the audio output from the audio output device 34. FIG.

A game control device for controlling the progress of a game in the game machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 196, the main control board 50z controls the basic actions of the game. The main control board 50z has at least a one-chip microcomputer composed of a main CPU 50az, a main ROM 50bz, and a main RAM 50cz, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.
The main CPU 50az reads the program stored in the main ROM 50bz based on the input signal from each detection switch and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or transmits a command to another board according to the result of arithmetic processing. The main RAM 50cz functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 50az.

The input side of the main control board 50z is connected to the first starting hole detection switch 13az, the second starting hole detection switch 14az, the gate detection switch 15az, the first big winning hole detection switch 16az, the second big winning hole detection switch 17az, and the general winning hole detection switch 18az, so that the game ball detection signal is input to the main control board 50z.
In addition, the output side of the main control board 50z is connected to a starting opening opening/closing solenoid 14cz that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14bz of the second starting opening 14z, a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16cz that opens and closes the opening/closing door 16bz of the first big winning opening 16z, and a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17cz that opens and closes the movable piece 17bz of the second big winning opening 17z.
Furthermore, the output side of the main control board 50z is connected to the first special symbol display device 20z, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol reservation display 23, the second special symbol reservation display 24, the normal symbol reservation display 25z, and the number of rounds display 26z, and output various signals through the output ports.
In addition, the main control board 50z outputs external information signals necessary for managing the gaming machines in a hall computer or the like of the gaming parlor to the game information output terminal board 27z.

The main ROM 50bz of the main control board 50z stores game control programs, data necessary for various games, and tables, which will be described later.
Also, the main RAM 50cz of the main control board 50z has a plurality of storage areas.
For example, the main RAM 50cz includes a normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area, a normal symbol reserved storage area, a first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, a judgment storage area, a first special symbol storage area, a second special symbol storage area, a high probability game number (X) storage area, a time saving game number (J) storage area, a round game number (R) storage area, an opening number (K) storage area, and a first big winning opening. There are provided a storage area for the number of balls entered (C1), a storage area for the number of balls entered in the second big winning hole (C2), a game state storage area, a game state buffer, a stop symbol data storage area, and an effect transmission data storage area. The game state storage area includes a time saving game flag storage area, a high probability game flag storage area, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, and a normal figure normal electric processing data storage area. Note that the storage areas described above are merely examples, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27z is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 50z to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 27z is wire-connected to the main control board 50z, and is provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor.
The main control board 80z converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 81z into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. The main control board 80z has a backup power supply made up of a capacitor, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 50z when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 50az becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 50az stops operating. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

The effect control board 55z mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The effect control board 55z includes a sub CPU 55az, a sub ROM 55bz, and a sub RAM 55cz, and is connected to the main control board 50z so as to be communicable in one direction from the main control board 50z to the effect control board 55z.
The sub CPU 55az reads the program stored in the sub ROM 55bz based on the command transmitted from the main control board 50z or the input signal from the effect button detection switch 8az input via the lamp control board 65z, performs arithmetic processing, and transmits the corresponding data to the lamp control board 65z or the image control board 150 based on the processing. The sub-RAM 55cz functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 55az.

The sub ROM 55bz of the effect control board 55z stores programs for effect control, data necessary for various games, and tables.
For example, a variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a performance pattern based on a variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 50z, a performance pattern pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a combination of performance symbols 35z to be stopped and displayed, etc. are stored in the sub ROM 55bz. It should be noted that the tables described above are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the progress of the game.

The sub RAM 55cz of the effect control board 55z has a plurality of storage areas.
The sub-RAM 55cz is provided with a command reception buffer, a game state storage area, an effect mode storage area, an effect pattern storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a determination storage area (0th storage area), a first reserved storage area, a second reserved storage area, and the like. Note that the above-described storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.
Also, the effect control board 55z is equipped with an RTC (real time clock) 55d for outputting the current time. The sub CPU 55az receives a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 55d, and executes various processes based on the current date and time.
The RTC 55d normally operates by the power from the game machine when the power is supplied to the game machine, and operates by the power supplied from the backup power supply mounted on the main control board 80z when the power of the game machine is turned off. Therefore, the RTC 55d can clock the current date and time even when the gaming machine is powered off. In addition, RTC55d may provide a battery on the production|presentation control board 55z, and may operate|move by this battery.

The payout control board 60z performs game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. The payout control board 60z includes a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz, and is connected to the main control board 50 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The payout CPU 60az reads the program stored in the payout ROM 60bz based on the input signals from the payout ball counting switch 106z for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out and the open detection switch 105z, performs arithmetic processing, and transmits the corresponding data to the main control board 50z based on the processing.

Also, the output side of the payout control board 60z is connected with a payout motor 107 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU 60az reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 60bz based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 50z, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 107 of the prize ball payout device to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. At this time, the payout RAM 60cz functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 60az.
Also, it confirms whether a game ball lending device (card unit) not shown is connected to the payout control board 60z, and if the game ball lending device (card unit) is connected, it transmits shooting control data for permitting the shooting control board 75z to shoot the game balls.
Further, a tray full detection switch 51z and a clogged ball detection switch 52z are connected to the payout control board 60z.

The launch control board 75z permits launch upon receiving the launch control data from the payout control board 60z. Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11az and the input signal from the shooting volume 11bz are read, and the firing solenoid 12az and the ball feed solenoid 12bz are energized and controlled to shoot the game ball.
The firing solenoid 12az is composed of a rotary solenoid. A striking member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 12az, and the rotation of the firing solenoid 12az rotates the firing member.
Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 12az is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 75z. As a result, the number of shot game balls in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute) because one shot is shot each time the shooting solenoid makes one rotation. That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.
The ball feed solenoid 12bz is composed of a rectilinear solenoid, and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 6az (see FIG. 194) one by one toward the hitting member directly connected to the firing solenoid 12az.

The lamp control board 65z is connected to the performance control board 55z so as to be capable of two-way communication, and its input side is connected to the performance button detection switch 8a provided in the performance button 8z, and when a detection signal is input from the performance button detection switch 8az, it is output to the performance control board 55z.
Further, the lamp control board 65z is connected with a performance accessory device 32 and a performance lighting device 33 provided on the game board 10z, and the lamp control board 65z controls the lighting of the performance lighting device 33 based on the data transmitted from the performance control board 55z, and controls the driving of a motor for changing the light irradiation direction. In addition, it controls the power supply of a driving source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the performance accessory device 32 . In addition, in this embodiment, since it is comprised so that the production|presentation button 8z may protrude, the production accessory apparatus 32 contains the production|presentation button 8z.
The board lamp 100z and the frame lamp 101z are connected to the lamp control board 65z.
The image control board 150 is connected to the performance control board 55z so as to be capable of two-way communication, and the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 are connected to its output side.

The main control board 50z will be further described.
A performance display monitor 600, a setting display monitor 650, a setting key switch 660, a setting switch 670, and an RWM clear switch 680 are further connected to the main control board 50z.
Details of these will be described later, but the performance display monitor 600 displays the performance of the gaming machine, that is, the base value.
The base value is a numerical value indicating how much there is to be paid out in a normal state excluding special states such as a jackpot, a variable probability game state, a short working time game state, etc., and for example, if there are 50 prize balls when a player hits 100 game balls in a low probability and no short working time state, the base is 50.例文帳に追加
A performance display monitor 600 displays a value obtained by calculating a base value for low-probability, time-shortening and non-working time for each predetermined number of hits (usually 60,000) in all game states including a jackpot, probability-variable game state, and time-saving game state.
Also, in a game machine having a setting function, the probability of winning a big win can be changed by changing the setting.
The setting values may be displayed on a setting display monitor 650 provided separately from the performance display monitor 600, or the performance display monitor 600 may also serve as the setting display monitor 650 to display the setting values. In that case, there is no need to provide the setting display monitor 650 separately.
Instead of providing the setting switch 670 for changing the setting of the gaming machine, the RWM clear switch 680 may be substituted.

Although the details will be described later, the operation of changing and confirming the settings of the gaming machine using the performance display monitor 600 will be described.
When the door of the game machine 1 is opened (the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2), the setting key switch 660 is turned on, and the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed, the current setting is displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and the setting can be switched.
The setting is, for example, six steps from "1" to "6", and each time the RWM clear switch 680 is operated, the set value is added and displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and after "6", it returns to "1".
After selecting the setting, when the setting key switch 660 is turned off, the setting displayed on the performance display monitor 600 is confirmed, and the performance display monitor 600 displays the set value and dots.

The setting display switches to the performance display every time a certain period of time elapses, and a game becomes possible. Also, the RWM of the main control board is cleared.
During the switching of the setting, notification is given by an effect display and an effect sound.
When the door of the gaming machine 1 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on, the performance display monitor 600 displays the current settings and dots, enabling confirmation of the settings.
During confirmation of the setting, notification is given by a presentation display and a sound effect.

Next, the effect button 8z is incorporated in the central portion of the plate unit 7z.
The performance button 8z is configured to be movable forward and backward through a normal operating position (not shown), a depressed position retracted downward from the normal operating position, and a protruding operating position protruding upward from the normal operating position. Also, the effect button 8z is configured to be able to be pressed from any position including the normal operation position and the projecting operation position to the pressing position.
In this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8z is disclosed, for example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-116168, so the description thereof is omitted.

<Configuration of the back of the game board>
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described.
FIG. 197 is a rear view showing a state where each unit is assembled to the base frame 130z, and FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 195, 197, 198, etc., a base frame (liquid crystal base frame) 130 having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled to the rear surface of the game board 10z, and an image display unit (image display device 31z and image display cover 165) 160 is assembled to the rear side of the base frame 130z so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 166 is attached to the back surface (rear surface) of the image display cover (liquid crystal cover) 165, and a board protection case (board case) 200 containing the main control board is attached to the lower back surface of the image display cover 165 below the lamp relay board 166.
The base frame (liquid crystal base) 130z is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 131 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the game board 10z. A space for arranging various circuit boards and parts is provided on the back surface of the base frame 130z.
An effect control board 55z is arranged on the back side of the image display unit (liquid crystal unit) 160 fixed to the back of the base frame 130z. The image display unit 160 is configured to be slidably mounted in a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board from the side (horizontal direction), vertical direction, or oblique direction of the base frame 130z.
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame 130z are covered with a lid member 170 (FIGS. 197 and 198).

As shown in FIG. 197, at least the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 provided on the main control board 50z are exposed on the rear side of the board case 200z.
Also, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the main control board 50z can be visually recognized through the transparent board case 200z.
A game parlor staff or the like opens the door of the game machine, operates the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 while viewing the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 on the back of the game machine, and can perform operations such as RWM clear, setting change, and game performance confirmation.

The RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50z is not directly exposed, and an operation member 685 that can be operated by amusement arcade staff or the like protrudes from an opening provided in the board case 200z at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680. When the staff or the like presses the operating member 685 , the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed by the pressed operating member 685 . This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a key hole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50z.
An end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is exposed from an opening provided in the substrate case 200z.
Amusement arcade staff or the like can operate the setting key switch 660 by inserting a key into the keyhole.

<Main control board>
Next, various operations executed by the main control board 50z, which is the main control board of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, will be described.
FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram of various random numbers acquired by the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1, (a) is a special symbol determination random number, (b) is a big hit symbol determination random number, (c) is a ready-to-win determination random number, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary symbol determination random number.
In the main control board 50z, a special symbol is determined by the special symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(a) and the big hit symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(b). Further, the auxiliary symbol is determined by the auxiliary symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(d).

As for the random number for special symbol determination shown in FIG. 199(a), one random value is acquired from random numbers from "0" to "60000", for example, at the start winning prize.
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment can change the probability of winning a big win (determined as a big win) by making settings using the setting key switch 660, the setting switch 670, and the like.
It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 may not be provided with the setting key switch 660, the setting switch 670, etc. described above, and the change setting of the probability of winning the jackpot may not be possible.
Even if the gaming machine is provided with the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670, the prepared setting may be only "1" and it may be practically impossible to change the probability of winning the jackpot.

The random number for special symbol determination when the setting can be changed will be explained.
When the setting is ``1'', in a low-probability game state (ordinary game state), the ratio of big hits is set to 1/300, and when the obtained random number for special pattern determination is ``100'' to ``299'', it is determined as a big hit.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the ratio of big hits is set to 1/60, and when the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "1099", it is determined to be a big hit. In addition, in the special symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(a), a lottery for a small hit, which is a kind of loss, is also performed. Here, the ratio of the small winning is set to 1/300, and when the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "2000" to "2199", it is determined as a small winning. In cases other than these cases, it is determined to be a failure.

When the setting is ``2'', in a low-probability game state (ordinary game state), the ratio of big hits is set to 1/295, and when the obtained random number for special pattern determination is ``100'' to ``302'', it is determined as a big hit.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the ratio of the big hit is set to 1/59, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "1114", it is determined as a big hit. A small winning ratio is set to 1/300, and a small winning is determined when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "2000" to "2199". In cases other than these cases, it is determined to be a failure.

When the setting is ``3'', in a low-probability game state (ordinary game state), the ratio of big win is set to 1/290, and when the acquired random number for special pattern judgment is ``100'' to ``306'', it is decided as a big win.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the ratio of the big hit is set to 1/58, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "1134", it is determined as a big hit. Also, the ratio of small winning is set to 1/300, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "2000" to "2199", it is determined as small winning. In cases other than these cases, it is determined to be a failure.

When the setting is ``4'', in a low-probability game state (ordinary game state), the ratio of big hits is set to 1/285, and when the acquired random number for special pattern determination is ``100'' to ``309'', it is determined as a big hit.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the ratio of big hits is set to 1/57, and when the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "1149", it is determined to be a big hit. Also, the ratio of small winning is set to 1/300, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "2000" to "2199", it is determined as small winning.
In cases other than these cases, it is determined to be a failure.
In addition, in the description of FIG. 199, four setting values from "1" to "4" are exemplified, but the setting values may be six from "1" to "6".

Next, as the jackpot symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(b), one random value is obtained from 250 random numbers from "0" to "249". Then, based on the obtained random number for judging the jackpot pattern, one jackpot is determined from a plurality of types of jackpots.
In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal hit with short working hours, a short hit with normal working hours, a long hit with high probability of short working hours, a short hit with high probability of short working hours, and a short hit without high probability of short working hours are prepared.
It should be noted that the time-saving gaming state refers to a gaming state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting port 14z than in the normal gaming state. That is, when a predetermined condition described later is established, the second start opening/closing door 14bz of the second start opening 14z is changed from a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter to an open state in which game balls can easily enter, thereby increasing the probability of a game ball entering the second start opening 14z.

The long win with normal time reduction is a big win in which the opening time of the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z in the big win game is relatively long, and a relatively large amount of balls can be expected to be put out, and a time saving game is given during the period until the special pattern changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big win game.
The short win with normal working time is a big win that provides a short-time game during the period until the special pattern fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big win game, although the opening time of the first big win hole 16z or the second big win hole 17z in the big win game is short and the ball cannot be expected to be put out.

The high-probability time-saving long win is a big win in which the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z is opened for a long time during the big win game, and the largest amount of balls can be expected to be put out, and both the high-probability game and the time-saving game with an increased winning probability of the big win after the big win game are finished.
A short win with a high probability of short working hours is a big win which provides both a high probability game and a short time game in which the winning probability of the big win is increased after the big win game is finished, although the opening time of the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z in the big win game is short and the putting out of balls cannot be expected.
The high-probability, time-saving and short win is a big win that provides a high-probability game in which the winning probability of the big win is increased after the big win game is over, although the opening time of the first big win hole 16z or the second big win hole 17z in the big win game is short and the putting out of balls cannot be expected.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ratio of selection of some types of jackpots differs between when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z and when a game ball enters the second start hole 14z.
For example, the rate at which the normal winning with time reduction is selected is the same at 35/250 both when the game ball wins in the first start port 13z and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14z. Similarly, the rate at which the short win with normal time saving is selected is the same at 15/250 both when the game ball wins in the first start port 13z and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14z.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 199(b), if the random number value for judging the jackpot pattern obtained when the game ball wins the first start port 13z or the second start port 14z is ``0'' to ``34'', then normal winning with short working hours is selected, and if it is ``35'' to ``49'', short winning with normal working hours is selected.

On the other hand, the ratio of selecting the high-probability time-saving long hit and the high-probability time-saving short-hit is different between when the game ball wins in the first start port 13z and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14z. It is said that
Further, the ratio of selecting the high-probability time-saving short hit is 75/250 when the game ball wins in the first start port 13z, and 25/250 when the game ball wins in the second start port 14z.
In addition, the rate at which the high-probability reduction in working hours is not selected is set to 100/250 only when the game ball wins the first start opening 13z.
Specifically, if the random number value for judging the jackpot symbol acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 13z is ``50'' to ``74'', a long winning with a high probability of short working hours is selected, if it is ``75'' to ``149'', a short winning with short working hours is selected with a high probability, and if it is ``150'' to ``249'', a short winning without a short working hours is selected with high probability.
On the other hand, if the random number value for judging the jackpot pattern acquired when the game ball wins the second starting hole is ``50'' to ``224'', a long winning with a high probability of time saving is selected, and if it is ``225'' to ``249'', a short winning with a high probability of working time is selected.

In addition, the reach determination random number shown in FIG. 199 (c) is obtained by acquiring one random value from 250 random numbers from “0” to “249” at the time of starting winning, and determining “with reach” when the acquired random number for reach determination is “0” to “21”, and determining “no reach” when the acquired random value for reach determination is “22” to “249”.

Also, as for the auxiliary symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(d), one random value is obtained from 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" when passing through the gate.
In a low-probability game state in which both the time-saving flag and the high-precision flag are OFF, or in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is OFF and the high-precision flag is ON, a win is determined only when the obtained random number for determining auxiliary symbols is '7'.
On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is ON and the high-precision flag is OFF, or in the high-probability time-saving game state in which both the time-saving flag and the high-precision flag are ON, a win is determined when the acquired random number for auxiliary symbol determination is '0' to '9'.

Next, main processing executed by the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. The processing described below can be realized by executing a program stored in the main ROM 50bz by the main CPU 50az of the main control board 50z. A description of the random number update process is omitted.

[Main processing of the main control board]
Main processing of the main control board 50z will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 80z to the main CPU 50az.
First, the main CPU 50az performs initial setting processing in step S1. Specifically, preparation processing for starting game control, setting change processing for changing setting values based on a setting change operation, RWM clear processing for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 50cz based on an RWM clear operation, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on a setting confirmation operation, and the like are performed. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 50az updates the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for ready-to-win determination in step S2, and updates the initial random number for big hit determination, the initial random number for special symbol determination, the initial random number for hit determination, and the initial random number for normal symbol determination in step S3.
In step S4, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a voltage drop detection signal indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts) has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 80z. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input (No in step S4), the process proceeds to step S2, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input (No in step S4), the process proceeds to step S5.

In step S5, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time (Yes in step S5), it is assumed that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process is shifted to step S6. If it has not continued for a predetermined period of time (No in step S5), the process is transferred to step S4 assuming that there is a possibility of an instantaneous power failure in which the voltage of the supplied power supply drops only momentarily.
In step S6, the main CPU 50az sets interruption inhibition to inhibit timer interruption, and in step S7, transmits a power shutdown designation command for notifying the payout control board 60z of the start of power shutdown processing. As a result, the payout control board 60z, which has received the power cut-off designation command, transmits the remaining payout ball number designation command indicating the remaining payout ball number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 60cz.

In step S8, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a command for designating the number of remaining payout balls has been received. When the command for specifying the number of remaining balls to be paid out is not received (No in step S8), the processing is shifted to step S9, and when the command for specifying the number of remaining balls to be paid out is received (Yes in step S8), the processing is shifted to step S10.
In step S9, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout ball designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed (No in step S9), the process is shifted to step S8, and if the standby time has elapsed (Yes in step S9), the process is shifted to step S10 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 60z cannot be performed.

In step S10, the main CPU 50az saves the number of payout balls in a payout counter set in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. Specifically, when the command for specifying the number of remaining put-out balls is received, the number of remaining put-out balls specified by the command for specifying the number of remaining put-out balls is saved, and when the command for specifying the number of remaining put-out balls is not received, "0" is saved as the number of remaining put-out balls. The number of remaining balls to be paid out saved here is referred to in the payout control processing of the timer interruption described later, and after the power supply is restored, the number of payout balls designation command corresponding to the number of remaining balls to be paid out is transmitted to the payout control board 60z.
The main CPU 50az clears the output port in step S11. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S12, the main CPU 50az calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 50cz. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.
In step S13, the main CPU 50az saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 50cz has been backed up (restored power) in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, prohibits RWM access in step S14, and thereafter waits until the power supply is completely cut off.
In this way, the initial setting process is performed when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, but the initial setting process is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). In other words, even if setting change operation, setting confirmation operation and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when an instantaneous power failure occurs, setting change processing, setting confirmation processing and RWM clear processing are not executed, so that the game machine does not perform unintended operations and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing of the main control board 50z will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing initial setting processing of the main control board.
First, the main CPU 50az prohibits all interrupts in step S21, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S22, and waits for activation of other boards in step S23. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 60z and the effect control board 55z to start up so that there is no missing command from the main control board 50z.

The main CPU 50az permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz in step S24, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 60z in step S25. As a result, the payout control unit (payout CPU 60az, payout ROM 60bz, payout RAM 60cz) performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device (shooting solenoid 12az).
In step S26, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. When the backup flag is saved (Yes in step S26), the process is shifted to step S27 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved (No in step S26), the process is shifted to step S28 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

The main CPU 50az calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz in step S27, and determines whether or not there is a setting change operation in step S28. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 660, the RWM clear switch 680 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation (Yes in step S28), the process moves to step S29 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation (No in step S28), the process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 50az performs setting change processing in step S29. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) is changed (updated), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, to initialize the control state of the game (other than the set value region of the RWM region), and the processing for transmitting the setting change designation command indicating that the setting is being changed to the effect control board 55z, and the processing is shifted to step S25. As a result, the effect control board 55z performs processing for executing setting change notification indicating that the setting value is being changed.
The "setting change notification" is to display a setting changing screen for making the image display device recognize that the setting value is being changed, or to light up the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting change. It should be noted that a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") may be output from the voice output device 34 to indicate that the setting is being changed.

The main CPU 50az determines whether the checksum is normal in step S30. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz matches the checksum calculated in step S27. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal) (Yes in step S30), the process moves to step S31, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal) (No in step S30), the process moves to step S32.
If the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S31, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not there is a setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. When there is no flag during setting change (No in step S31), the process is shifted to step S33 assuming that the previous power interruption did not occur during the setting change process, and when there is a setting change flag (Yes in step S31), the process is shifted to step S32 assuming that the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change process. The setting changing flag is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz at the start of the setting change process, and cleared from the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz at the end of the setting change process.

The main CPU 50az performs unrecoverable error processing in step S32. Specifically, error information indicating an unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display device 113, and after transmitting an unrecoverable error specifying command indicating the occurrence of the unrecoverable error to the performance control board 55z, interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt is set, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of the unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 27z after clearing the output port, and processing is performed to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 55z, processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred is performed. "Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply substrate 80z is turned off and then turned on without changing the setting, it will not be canceled and the power switch must be turned on with the setting changing operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" means displaying an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred, lighting the frame lamp 101z and board lamp 100z in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or outputting an unrecoverable error sound ("It is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 34 until the power is turned off to indicate that an unrecoverable error has occurred. There is.

The main CPU 50az determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S33. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 680 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation (Yes in step S33), the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the mode is to be shifted to the RWM clear mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation (No in step S33), the process proceeds to step S36.
The main CPU 50az performs RWM clear processing in step S34. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the control state of the game is initialized (initialization of areas other than the set value area of the RWM area), and a process for transmitting an RWM clear designation command indicating that RWM clear is being prepared to the effect control board 55z is performed, and the process is shifted to step S25. As a result, the effect control board 55z performs processing for executing RWM clear preparation notification indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear confirmation screen on the image display device for recognizing that the RWM clear will be performed by operating the RWM clear switch 680, or to light the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the RWM clear confirmation. It is also possible to output a confirmation sound ("RWM is cleared by operating the RWM clear switch") indicating that the RWM clear is being confirmed from the audio output device 34. FIG.
In step S35, the main CPU 50az transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the low-probability short-time game state as the normal game state) to the payout control board 60z and the performance control board 55z, and shifts the processing to step S31. As a result, in the effect control board 55z, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

The "power-on notification" is to display the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "123") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, to make the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z all light up in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and to indicate that the RWM area has been initialized from the voice output device 34. A power-on notification sound ("RWM cleared") + buzzer) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S36, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 660 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. When there is a setting confirmation operation (Yes in step S36), the processing is shifted to step S37 assuming that the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and when there is no setting confirmation operation (No in step S36), the processing is shifted to step S38 to restore the control state of the game to the state before power-off.

The main CPU 50az performs a setting confirmation process in step S37. Specifically, processing for displaying the setting value saved in the setting value area of the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz on the information display 113 and transmitting a setting confirmation specifying command indicating that the setting is being confirmed to the performance control board 55z is performed. As a result, in the effect control board 55z, processing for executing setting confirmation notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed is performed.

The 'notification of setting confirmation' is to display a setting confirmation screen for making the image display device recognize that the setting value is being confirmed, or to light up the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting confirmation. Note that the voice output device 34 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting confirmation is in progress”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S38, the main CPU 50az clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, and sets the RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S39, the main CPU 50az transmits to the effect control board 55z a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 55z, the processing for executing the power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption is performed.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen (image) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) in order to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption, lighting the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z in a predetermined emission color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a predetermined power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 34 to indicate that the power has been restored (from a power failure). It is to output over a period (for example, 30 seconds).
In step S40, the main CPU 50az transmits other commands (a special symbol memory designation command, a normal symbol memory designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 55z. As a result, the production control board 55z can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 50az activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S41, permits all interrupts in step S32, and terminates this initial setting process.

In this way, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, clear the RWM, or confirm the setting.

Further, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation, it is possible to increase the security of the setting change, which is the event most likely to be fraudulent, and effectively prevent fraud.

In addition, when the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine does not cause trouble to the game parlor and the players due to the unexpected operation of the game machine, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved.
In addition, when there is a setting change flag, that is, when the previous power interruption occurs during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, thereby preventing the progress of the game in a state where the set value not intended by the game parlor side is set, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved.

The setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation include the ON state of the open detection switch 105z, but may not include the ON state of the open detection switch 105z.
If it is determined that there is a backup flag (recovery of the power supply) and that no setting change operation has been performed, then if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S40, non-recoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz may be initialized (cleared to 0), the initial value "1" may be saved in the setting value area, and the process may be moved to step S25.

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including the information indicating the current game state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the game state designation command indicating the current game state may be transmitted.
Also, by not determining the presence or absence of the setting changing flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az executes random number update processing (S61), starting opening SW processing (S62), gate detection SW processing (S63), special symbol processing (S64), customer waiting setting processing (S65), auxiliary symbol processing (S66), big winning opening processing (S67), second starting opening opening processing (S68), etc., as timer interrupt processing.

Next, various processes executed as the timer interrupt process will be described.
[Starting port SW processing]
FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting port SW process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In this case, the main CPU 50az determines in step S101 whether or not the first starting port detection SW 13a of the first starting port 13z is ON. If it is determined that the first starting port detection SW 13a is ON, in step S102 it determines whether or not the pending number U1 of the first starting port detection SW 13a is less than "4".
Here, when it is determined that the pending number U1 is less than "4", "1" is added to the pending number U1 in step S103. After that, in step S104, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for jackpot symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the variation pattern random number, etc. are acquired and stored in the main RAM 50cz.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that 180 variation pattern random numbers (0 to 179) are prepared.

Next, in step S105, the main CPU 50az increases the number of reservations displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and sets the first number-of-reservations increase command. When the first reservation number increase command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the first reservation number increase command to the effect control board 55z. If a negative result is obtained in step S102, that is, if it is determined that the number of reservations U1 is "4", which is the maximum number of possible reservations, the processing of steps S103 to S105 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S106.

Next, in step S106, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the second start port detection SW 14a of the second start port 14z is ON. When it is determined that the second start port detection SW 14a is ON, in step S107, it determines whether or not the pending number U2 of the second start port detection SW 14a is less than "4".
Here, when it is determined that the pending number U2 is less than "4", "1" is added to the pending number U2 in step S108. After that, in step S109, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for big hit symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the variation pattern random number, etc. are obtained and stored in the main RAM 50cz.

Next, in step S110, the main CPU 50az increases the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation display 24 and sets a second number-of-reservations increase command. When the second reservation number increase command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the second reservation number increase command to the effect control board 55z, and ends the start opening SW process. If a negative result is obtained in step S107, that is, if it is determined that the pending number U2 is "4", which is the maximum pending possible number, the starting point SW process is terminated.

[Gate detection SW processing]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of gate detection SW processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S121, the main CPU 50a determines whether or not the gate detection SW 15a of the gate 15z is ON. If it is determined that the gate detection SW 15a is ON, in step S122, it determines whether or not the number of gate passages G of the gate detection SW 15a is less than "4".

When it is determined in step S122 that the number of gate passages G is less than "4", "1" is added to the number of gate passages G in step S123, and in the following step S124, a random number for auxiliary symbol determination is acquired and stored in the main RAM 50cz, and the gate detection SW processing is terminated.
If it is determined in step S121 that the gate detection SW 15a is not ON, or if a negative result is obtained in step S122, that is, if it is determined that the number of gate passages G is "4", which is the maximum holdable number, the gate detection SW process is terminated.

[Special symbol processing]
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S131, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the special game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the big winning game or the small winning game is in progress, and when it is determined that the big winning game or the small winning game is not in progress, in the following step S132, it determines whether or not the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 are fluctuating.
If it is determined in step S132 that the special symbols are not fluctuating, then in step S133 it is determined whether or not the pending number U2 of the second start opening detection SW 14a that is preferentially digested is greater than "1". If it is determined in step S133 that the pending number U2 is greater than "1", then "1" is subtracted from the pending number U2 in step S134.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S133 that the pending number U2 is not ≥ 1, that is, if the pending number U2 is "0", then in step S135 it is determined whether or not the pending number U1 of the first starting port detection SW 13a is greater than "1".

Next, in step S137, the main CPU 50az turns off the customer waiting flag if it is ON, and then in step S138 executes special game determination processing (FIG. 207), which will be described later. After executing the special game determination process in step S138, in step S139, a fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 208), which will be described later, is executed. After executing the variation pattern selection process in step S139, in step S140, the corresponding first special symbol display device 20z or second special symbol display device 21 starts symbol variation, and in subsequent step S141, a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control board 55z is set.
The variation start command includes a variation pattern command indicating a variation time of a special symbol, a big winning or small winning command indicating a lottery result of a big winning lottery, a big winning pattern command indicating a lottery result of a big winning pattern, a reach command indicating a lottery result of a ready-to-win lottery, a game state command about the current game state, and the like.

Next, in step S142, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the variation time of the first or second special symbol has passed a predetermined variation time.
In step S142, when it is determined that the predetermined variation time has elapsed, in subsequent step S143, the variation of the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped to display a predetermined special symbol.
After that, in step S144, a fluctuation stop command is set, and in subsequent step S145, the processing during stop (FIG. 210), which will be described later, is executed to end the special symbol processing.

If it is determined that the special game flag is ON in step S131, or if it is determined that the special symbol variation time has not reached the predetermined variation time in step S142, the special symbol processing is terminated.
If it is determined in step S132 that the special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S142, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time has passed a predetermined variation time.
Further, when it is determined in step S135 that the reserved number U1 is not ≧1, that is, when it is determined that there is no reservation of the reserved numbers U1 and U2, in step S146, the customer waiting setting process shown in FIG. 206 is executed to end the special symbol process.

[Customer waiting setting process]
FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of customer waiting setting processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S151, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and when determining that the customer waiting flag is ON, ends the customer waiting setting process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S151 that the customer waiting flag is not ON, a customer waiting command is set in step S152, and the customer waiting flag is turned ON in step S153, and then the customer waiting setting process is terminated.
It should be noted that the customer waiting flag is turned ON from OFF when a state in which no special symbols are reserved continues for a predetermined period of time without the jackpot state.

[Special game determination process]
FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing an example of special game determination processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S161, the main CPU 50az determines the special symbol determination random number value stored in the main RAM 50cz, and in subsequent step S162, determines whether or not the jackpot has been won.
In step S162, when it is determined that a jackpot has been won, in subsequent step S163, the random number value for jackpot symbol determination stored in the main RAM 50c is determined, and in step S164, based on the determination result, a jackpot symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S162 that the jackpot has not been won, then in step S165 it is determined whether or not the small win has been won based on the special symbol determination random number value.
In step S165, when it is determined that a small win is won, in subsequent step S166, a small win symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is terminated.
Also, in step S165, when it is determined that a small hit is not won, in step S167, a losing symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is terminated.

[Variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing an example of variation pattern selection processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving game state is ON. In step S171, when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, in subsequent step S172, the time saving game state table is set as the variation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S171 that the time saving flag is not ON, in step S173, a table for non-time saving gaming state is set as a variation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.
Next, in step S174, the main CPU 50az determines the previously acquired variation pattern random number value, and in subsequent step S175, based on the set variation pattern table and the variation pattern random number value, sets the variation pattern, and ends the variation pattern selection process.

FIG. 209 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table, (a) showing an example of a variation pattern table for a non-time-saving game state, and (b) showing an example of a variation pattern table for a time-saving gaming state.

First, the non-time-saving gaming state variation pattern table shown in FIG. 209(a) will be described.
In the non-time-saving gaming state variation pattern table shown in FIG. 209(a), when the special symbol determination result is a big hit and the variation pattern random number value is "0 to 89", the variation pattern 1 with a long variation time of 90 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 1 is selected, a winning performance with a reach A is performed.

Further, when the special symbol determination result is a big win and the variation pattern random number value is "90 to 179", variation pattern 2 with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 2 is selected, a winning performance with a reach B is performed.
If the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the variation pattern 3 with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected regardless of the selected variation pattern random number "0 to 179". When the variation pattern 3 is selected, a chance performance is performed.

Next, the case where the special symbol determination result is a loss and the game state is a non-time-saving game state will be described.
When the random number for special symbol determination is a loss, a variation pattern is determined based on the number of held balls of the first special symbol, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation pattern, and the like.
Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2" and the reach determination random number is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the variation pattern 4 with a variation time of 12 seconds is selected regardless of the selected variation pattern random number "0 to 179". When the variation pattern 4 is selected, the production of the normal variation A is performed.

On the other hand, when the total number of retained balls of the first and second special symbols is ``0 to 2'', the reach judgment random number is ``0 to 21'', and the fluctuation pattern random number is ``0 to 29'', the fluctuation pattern 5 having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 5 is selected, a losing effect accompanied by reach A is performed.
In addition, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is ``0 to 2'', the random number for reach determination is ``0 to 21'', and the fluctuation pattern random number is ``30 to 179'', a fluctuation pattern 6 having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 6 is selected, a losing performance accompanied by reach B is performed.

Next, when the total number of retained balls of the first and second special symbols is ``3'' and the random number for reach determination is ``22 to 249'' and there is no reach, the variation pattern 7 in which the variation time is 8 seconds is selected regardless of the selected variation pattern random number ``0 to 179''. When the variation pattern 7 is selected, an effect of the normal variation B is performed.
Also, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29", the above fluctuation time is 90 seconds. Select the fluctuation pattern 5.
Also, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3", the reach judgment random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "30 to 179", the above fluctuation time is 30 seconds. Select the fluctuation pattern 6.

In addition, when the total number of retained balls of the first and second special symbols is ``4 to 8'' and the reach determination random number is ``22 to 249'' and there is no reach, the variation pattern 8 whose variation time is 4 seconds is selected regardless of the selected variation pattern random number ``0 to 179''. When the variation pattern 8 is selected, an effect of shortened variation A is performed.
In addition, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the reach judgment random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29", the fluctuation pattern 5 having the fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected.
Further, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "30 to 179", the fluctuation pattern 6 with the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected.

Next, the variation pattern table for time saving game state shown in FIG. 209(b) will be described. 209(b), the variation pattern table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 209(b) is the same as the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving game state shown in FIG.
When the random number for special symbol determination is a loss, a variation pattern is determined based on the number of held balls of the second special symbol, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation pattern, and the like.
Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5" and the reach determination random number is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the selected variation pattern random number "0 to 179" Regardless, the variation pattern 4 with a variation time of 12 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 4 is selected, the production of the normal variation A is performed.

On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is ``0 to 5'', the random number for reach determination is ``0 to 21'', and the variation pattern random number is ``0 to 29'', the variation pattern 5 in which the variation time is 90 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 5 is selected, a losing performance accompanied by reach A is performed.
In addition, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is ``0 to 5'', the random number for reach determination is ``0 to 21'', and the fluctuation pattern random number is ``30 to 179'', the fluctuation pattern 6 having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 6 is selected, a losing performance accompanied by reach B is performed.

On the other hand, when the total number of retained balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8" and the reach determination random number is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the variation pattern 9 whose variation time is 2 seconds is selected regardless of the selected variation pattern random number "0 to 179". When the variation pattern 9 is selected, the effect of the shortened variation B is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 29" If the variation pattern 5 is selected.
In addition, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the variation pattern random number is "30 to 179", the above variation pattern 6 is selected.
In this embodiment, when the big win is won, the variation pattern is determined based on the special symbol determination random value and the variation pattern random value, but this is only an example, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the special symbol determination random value and the big hit symbol determination random value, or the variation pattern may be determined based on the special symbol determination random value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, and the variation pattern random value.

[Stopped process]
FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of stop processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S181, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON, and if it determines that the time saving flag is ON, in the subsequent step S182, subtracts "1" from the number of remaining games J of the time saving game stored in the main RAM 50cz.

Next, in step S183, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the number of remaining games J is '0'. If the number of remaining games J is '0', it means that the variable display of the special symbol has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time saving game, so in the following step S184, the time saving flag is turned OFF.
If it is determined in step S181 that the time saving flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S183 that the number of remaining games J is not "0", the process proceeds to step S185.

Next, in the following step S185, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the high accuracy flag is ON, and when determining that the high accuracy flag is ON, in the following step S186, subtracts "1" from the number of remaining games X of the high probability games stored in the main RAM 50cz.
Next, in step S187, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the number of remaining games X is "0". If the number of remaining games X is "0", it means that the variable display of special symbols has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10000 times) in the high-probability game, so in the subsequent step S188, the high-probability flag is turned OFF.
If it is determined in step S185 that the high accuracy flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S187 that the number of remaining games X is not "0", the process proceeds to step S189.

Next, in step S189, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the special symbol set in the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is a big win, and if it is determined not to be a big win, then in step S190, it determines whether or not the set special symbol is a "small win." Here, when it is determined to be a small hit, in step S191, the small hit game flag is turned ON. Thereafter, in step S192, the opening of the jackpot is started, and in step S193, a jackpot opening command is set, and the stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S190, when it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process during fluctuation stop is terminated without turning ON the small hit game flag.
Also, in step S189, if it is determined to be a big hit, then in step S194, it is determined whether or not the big win is a long win, and if it is determined to be a long win, in step S195, a long win game flag (special game flag) is turned ON, and if not, a short win game flag (special game flag) is turned ON in step S196. After that, in step S197, the number of remaining games J of the time-saving game and the number of remaining games X of the high-probability game are set to "0" respectively, and after resetting the number of remaining games J/X, in step S198, the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag are turned off, and the process proceeds to step S192.

[Auxiliary pattern processing]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of auxiliary symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in step S201, and ends the auxiliary symbol processing when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON.
On the other hand, in step S201, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, in step S202, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary symbol is fluctuating. In step S202, when it is determined that the auxiliary symbol is not fluctuating, in step S203, it is determined whether or not the number of gate passages G storing the number of times the game ball passes through the gate detection SW 15a is greater than "1".When the number of times of gate passage G is greater than "1", in subsequent step S204, "1" is subtracted from the number of gate passages G, and when it is determined that the number of gate passages G is not greater than "1", that is, in the case of "0", the auxiliary symbol processing is terminated. do.

Next, in step S205, the main CPU 50az determines the auxiliary symbol determination random number value, in subsequent step S206 sets a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the auxiliary symbol display device 22, and in step S207 sets a variation time.
Here, it is conceivable to set the variation time of the auxiliary symbol to 4.0 seconds, for example, if the time saving flag is OFF, and to set it, for example, to 1.5 seconds if the time saving flag is ON.
Next, in step S209, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the variation time of the auxiliary symbol has passed for a predetermined time. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S209 that the auxiliary symbol variation time has not passed the predetermined time, the auxiliary symbol processing is terminated.

Next, in step S211, the main CPU 50a determines whether or not the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol. If the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol, in step S212, the auxiliary game flag is turned ON, and the auxiliary symbol processing ends.
In step S211, when it is determined that the stop symbol is not a winning symbol, the auxiliary symbol process is terminated without turning on the auxiliary game flag.
Further, when it is determined in step S202 that the auxiliary symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S209, and it is determined whether or not the variation time of the auxiliary symbol has passed a predetermined variation time.

[Grand Prize Opening Process]
FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az determines whether or not the small winning game flag or the special game flag is ON in step S221, and if it determines that the small winning game flag or special game flag is ON, determines whether or not opening is in progress in step S222. If it is determined in step S222 that the opening of the jackpot is in progress, then in step S223 it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S223 that the opening time has elapsed, in step S224, the value of the number of rounds R is set to "0" and the number of rounds (R number)/operation pattern is set.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a setting example of the number of rounds/operation pattern. For example, if the special game is a long win with normal working hours, the number of rounds (number of R) is set to 4R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 29.5 seconds open×1 time. In addition, when the jackpot is a short win with normal working hours, the number of rounds (number of R) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open×1 time. Further, when the jackpot is a long hit with a high probability of shortening working hours, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 16R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 29.5 seconds open × 1 time, and when the big hit is a short hit with a high probability of short working hours and a short hit without a high probability of working hours, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open × 1 time.
In the case of a small hit, for example, the number of rounds (number of R) is set to 1R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open×2 times.

Next, in step S225, the main CPU 50az sets the number counter C, which indicates the number of prizes won per round to the first big prize opening 16 or the second big prize opening 17z, to "0", and adds "1" to the value of the number of rounds R in the subsequent step S226. Then, in the subsequent step S227, the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is started. In other words, either the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is changed from the closed state to the open state.

Next, in step S228, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the operating time of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z has passed the predetermined time. If it is determined that the operating time has not passed the predetermined time, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the value of the number counter C has reached the specified number in the subsequent step S229.
When it is determined in step S229 that the value of the number counter C is the specified number C, in step S230, the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is terminated. In other words, the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z in the open state is closed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, the big winning opening process is terminated.
Further, in step S228, if the operating time of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z has passed the predetermined operating time, the process of step S229 is skipped, and the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z ends in step S230 without checking the number of the number counter C.

Next, in step S231, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the number of rounds for the big win is the maximum number of rounds R. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot round is the final round.
When it is determined in step S231 that the jackpot round is the final round, the ending is started in step S232, and an ending command is set in step S233.

Next, the main CPU 50az sets the value of the number of rounds R to "0" in step S234. Thereafter, in step S235, it is determined whether or not the ending time has passed, and if it is determined that the ending time has passed, then in the subsequent step S236, a game state setting process, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S237, the special game flag is turned OFF, and the big winning opening process ends.
If it is determined in step S222 that the opening of the jackpot is not in progress, it is determined in step S238 whether or not the ending is in progress.If it is determined that the ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S235.If it is determined that the ending is not in progress, it is determined in step S239 whether or not the big winning opening is in operation.

In step S239, when it is determined that the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is in operation, the process moves to step S228, and when it is determined that the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is not in operation, the process moves to step S225.
If it is determined in step S221 that the opening time has not passed, the big winning opening process is terminated. Similarly, when it is determined in step S229 that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, in step S231 it is determined that the big winning round is not the final round, or in step S235 it is determined that the ending time has not passed, the big winning opening processing is terminated.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing an example of game state setting processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S241, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not it is a small win, and when it is determined that it is a small win, ends the game state setting process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S241 that it is not a small win, then in step S242, it is determined whether or not it is a normal win (long win with normal time reduction or short win with normal time reduction).If it is determined to be a normal win, in step S243, the time reduction flag is turned ON, and in step S244, the remaining game count J of the time reduction game is set to, for example, "100", and the game state setting process ends.

Further, when it is determined in step S242 that it is not a normal win, it is a big win giving a high probability game, so in step S245, a high probability flag is turned ON, and in step S246, the number of remaining games X of the high probability game is set to, for example, "10000".

Next, in step S247, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the win is a time-saving win, and if it is determined to be a time-saving win, in step S248, the time-saving flag is turned ON, and in step S249, the remaining game count J of the time-saving game is set to, for example, "10000", and the game state setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S247 that there is no time-saving hit, the time-saving flag is turned OFF in step S250, and the remaining number of games J of the time-saving game is reset in step S251, thereby ending the game state setting process.

[Second start port opening process]
FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing an example of the second starting port opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in step S261, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON, then in step S262, it determines whether or not the second start opening/closing door 14bz is in operation. In step S262, if the second starting opening/closing door 14bz is not operating (opening), in step S263, the operation pattern of the second starting opening/closing door 14bz is set according to the game state, and in step S264, the operation of the second starting opening/closing door 14bz is started.
Here, the operation pattern (time) of the second starting opening opening and closing door 14bz to be set is, for example, if the time saving flag is OFF, 0.15 seconds open × 1 time, and if the time saving flag is ON, 1.80 seconds open × 3 times.

Next, in step S265, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the operating time of the second starting opening/closing door 14bz has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the predetermined operating time has passed, in step S266, the auxiliary game flag is turned OFF, and the second starting opening opening process ends.
If it is determined in step S262 that the second opening/closing door 14bz is in operation, the process proceeds to step S265.
Also, in step S261, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, or in step S265, when it is determined that the operating time of the second starting port 14z has not elapsed, the second starting port opening process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13z when the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 are stopped, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random value for jackpot symbol determination, the random value for reach determination, etc. are acquired by lottery, and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20z is displayed in a variable manner. Let Then, when it is determined that the acquired random number for special symbol determination wins the special game, the first special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20z is stopped at a specific symbol. After that, any one of the above-described long win, short win, or small win special game is executed.

During the long winning game, a game ball can be shot by shooting a game ball aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z which is in the open state.
On the other hand, during the short winning game, since the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, even if the game ball is shot aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z, it is almost impossible to win the ball.

Similarly, for example, when the game ball enters the second starting port 14z while the variation of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random value for jackpot symbol determination, the random number value for ready-to-win determination, etc. are obtained by lottery, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 21 is variably displayed.
Then, when it is determined that the obtained random number for special symbol determination wins the special game, the second special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped at a specific symbol. After that, the above-described special game of either the big win (long win or short win) or the small win is executed. During the long winning game, a ball can be obtained by shooting a game ball aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z which is in an open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, similarly to the above, during the short winning game, since the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, even if the game ball is shot aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z, it is almost impossible to get the ball.

After the jackpot game is over, based on the lottery result of the random number value for judging the jackpot pattern, as a privilege game, a normal time-saving game that performs a time-saving game accompanied by opening support of the second start opening/closing door 14bz for a predetermined period, a high-probability time-saving game that performs the above time-saving game and a high-probability game with a high probability of winning the jackpot for a predetermined period (so-called probability variable game), or a high-probability time-saving game that performs only high-probability games for a predetermined period (so-called latent probability change). game) to any game state.
The high-probability game is continued until the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a preset number of times (for example, 10000 times), or until the jackpot is won again.

On the other hand, the time-saving game is continued until the number of fluctuations of special symbols reaches a preset set number (for example, 100 times for a normal time-saving game, 10000 times for a high-probability time-saving game) or until a big hit is won again.
During the time saving game, the variation time from the start of variation of the special symbols to the stop of variation is set shorter than during the normal game, and the winning probability of the auxiliary symbols is set higher than during the normal game.
Furthermore, the opening time of the second starting port opening/closing door 14bz at the time of winning the auxiliary symbol is set longer than during the normal game.
Therefore, during the time-saving game, the winning rate of the game balls to the second start port 14z is higher than that during the normal game, so that the player shoots the game balls aiming at the second start port 14z, thereby greatly improving the game efficiency compared to the normal game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a higher ratio of winning a jackpot advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the second start port 14z than when the game ball enters the first start port 13z, so that the player is more likely to win the jackpot advantageous to the player during the time-saving game than during the normal game.

Next, processing executed by the effect control board 55z will be described.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Figure 216 is the flowchart which shows one example of timer interrupt processing which CPU of production control baseplate executes. In addition, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 216 can be realized by executing a program stored in the sub ROM 55bz by the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z executes command reception processing (step S310), effect button processing (step S320), command transmission processing (step S330), etc. as timer interrupt processing.

Next, an example of main processing which sub CPU55az of production control board 55z performs as timer interruption processing is explained. In addition, the processing described below can also be realized by executing the program stored in the sub ROM 55bz by the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z.

[Command reception processing]
Figure 217 is the flowchart which shows one example of command reception processing which CPU of production control baseplate executes.
The sub CPU 55az determines in step S401 whether or not a command to increase the number of reservations has been received. If it is determined that a command to increase the number of reservations has been received, in step S402, the sub CPU 55az executes a reservation number increase command reception process.
Next, in step S403, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not a variation start command has been received. If it is determined that a variation start command has been received, the sub CPU 55az executes effect selection processing in subsequent step S404.
The effect selection process of step S404 is a process of selecting the effect to be performed during the variation of the special symbols.
If it is determined in step S403 that the variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S405 without executing the effect selection process.

Next, in step S405, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not a variation stop command has been received. When determining that a variation stop command has been received, in subsequent step S406, the sub CPU 55az executes processing during termination of the variation effect.
As the processing during the end of the fluctuation production, there are analysis of the fluctuation stop command, various processing such as change of the mode flag based on the analysis result, and processing of setting the end command of the fluctuation production.
In addition, in step S405, when it determines with not having received the fluctuation|variation stop command, it progresses to step S407, without performing a process during the fluctuation production completion.

Next, in step S407, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not an opening command has been received. If it is determined that an opening command has been received, then in subsequent step S408 a special game effect selection process is executed.
The special game effect selection processing includes analysis of an opening command, special game effect pattern selection processing, processing for setting an opening effect start command, and the like.
If it is determined in step S407 that the opening command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S409 without executing the special game effect selection process.

Next, in step S409, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not an ending command for executing the ending effect selection process has been received, and when it is determined that the ending command has been received, in subsequent step S410, the ending effect selection process is executed.
The ending effect selection processing includes processing for analyzing an ending command, selecting an ending effect pattern, and setting an ending effect start command.
If it is determined in step S409 that the ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S411 without executing the ending effect selection process.
Next, in step S411, the sub CPU 55az executes a customer waiting command reception process and terminates the command reception process.

[Production selection process]
Figure 218 is the flowchart which shows one example of the production selection processing which CPU of the production control baseplate executes.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az first analyzes the variation start command in step S421, and subtracts the number of pending balls stored in the sub RAM 55cz in subsequent step S422.
Next, in step S423, a variation performance pattern is selected based on the analysis result of the variation start command, and in subsequent step S424, the variation performance start command is set, and the performance selection process ends.

[Processing during end of fluctuation effect]
Figure 219 is the flowchart which shows one example of the processing during the end of fluctuation production which CPU of production control baseplate executes.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the variable stop command in step S431, performs various processes such as changing the mode flag based on the analysis result, and then sets a variable performance end command in the next step S432 to end the variable performance ending process.

[Opening effect selection process]
FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing an example of a winning effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the opening command in step S441, and performs winning effect pattern selection processing in subsequent step S442. Thereafter, in step S443, an opening effect start command is set, and the opening effect selection process is terminated.

[Ending effect selection process]
FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing an example of the ending effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the ending command in step S451, and selects an ending effect pattern in subsequent step S452. Thereafter, in step S453, an ending effect start command is set, and the ending effect selection process is terminated.

<Main board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the main substrate protection case 200z according to this embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, common to the main board protection case 200z, the payout board protection case 400, and the effect board protection case 700, the game board 10z side is the front side with respect to the board case, and the direction opposite to the game board 10z is the rear side.
Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when each board case is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 10z.

222A and 222B are diagrams illustrating a main board protection case according to an example of the present embodiment, in which (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view. FIG. 223 is an exploded perspective view of the main board protection case including the pedestal. FIG. 224 is a side view showing how the main board protection case is attached to the base.
225 is a view for explaining the state in which the main board protection case of FIG. 222 is removed from the base, (a) being a perspective view, (b) a side view, and (c) a front view. 226 is a rear perspective view of the main board protective case of FIG. 225; FIG.
The main board protection case (hereinafter simply referred to as the main board case) 200 of the present embodiment accommodates the main control board 50 on which electronic components such as a ROM are mounted, and is attached to the back of a game machine such as a pachinko game machine via a pedestal 280 (see FIGS. 222 to 224).

The main board case 200z includes two case pieces (lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220) made of transparent resin that house the main control board (printed circuit board) 50 on which the ROM is mounted. and a cap 240 detachably attached to the portion 310 .
The main control board 50 of this embodiment employs a single-sided mounting method in which electronic components are arranged only on one side.
By mounting important electronic parts (particularly ROM) only on one side and facing the mounting side to the side visible from the outside (rear side), it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts such as replacement of electronic parts.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
Although the two case pieces forming the main board case 200z are described as a lower case piece and an upper case piece, the positional relationship between the case pieces is different from the vertical direction shown in the drawing.
For the sake of convenience, the back side case piece is referred to as the lower case piece, and the front side case piece is referred to as the upper case piece when viewed from the inspector's viewpoint.
A protective cover 229 is arranged below the upper case piece 220 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 50 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 50 interposed therebetween by a crimping member.

A crimping fastening portion 290 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main substrate case 200z, and the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state by driving (locking) the crimping member (locking member) into a fastening hole 291 (sealing portion) provided in the crimping fastening portion 290. The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 can be opened and closed and can be attached and detached by removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the fastening hole 291 .
The crimping fastening portion 290 of the main substrate case 200z of the present embodiment is provided with two crimping fastening holes (crimping fastening holes 291A and 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole is configured by connecting a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 .

As will be described later, when the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are engaged with each other using the hooking groove and the hooking piece, by driving a crimping member into one of the crimping fastening holes 291, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 cannot be slid to release their engagement.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the main control board 50 housed inside the main board case.
Only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 once. After removing (breaking) the crimping member and releasing the fastening (after opening the main substrate case 200z), when fastening is performed again, the fastening is performed by driving the crimping member into the remaining other crimping fastening hole. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.
In the main board case 200z of this embodiment (for example, FIG. 225), for example, a crimping member is driven into the crimping fastening hole 291B on the lower side in the drawing.

The pedestal 280 is connecting means for attaching the main board case 200z to the game machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 166) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
A main board case 200z housing a main control board is assembled with a lower case piece 210 attached to the back surface of a game board such as a pachinko game machine through a pedestal 280, so that the electronic parts mounted on the inner control board surface can be visually recognized from the back side of the game board through the upper case piece 220.例文帳に追加
Further, by rotating the main circuit board case 200z upward about the shaft portion 281 located on the upper part of the pedestal 280, the inside of the main circuit board case can be confirmed from the bottom surface of the transparent lower case piece 210. FIG.

The main board case assembly 200A in which the main board case 200z is attached to the pedestal 280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 222-224, the main board case assembly 200A includes a pedestal 280, a main board case 200z, and a protective cover 229. As shown in FIGS. The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200z to the rear side of the game board 10z (see FIG. 222).
As shown in FIG. 223, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with two sides extending in the horizontal direction longer than the two sides extending in the vertical direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 281 coincides with the left-right direction.
A pair of hook portions 249 that engage with the shaft portions 281 are provided on the main board case 200z. A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of an upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U shape that protrudes toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 224, when attaching the main circuit board case 200z to the pedestal 280, the main circuit board case 200z is arranged so that the hook portion 249 protrudes toward the back side. As a result, the hooks 249 can be engaged with the shafts 281 , so the main board case 200 z is brought closer to the pedestal 280 to engage the hooks 249 with the shafts 281 .
Then, when the hook portion 249 engages the shaft portion 281, the main substrate case 200z is rotated about the shaft portion 281 counterclockwise in left side view (direction of arrow C in FIG. 224) to overlap the main substrate case 200z with the pedestal 280. As shown in FIG. 222, at this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the base 280 is hooked on the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the main board case 200z is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200z.

As shown in Figures 222 and 223, the protective cover 229 is then attached to the main board case 200z. Protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of main board case 200z including hook portion 249 . Thus, the main board case assembly 200A is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board 10z.
The main control board 50 and the main board case 200z will be described. As shown in FIG. 225, the main control board 50 for controlling games is accommodated in the main board case 200z. An integrated main ROM 502 is mounted on the main control board 50 . A plurality of electronic components 595 different from the integrated main ROM 502 are mounted on the main control board 50 . The plurality of electronic components 595 includes various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Also, as shown in FIG. 225(b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the main control board 50. FIG. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 225(b) and may be omitted in other drawings.

The integrated main ROM 502 stores memory contents used for game control. The integrated main ROM 502 also stores memory contents that affect game results.
The integrated main ROM 502 is a one-chip microcomputer integrating the main CPU 50az, main ROM 50bz, and main RAM 50cz shown in FIG.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right on the lower portion of the main control board 50 . A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

A plurality of connectors 774 and 775 out of the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are called detection signal connectors 774 and 775 . The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 receive signals from at least some of the first starting opening detection switch 13az, the second starting opening detection switch 14az, the first large winning opening detection switch 16az, the second large winning opening detection switch 17az, and the general winning opening detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196). In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 receive all the signals of the first start hole detection switch 13az, the second start hole detection switch 14az, the first big win hole detection switch 16az, the second big win hole detection switch 17az, and the general win hole detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196). The detection signal connectors 774 , 775 are a different color than the other connectors 771 , 772 , 773 , 776 . In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different from fluorescent.

The integrated main ROM 502 has a plate-like main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582 . A first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits signals between the integrated main ROM 502 and the main control board 50 . The first signal pin 582 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the body portion 580 of the integrated main ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Therefore, the first signal pin 582 is visible from the front through the main board case 200z.
A signal pin provided for each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is called a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 223). The second signal pins 583 transmit signals between each of the electronic components 595 and the main control board 50 . A signal is not limited to a digital signal, and includes an analog signal. They are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the main board case 200z.
As shown in FIG. 223, the main board case 200z is a box-shaped case that accommodates the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner.

A detailed configuration of the main board case 200z and a table attached to the main board case and the included main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 234. FIG.
196 and 197, the performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 will be described with reference to FIG. 255 and subsequent figures, and will not be described here.
The main board case 200z encloses the main control board 50 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 225(b)) mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized. The main board case 200z is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic.
As described above, the lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form the enclosing part 581 for enclosing the main control board 50 . The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side, which is the integrated main ROM 502 side, in the main board case 200z. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side opposite to the integrated main ROM 502 side in the main board case 200z. Note that FIG. 225(b) shows only the integrated main ROM 502 among the electrical components provided on the main control board 50 contained in the transparent main board case 200z, and the other electrical components are omitted (the same applies to FIG. 227(a), etc.).

As shown in FIG. 226, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 respectively include control board housing portions 211 and 221 for housing the main control board 50 (see FIG. 223), and sealing portions 212 and 222 that constitute a sealing base portion 310 (see FIG. 227), which will be described later. The control board housing portions 211 and 221 are formed to have substantially rectangular plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and flange portions 211b and 221b projecting from the peripheral edges of the plate portions 211a and 221a and surrounding one side surfaces of the plate portions 211a and 221a.
Further, as shown in FIG. 223, the left portion of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210 is provided with a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 50 side. A hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 . A thread is formed inside the hole 566 . A hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565 in the main control board 50 .

The main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . More specifically, behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 50 is arranged. The shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 225) is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 50 into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 via the hole portion 567 . The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 225(b)). As a result, the main control board 50 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565 so that the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . That is, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

As shown in FIG. 226, of the flange portion 211b of the control board housing portion 211, three L-shaped hooking pieces 211c are formed in each portion (hereinafter referred to as “male portion”) protruding from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a.
On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board housing portion 221, the portion that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along the two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) is formed into a double wall shape, and an insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board housing portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 50 is screwed with screws 769 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are slid to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 226 along the horizontal direction. Then, the hooking piece 211c provided on the male portion is engaged with the hooking piece 221d, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.
When combined in this manner, the control board housings 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope 581 that is internally shielded from the outside. The main control board 50 (see FIG. 223) is accommodated in the encapsulating portion 581 . Therefore, the possibility that the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the like are illegally replaced can be suppressed.

The main control board 50 is attached inside the control board housing portion 221 before the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the main control board 50 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221a of the control board housing portion 221. As shown in FIG. This is because the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 200z, it is possible to check from the outside via the plate portion 221a whether or not electronic components such as the integrated main ROM 502 mounted on the main control board 50 have been illegally replaced. As shown in FIG. 197, in this embodiment, when the main board case assembly 200A including the main board case 200z is attached to the game board 10z, the electronic components mounted on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200z can be visually recognized from the back side of the game machine 1 through the upper case piece 220.

As shown in FIG. 226, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively. As shown in FIG. 227, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw-stopping piece 91 and a second screw-stopping piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222, respectively.
When the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the sealing base portion 310 is formed by the sealing portions 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end portions of the sealing body 300 that combines them.
As shown in FIG. 225, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 over the sealing base portion 310, the first screwing piece 91, the second screwing piece 92, and the third screwing piece 93 included in the cap 240 are overlapped on the ends of the sealing body 300 in the longitudinal direction to form a screwing portion 90z for screwing.

As shown in FIG. 226 , the sealing portions 212 and 222 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board housing portions 211 and 221 . The sealing portions 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the horizontal direction and the same width in the vertical direction.
Long groove portions 212a and 222a are formed in the respective sealing portions 212 and 222 along the horizontal direction. Two parallel grooves 222a are formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 222 at a predetermined interval, and one groove 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 in the left-right direction.
As shown in FIG. 227, when the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined as described above, the sealing portions 212 and 222 form the sealing base portion 310 on the right side of the combined control board storage portions 211 and 221.
In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged parallel to each other with a certain interval therebetween, and an insertion/removal space 310a (see FIG. 227) is formed between the faces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other.

As shown in FIG. 226, the unsealable seal 250 is used as means for sealing the main circuit board case 200z, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having authentication qualifications.
The unsealable seal 250 is made of an easy-to-cut material such as paper, and has an adhesive surface on one side, and has a plurality of cuts. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the unsealable seal 250 . The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is also printed with the words "unsealing prohibited".
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of knob portions 61z, and a cutting portion 64z. A base portion 230a serving as the base of the cutting member 230 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64z is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 64z is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The gripping portions 61z are provided at both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed in a shape that is bent as a whole. A left end portion of the knob portion 61z is referred to as a free end portion 61az.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be put on the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310 and is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 .
The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310 and a third screw-fastening piece 93 formed at one longitudinal end of the cap body 241 . A protrusion 82z is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 61az of the knob 61z of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. A groove portion 86z is formed on the inner side surface of the cap main body 241 .
The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a of the sealing base portion 310 (see FIG. 227). After that, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is affixed. Furthermore, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 86z fits a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. Also, the projection 82z engages the free end 61az of the knob 61z of the cutting member 230. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 225, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310 as described above, the third screw-stopping piece 93 overlaps the combination of the first screw-stopping piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screw-stopping piece 92 of the upper case piece 220 to form a screw-stopping portion 90z for screwing. The lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other when the crimping member 94 is driven into the screwing portion 90z.
When unsealing the main substrate case 200z, the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310. As shown in FIG. The same applies when the main board case 200z is unsealed.
Cutting member 230 and cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the unsealable seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 64z or the like.

The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 223, identification marks 520 are attached to main control board 50, integrated main ROM 502, lower case piece 210, upper case piece 220, and cap 240. FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 50 is referred to as identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523 , and the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524 .
The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called an identification mark 525 .

As shown in FIG. 223, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification 522 is affixed to integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200z are information identification portions for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 . A display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identifications 521 - 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification 529 . In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification 529 among the identifications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, and the like. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name and "CD" represents the model name.
In the identification displays 521 to 525, the maker name itself may be displayed like "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed like "CR Aiu" in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. Further, the identification indications 521 to 525 may display the model, such as the identification indications 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In this case, the same identification display among the identification displays 521 to 525 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company".

In the following description, the surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the inside of the main board case 200z is referred to as an inner surface 532. As shown in FIG. A surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the outside of the main board case 200z is referred to as an outer surface 531 . As shown in FIGS. 222(c), 225(c), and 227, the outer surface 531 is provided with a position display portion 541. As shown in FIGS. The position display portion 541 is a portion that displays the position to which the identification display 523 is provided. The position display portion 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main substrate case 200z. More specifically, the position display portion 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the upper case piece 220 . The integrated main ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a concave portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 225(b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmissive material is attached to the position display portion 541. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example.
A printed portion 797 is printed on the seal body (base portion) of the seal portion 542 .
All of the seal portions attached to all substrate cases described later are common in that printing (printing) is performed on the adhesive seal body (base portion), or a writable base is formed on the seal body (base portion).
In this embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is the identification display 523 .
Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542 , the identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 . The seal portion 542 is arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main substrate case 200z. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main substrate case 200z when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 225(b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and actually other electronic components (see FIG. 223) also exist. The identification display 523 of the upper case piece 220 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . As with the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 234) in the modified example described later, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 when the main board case 200z is at a predetermined angle. In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 .

As described above, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a main board case 200z containing the main control board 50 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 222, 223, 225, and 227, the main circuit board case 200z is provided with a position display portion 541 which is a portion for displaying the position where the identification mark 523 is provided. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main circuit board case 200 as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, when the game machine 1 is manufactured, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position where the identification display 520 is provided, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification mark 523 is given by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification mark 523 is given at different positions among the plurality of game machines 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main circuit board case 200z as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the position display portion 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200z and is a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display portion 541, which is a concave portion, is provided, it is easier for the inspector to grasp the position of the position display portion 541 than when the position display portion 541 is displayed on the plane of the main substrate case 200z by printing or the like.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
In addition, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the concave position mark portion 541 . Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the game machines 1, the identification display 520 can be attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1. FIG. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the position display portion 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main substrate case 200z. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display unit 541 and the integrated main ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the integrated main ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily discover that the integrated main ROM 502 has been replaced by fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the identification display 523 that is the information identification portion attached to the main board case 200z and the identification display 522 that is the information identification portion attached to the integrated main ROM 502 include at least the same identification display 529 . In addition, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Further, in this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . Since the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting position of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized, an inspector can easily confirm that the main board case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502 attached with the same identification mark 529 are not being fraudulent. Further, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraud, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraud has been committed by determining whether the integrated main ROM 502 and the identification display 529 attached to the main substrate case 200z are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the identification display 523, which is the information identification portion attached to the main board case 200z, the identification display 522, which is the information identification portion attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and the identification display 521, which is the information identification portion displayed on the main control board 50, include at least the same identification display 529 (character string "ABCD" in this embodiment). Therefore, the inspector can easily check that the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200 with the same identification mark 529 have not been tampered with. Further, even if at least one of the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced by another main control board 50 and integrated main ROM 502 due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been committed by determining whether the identification marks 529 attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main substrate case 200z are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The main board case 200z encloses the main control board 50 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, they are easier for the inspector to visually recognize than when they are not fluorescent. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

A plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 than when there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
A first signal pin 582 included in the integrated main ROM 502 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the first signal pin 582 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Also, the second signal pins 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the second signal pin 583 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side with screws 769 (see FIG. 225(b)). For this reason, compared with the case where the main control board 50 is not fixed with screws, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Also, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are slid and combined with each other. Therefore, even if a person who tries to commit fraud simply separates the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 in order to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are hardly separated. Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications are possible. In each modified example below, the same reference numerals are used to denote the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Although the position display portion 541 is a concave portion, it is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, the position display portion 541 may be a convex portion.

228 to 230 are diagrams showing modifications of the position display section provided on the main board case.
FIG. 228 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modification of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 228, the position display portion 541 is a protrusion formed on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 .
Further, although the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 .

FIG. 229 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modification of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 229, the position display portion 541 is a concave portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and concaved rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 through the transparent upper case piece 220 from the rear side of the main substrate case 200z.

FIG. 230 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modification of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 230, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes forward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the board case through the transparent upper case piece 220 .
As described above, the position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the main circuit board case 200z and is a projection or recess for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display portion 541, which is a convex portion and a concave portion, is provided, for example, compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the plane of the main substrate case 200z, it is easier for the inspector to grasp the position of the identification display 520. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 520 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the position mark portion 541, which is a projection or a recess. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the game machines 1, the identification display 520 can be attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1. FIG. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the plurality of members enclosing the main control board 50 may not include some of the upper case piece 220 , the lower case piece 210 and the cap 240 . Moreover, the plurality of members may further include members different from the upper case piece 220 , the lower case piece 210 and the cap 240 .

Further, although the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the plurality of members are provided with the identification marks 520, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members may be provided with associated identification marks 520 . For example, the identification mark 525 may not be attached to the cap 240 included in the plurality of members. Further, the lower case piece 210 included in the plurality of members may not have the identification mark 524 attached. Further, the identification mark 523 may not be attached to the upper case piece 220 included in the plurality of members. The inspector can check the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members, and can easily check whether or not fraud has been committed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been committed by determining whether or not the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members are related to each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least two of the main control board 50 , the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 . In this case, the inspector can check the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210, and can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been committed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been committed by determining whether or not the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210 are related. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502 . In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the identification display 520 attached to the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been committed. For example, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraud, an inspector can easily confirm that the fraud has been committed by determining whether or not at least the upper case piece 220 and the identification display 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 are related. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the identification marks 520 may be related to each other. For example, the identification indications 520 may all be the same identification indication (for example, all "ABCD01" etc.). Further, the identification indications 520 may be different indications, and the same identification indications 529 may not be included. The content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Also, the identification display 520 may not be a character string. For example, identifying indicia 520 may be various markings. Also, the manner in which the identification mark 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification mark 521 but all of the identification marks 521 to 525 may be printed on the seal portion. Also, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Also, the identification marks 523 to 525 may all be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the main board case 200z.

In the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion 542, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark surrounding the entire periphery of the seal portion 542 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case to which the seal portion 542 is attached, or an L-shaped mark on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portion 542 is attached.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542 on the same plane as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542 .

The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542 on the back surface of the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542 on the same plane as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear concave portion provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542 on the same surface as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection and recess provided so as to surround a predetermined corner on the back surface of the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark provided to surround the seal portion 542 and is neither a protrusion nor a recess.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be formed inside the material of the main board case 200z.
231 and 232 are diagrams showing a modification in which an identification mark is formed on the main board case.
The modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232. FIG. In the main circuit board case shown in FIG. 231, the portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is called an identification display portion 1390. As shown in FIG. Also, a portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outer portion 1391 . As shown in FIG. 232, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391 . Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 .
The identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display portion 1390 (the material of the upper case piece 220 in this embodiment). The identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of (four in this embodiment) layers 1381 , 1382 , 1383 , and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display portion 1390 .
Character 1371 of “A” of identification display 523 is formed in hierarchy 1381 . The letter “B” 1372 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . The letter “C” 1373 is formed in hierarchy 1383 . The letter “D” 1374 is formed in hierarchy 1384 . A “0” character 1375 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . Character 1376 of “3” is formed in hierarchy 1383 .

The method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 is not limited. Identification 523 may be formed, for example, by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technique of condensing a laser beam and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm inside the material of the main substrate case 200z. By forming a plurality of cracks, an identification mark 523 is formed inside the main substrate case 200z.
In this embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 . Therefore, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than, for example, when the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced. Also, if the identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, the main circuit board case shown in FIGS. 231 and 232 is damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 . Therefore, the identification display 523 is less likely to be removed than when the identification display 523 is formed on only one layer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
231 and 232, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. As shown in FIG. In this case, when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification mark 520, it is necessary to grind the main board case 200z deeper than when L1 is equal to or less than L2. For this reason, the main board case shown in FIGS. 231 and 232 is likely to be damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
It should be noted that the identification display 523 may not be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 . For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be less than or equal to the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 . Further, although the identification mark 523 has been described, the identification marks 524, 525, etc., and the identification mark 520 provided on the main board case in FIGS. 231 and 232 may be similarly formed inside the main board case in FIGS.

Also, various seals other than the seal portion 542 and the like may be attached to the main board case 200z. In addition, the contents displayed on the printed portion (for example, the printed portion 797) provided on various stickers such as the sticker portion 542 are not limited.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a modification of the main board case.
196 and 197, the performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 will be described with reference to FIG. 255 and subsequent figures, and will not be described here.
For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case according to the modification shown in FIG. In FIG. 233, members having the same configuration as in the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper portion of the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and are transparent as an example in this embodiment. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). In FIG. 233, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located on the front side of seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560 . The printing section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575 . The printing portion 1571 is colored, and has a white background as an example in this embodiment. Plurality of areas 1575 includes code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 . Seal portion 1560 is provided so that print portion 1571 , code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 do not overlap integrated main ROM 502 .
Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code portion 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. Information displayed on the information portable terminal as a result of accessing the other device includes information such as the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the game machine 1 has been discarded. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area of the information display portion 1573 . The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper left is printed in black the words "opener". Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right side. It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 has a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595 . Peeping portions 1574 are provided between a plurality of regions 1575 . The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction. Between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged in the left and right direction and the upper two entry areas 1570, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left and right direction is provided. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 in two columns in the horizontal direction.

Also, the seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . The seal portion 1562 is pasted on the left side of the identification display 523 “ABCD02” of the integrated main ROM 502 . Seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

Moreover, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient that some of them are the same.
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562 .
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main substrate case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the identification indications 1595 and 1596 may be included and displayed on the main control board 50 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Therefore, for example, by confirming the positional relationship between the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 and the electronic component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Also, since an area 1575 is provided, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). In addition, the inspector can also enter in the area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with. Moreover, since the peep portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the peep portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 50 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. FIG. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the integrated main ROM 502 has been illegally replaced by checking the seal portion 1562 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
In addition, since at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 225, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Further, when the body portion 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the top surface or the bottom surface of the body portion 580 .
Various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed at an angle such that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized.
For example, FIG. 234 is a diagram of the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 viewed obliquely from above. In FIG. 234, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . That is, FIG. 234 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . However, as shown in FIG. 233, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 233 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle where the integrated main ROM 502 mounting location can be visually recognized. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, the information of the identification display 523) may be displayed at an angle such that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized.

<Board structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board accommodated in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to that described above.
235 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, FIG. 235(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (front side) of the main control board, and FIG. 235(b) is a view showing the configuration of the solder side (back side) of the main control board.
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used for the main control board, FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component surface (front surface) of the printed circuit board, and FIG. 236(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the printed circuit board.

As shown in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), the main control board 50 uses a printed wiring board 701 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG.
Furthermore, the printed wiring board 701 employs an insertion mounting method in which various electronic components such as an insertion mounting type (through-hole mounting type) resistor R, a capacitor C, a transistor Tr, and an IC, and a connector CN are mounted in through holes (component insertion holes) formed in the board.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 236, a printed wiring board 701 is provided with through holes (component insertion holes) 702 for inserting leads of various electronic components. In this case, connection electrodes (connection lands) 703 are provided around the through holes 702 on the solder surface 701b side of the printed wiring board 701 .

The connection electrodes 703 are electrodes for connecting, for example, by soldering the leads of the electronic component inserted into the through holes 702 from the component surface 701a side of the printed wiring board 701. When the leads of the electronic component are connected by soldering, the electronic component and the wiring pattern on the board are electrically connected and the electronic component is mechanically held.
That is, the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 701 having through holes 702 into which the leads of the insertion mount type electronic component can be inserted.

237 is a view showing the main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 is housed, (a) showing a perspective view of the assembly, and (b) showing a front view of the assembly. Also, FIG. 238 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
222 to 234, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . The identification display 520 provided on the control board 50 is called an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is called an identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523 , and the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524 . The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called an identification mark 525 .

The identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification 522 is affixed to integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200z are information identification portions for displaying specific information.
The position display portion 541 is, for example, a recess formed in the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and is recessed rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 .
The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 .
In FIGS. 237 and 238, members having the same configuration as in the above-described embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 222 to 234) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z.
Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). In FIG. 237, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located on the front side of seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.
In this example, a watermark for anti-counterfeiting is provided on the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 .
A “watermark” is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle. In general, a seal with a watermark has a lower translucency of the base portion, which is the main body of the seal, compared to a seal without a watermark, resulting in lower visibility through the seal.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560 . The printing section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575 . The printing portion 1571 is colored, and has a white background as an example in this embodiment. Plurality of areas 1575 includes code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 . Seal portion 1560 is provided so that print portion 1571 , code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 do not overlap integrated main ROM 502 .

That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is provided with an entry area 1570 for entering the person who opened the main circuit board case 200z and the date of opening.
Seal portion 1560 is made of a transparent material. For example, a total of six entry areas 1570 are formed in a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number", with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the seal portion 1560 is a seal for main board management.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
The transparent material is exposed except for each printing and entry area 1570 (white background), and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles through a transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the three columns of writing areas 1570 do not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
The entry areas 1570 provided in the seal portion 1560 are arranged in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six, and three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.

On the other hand, as described above, the main board case 200z has two crimped portions (crimped fastening holes 291, ie, closed portions) (crimped fastening holes 291A and 291B).
In other words, the number of crimped portions (closed portions) provided on the main substrate case 200z is equal to or less than the number of opener and opening date entry fields provided on the seal portion 1560 affixed to the main substrate case 200z.
By providing more entry fields than the actual number of openings, it is possible to deal with errors and other errors, and it is possible to deal more flexibly than when the number of crimped parts and the entry fields are the same.
In the main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the ROM 502 has a plate-like main body 580 and a plurality of first signal pins 582, as described above.
However, the integrated main ROM 502 shown in FIGS.
A seal portion 1562, which will be described later, is attached to the main surface orthogonal to the substrate surface.

The contents displayed on the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code portion 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. Information displayed on the information portable terminal as a result of accessing the other device includes information such as the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the game machine 1 has been discarded. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper left is printed in black as "Opener". Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right side. It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 has a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic components 595 on the main control board 50 . Peeping portions 1574 are provided between a plurality of regions 1575 . The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction. Between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged in the left and right direction and the upper two entry areas 1570, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left and right direction is provided. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 in two columns in the horizontal direction.

Also, the seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage and total capacity is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" including the model, the manufacturer name "AA company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the portion where the model name is displayed, a base is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against a transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white on the base.

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . The seal portion 1562 is pasted on the left side of the identification display 523 “ABCD02” of the integrated main ROM 502 . Seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562 .
Moreover, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient that some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main substrate case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the identification indications 1595 and 1596 may be included and displayed on the main control board 50 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Therefore, for example, by checking the positional relationship between the seal portions 1560 and 1561 and the electronic component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
In addition, since a region 1575 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date of opening the main substrate case 200z in the region 1575 (more specifically, the entry region 1570). In addition, the inspector can also enter in the area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with. Also, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, since the seal portion 1560 is provided with the viewing portion 1574 , the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the peeping portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 50 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. FIG. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the integrated main ROM 502 has been illegally replaced by checking the seal portion 1562 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
In addition, since at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Note that the shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 225, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Further, when the body portion 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the top surface or the bottom surface of the body portion 580 .
Also, various information displayed on the seal portions 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200z, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have a ventilation hole.
The main board case 200z has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 .
The date mark is a mark for lot management added during manufacturing (molding) of the case, which is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of the present embodiment, a component having a height that makes the ROM identification seal (ROM seal/seal portion 1562) invisible is not provided near the main ROM.

239(a) to (d) are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for assembling the cutting member, the unsealing prevention seal, and the cap to the sealing base portion, centering on the projecting piece of the upper case piece, FIG. 239(e) is an end view of the projecting piece, FIG. 243 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to an unsealable seal, FIG. 243 is a perspective view showing a state in which the unsealable seal is broken by detaching the cap, and FIGS.
The cutting member 230 shown in FIGS. 239-243 has a partially different construction than that shown in FIG. 226, but is the same in breaking the tamper-evident seal when the cap is removed, and is similarly applied.

<Seal for prohibiting opening>
As a means for sealing the main board case 200z having the structure described above, an unsealing prohibition seal 250 shown in FIG. 244(a) is used. The unsealable seal 250 is made of a paper material that can be cut and broken relatively easily, and has security (counterfeit prevention) printing or the like on its surface, and an adhesive layer is formed on its back surface.
The band-shaped portions 251 arranged along the upper and lower sides of the surface are identification regions (fine pattern regions) 251 for authenticity identification (anti-counterfeiting) composed of fine components including random microcharacters. As means for security other than the identification area 251, a hologram 252, a QR code (registered trademark) 253, and the like are provided.
Random micro-character is a technology that inserts extremely minute characters into lines or parts of designs. Since microcharacters cannot be duplicated by copiers with low resolution, they are one of the means of confirming the authenticity of reproductions.

FIG. 244(b) is a 10-fold enlarged view of a portion of the identification area (fine pattern area) provided on the unsealing prohibition seal 250, in which hidden characters such as "unsealing prohibition" and "security" are written in the pattern of fine circles or dots.
By adhering the unsealing prohibition seal 250 across the two case pieces forming the main substrate case, the identification area 251 is always broken when the case is illegally opened. Even if the fraudulent person replaces the ROM, closes the case body and the cover body again, joins the broken parts of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 together, and restores the appearance to the original state, the existence of the broken part and the repaired part can be surely confirmed by discriminating the identification area (other parts) with a magnifying glass.

Fine characters such as random microcharacters cannot be distinguished (decoded, recognized, identified) with the naked eye, so they can be distinguished only by using a magnifying glass such as a loupe to magnify them 5 to 10 times. For example, when individual characters have a minute size of 1/10 to 1/5 mm, it is difficult to distinguish and read them with the naked eye.
The identification area 251 of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 of the present invention is not limited to random micro characters, and at least a part thereof may include minute (fine) characters, figures, symbols, and/or patterns that are difficult to distinguish (read, recognize, and identify) with the naked eye of an observer with normal vision. By enlarging these minute characters, the observer can distinguish, read, and judge authenticity.
The phrase "difficult to distinguish with the naked eye" broadly includes the case where the distinction is not impossible with the naked eye but is difficult, and the case where the distinction with the naked eye is impossible.
Needless to say, the method of arranging the identification area 251 on the unsealable seal, its shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

<Main structure of the main board case>
Next, the main structure of the main circuit board case will be described, focusing on the portion where the unsealing prohibition seal is adhered.
That is, when the main circuit board case 200z is in the closed state as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is adhered so as to straddle the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 (sealing base portion 310=unsealing prohibition seal adhered portion), so that both case pieces cannot be opened without breaking the unsealing prohibition seal 250. That is, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with sealing portions 212 and 222 at one end edge in the longitudinal direction, respectively. That is, both the sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at substantially the same position on one longitudinal edge of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, so that when the both case pieces are closed, both the sealing portions 212 and 222 are aligned to form a sealing base portion (unsealable seal adhesion portion).

In the present embodiment, the unsealable seal adhered portion (seal adhered portion) A is composed of both sealing portions 212 and 222, and the cutting member 230 is supported in a state sandwiched between the two protruding pieces. Alternatively, the cutting member 230 may be supported (temporarily locked) on the outer surface of one of the protruding pieces, or the unsealable seal adhered portion A may be composed of only one of the protruding pieces, and the cutting member may be supported by one surface of this one protruding piece.
In other words, the cutting member 230 may be held by at least one of the case pieces (protruding pieces) at the unsealing prevention seal adhered portion.
The substantially plate-shaped cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (between the edges) of the two lower case pieces 210 and the upper case piece 220 in the closed state.
The front end surface of the unsealable seal adhesion part A (each front end surface of both sealing parts 212 and 222) constitutes a first adhesion surface A1, and each outer surface of the sealing parts 212 and 222 orthogonal to the first adhesion surface A1 constitutes a second adhesion surface A2 (Figs. 239 and 240).
A housing space S for housing the cutting member 230 is provided inside the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive surface A2 (FIG. 240).

A first opening O1 communicating with the housing space S is formed on the first bonding surface A1, and a second opening O2 (guide slit 224) communicating with the housing space S is formed on the second bonding surface A2. In this embodiment, the upper case piece 220 is formed with two second openings O2, and the lower case piece 210 is formed with one second opening O2.
The unsealable seal 250 has a first seal adhesive portion 250A that covers all or part of the first opening O1 and is adhered to the first adhesive surface A1, and a second seal adhesive portion 250B that covers a portion of the second opening O2 and is adhered to the second adhesive surface A2 (Fig. 244).

The cap 240 is detachably attached to the outer surface of the sealing base 310 so as to surround (cover) the tamper-proof seal 250 adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base 310 . The cap 240 includes a cap body 241 that surrounds the outer surfaces of both protruding pieces (sealing base portion 310) including an unsealing prohibition seal 250, and a locking portion 242 (FIG. 225) that elastically engages with a cutting member 230 (locked portion 236) that is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 when attached to the sealing base portion 310. When the cap is detached from the sealing base portion, the cutting member is detached integrally to form the unsealing prohibition seal. Release while breaking.
A tubular crimping member 203A (third screw-stopping piece 93) is provided on one side of the cap 240. When the cap is mounted so as to cover both the sealing portions 212 and 222 and the unsealing seals as shown in FIGS. In this state, the cap is fixed to the upper and lower case pieces by inserting and crimping the crimp pin 94 (Fig. 225).
In the illustrated embodiment, the cap 240 surrounds the entire sealing portions 212 and 222 including the unsealable seal, but the cap may be configured to be attached to at least a portion of the sealing base portion (unsealable seal adhesion portion=cap attachment portion) 310 so as to surround at least a portion of the unsealable seal.

The cutting member 230 includes a blade portion (first broken piece) 231 provided at the tip edge in the direction (b) (FIG. 226) in which the cap 240 is separated from the sealing base portion 310, and a broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protruding in a direction intersecting (perpendicular to) the separating direction (b). One broken piece 233 is provided on the surface of the lower case piece on the side of the sealing portion 212 , and two broken pieces 233 are provided on the surface of the upper case piece on the side of the projecting piece 222 .
One second opening O2 (guide slit 224) for receiving one broken piece 233 is formed in the sealing portion 212 of the lower case piece, and two second openings O2 (guide slits 224) for receiving the two broken pieces 233 are formed in the projecting piece 222 on the upper case side.
By forming the cutting member 230 as a separate member from each case piece, the shape of the cutting means such as the blade portion 231 can be formed and processed independently and arbitrarily, and a structure that significantly breaks the unsealing prohibition seal is possible.

<Procedure for assembling each member and procedure for breaking the unsealable seal>
Next, referring to FIG. 241, the procedure for assembling the cutting member 230, the unsealing prevention seal 250 and the cap 240 to the sealing base portion 310 will be described centering on the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece.
In this embodiment, the cutting member 230 is configured to be temporarily locked against the inner surface of the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece. A pair of locking portions (temporary locking portions) 223 protrude from the inner surface (cutting member supporting portion) of the projecting piece 222. These locking portions 223 are configured to engage with and hold down the inner edges of two recesses (temporary locking portions) 232 provided at the rear end edge of the cutting member 230 mounted in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 241(a). A broken piece 233 is projected from the surface side of the cutting member, and a guide slit 224 is formed in the projecting piece 222 to allow passage of the broken piece 233 when the cutting member is attached to the inner surface of the projecting piece 222 from the direction of the arrow. Therefore, when the cutting member 230 is moved in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. At this time, since the broken piece 233 moves while being fitted in the guide slit 224, it does not become an obstacle during mounting.

By providing the broken pieces 233 on both sides of the cutting member 230 and providing the guide slits 224 in both sealing portions 212 and 222 as in the present embodiment, the unsealing prohibition seals adhered to the outer surfaces of both the sealing portions 212 and 222 can be broken at the same time when the cutting member and the cap are separated from the unsealing prohibition seal adhered portion A.
In this embodiment, a configuration example in which the cutting member supporting portion is provided on the projecting piece 222 on one side of the upper case is shown, but it is also possible to provide a cutting portion supporting portion on the inner surface of the sealing portion 212 on one side of the lower case.

Furthermore, the cutting member 230 is provided with elastically deformable claw-like locked portions 236 on both edges in the longitudinal direction (direction orthogonal to the mounting direction). When the cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (see FIGS. 241(b) and 241(c)), the locked portion 236 is exposed to the outside through the gap between the projecting pieces. Therefore, the cap and the cutting member can be engaged when the cap is attached to the sealing base. Since the tip edge of the cutting member is also exposed through the gap between the protruding pieces, it is possible to smoothly separate the cutting member from the sealing base together with the cap and to break the unsealing prohibition seal.
After the cutting member 230 is attached to the projecting piece 222 in this manner, the lower case piece 210 is attached to the upper case piece 220, and the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both the sealing portions 212 and 222.

Next, FIG. 241(b) shows the unsealable seal adhered to the sealing base portion with the lower case piece 210 omitted, and FIGS. 241(c) and 241 show the cap 240 attached.
The cap 240 has a projecting locking portion 242 that can be engaged with the locked portion 236 of the cutting member 230 inside the cap body 241, and when the cap is attached to the sealing base portion as shown in FIG.
In this state, as shown in FIGS. 241(d) and 243, when the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion, the cutting member 230 integrated with the cap is also detached integrally. At this time, the blade portion 231 and the broken piece 233 of the cutting member break the unsealable seal. That is, the blade portion 231 is configured to be detachable to the outside (outside) from the gap (first opening O1) between the two sealing portions 212 and 222, while the broken piece 233 is configured to be detachable to the outside (outside) from the guide slit 224 provided in the protruding piece 222. Therefore, each portion of the unsealing prohibition seal located on the moving path of the blade portion 231 and the broken piece 233 can be broken.
Each broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protrudes from a portion of each second opening O2 that is not covered by the unsealable seal.

In the configuration example of the unsealable seal shown in FIG. 244, when the unsealable seal 250 is adhered to both projecting pieces, the identification region 251 composed of random micro-characters is in the moving path of the broken piece (second broken piece) 233 provided on the cutting member 230. Therefore, the identification area 251 is broken (destroyed) by the breaking piece 233 when the cutting member is removed together with the cap.
When the identification region 251 is provided at a position corresponding to the blade portion 231 on the tip edge of the cutting member, the identification portion is broken by the blade portion 231 (Fig. 243).
In this embodiment, the cap 240 is attached to cover the outer surface of the sealing base portion in a state where the unsealing prevention seal 250 is adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base portion 310 of the main substrate case so as to straddle the sealing portions 212 and 222 of both case pieces. Therefore, before the main circuit board case is opened, that is, during the process of removing the cap 240 from the sealing base, the cutting member 230 breaks the unsealing prohibition seal 250 .

Since the cutting member 230 has a jagged blade portion 231 at its tip (the tip in the separating direction), the first seal adhesion portion 250A of the unsealing prohibition seal is broken when the cutting member 230 protrudes outside from the butted position of the sealing portions 212 and 222. Therefore, it is possible to know that the main board case has been illegally opened.
Furthermore, the cutting member 230 has a broken piece 233 that protrudes in a direction (one side of the upper case) that intersects the direction in which the cap 240 is separated from the sealing base 310. When the cutting member 230 is attached to the projecting piece 222, the broken piece 233 projects from the guide slit 224 provided in the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece 220 onto the surface of the projecting piece 222. If an unsealing prohibition seal is adhered to the surface of the protruding piece 222 in this state, the broken piece 233 is always in contact with the unsealing prohibition seal 250 and interferes with it. Therefore, when the cutting member moves in the separating direction by removing the cap 240 from the sealing base portion, the breaking piece moves along the guide slit 224, thereby breaking the unsealing prohibition seal linearly. Since the unsealable seal portion (second seal adhesive portion 250B) broken by the broken piece 233 is a portion corresponding to the surface of the protruding piece 222, it can be viewed directly from the back side of the game machine, and the evidence of fraud can be easily found from this broken portion.
When the main board case is opened by rotating it with respect to the pedestal as shown in FIG. 223, the opposite side of the cap 240 can be viewed.

In this embodiment, assuming that the unsealable seal 250 is adhered across the sealing portions 212 and 222, the cutting member 230 is provided with a blade portion 231 for cutting the identification region 251 in an unrecoverable manner and a broken piece 233 for reliably leaving a fractured trace on the appearance. In particular, if the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is not adhered across the sealing portions 212 and 222, but adhered only to the outer surface of one projecting piece, for example, the projecting piece 222 on the upper case side, the cutting member 230 is provided with the broken piece 233. In other words, according to the present invention, it is possible to cope with both the case where the unsealing prohibition seal is adhered across both protruding pieces and the case where it is adhered only to one of the protruding pieces.

In the example shown in FIG. 243, when the main board case 200z is opened, the unsealing prohibition seal (unsealing prohibition seal) 250 is broken so that the QR code (registered trademark) 253 cannot be read.
However, it is desirable to configure the blade portion 231 so that the unsealable seal 250 is broken in a state in which the QR code (registered trademark) 253 is readable.

<Payout control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the payout control board protection case in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 245 is a diagram showing the component layout of the payout control board 60z in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 245, the payout control board 60z includes a one-chip microcomputer (IC chip) 601 in which a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz are integrated (integrated), other electronic components 605 such as capacitors and ICs, and an error indicator 610 for displaying error information.
The error indicator 610 may consist of one 7-segment liquid crystal or 7-segment LED. The 7-segment liquid crystal is a liquid crystal display device composed of 7 segments that can be individually turned on/off to represent a single number.
A 7-segment LED is an LED display device composed of 7 segments that can be individually turned on/off in order to represent a single numeral.
The error indicator 610 may further include segments for displaying dots in addition to seven segments for displaying numbers, like the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 described below.
Not only the error indicator 610 but also the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 described below can use a 7-segment liquid crystal or a 7-segment LED having segments for displaying dots.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the printed wiring board 701 of the payout control board 60z, as with the main control board 50, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface of the printed wiring board is adopted.

FIG. 246 is a view for explaining the configuration of the payout control board protection case, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view.
247 and 248 are exploded perspective views of the payout control board case.
A payout control board protection case (hereinafter referred to as payout board case 400 ) is composed of an upper case piece 410 and a lower case piece 420 .
As in the case of the main board case 200z, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are provided with control board housing portions 411 and 421, respectively, for housing the payout control board 60z.
In addition, the control board housing portions 411 and 421 each have a substantially rectangular plate portion and a flange portion that protrudes from the peripheral edge portion of the plate portion and surrounds one side surface of each plate portion.

Of the flange portion forming the control board storage portion 411 of the upper case piece 410, five L-shaped hook pieces 412 are formed in the portions protruding along the two long sides of the upper case piece 410.
On the other hand, of the flange portion that constitutes the control board storage portion 421 of the lower case piece 420, the portion protruding along the two long sides of the lower case piece is formed in a double wall shape, and an insertion groove portion 422 into which the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 can be inserted is provided between the walls that form the double wall. A hooking piece 423 is formed in each insertion groove portion 422 .

When the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are combined, the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 is inserted into the insertion groove 422 of the lower case piece 420 .
Then, the upper case piece 410 is slid in the direction of arrow α in FIG. Then, the hooking piece 412 is engaged with the hooking piece 423, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.
When combined in this manner, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 form a box-shaped inner package part shielded from the outside by the control board storage parts 411 and 421, and the payout control board 60z is accommodated in the inner package part. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the payout control board 60z, the integrated payout ROM 601 and the like are illegally exchanged.
In addition, a protective cover is arranged below the upper case piece 410 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal payout control board 60z and the external connector.

In this embodiment, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case 410 are fixed by a crimping member with the payout control board 60z sandwiched therebetween.
A crimping fastening portion 450 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the dispensing substrate case 400, and the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are locked in a closed state by driving the crimping member into the crimping fastening portion 450. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven into the fastening hole 451, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 become openable and detachable.
In the dispensing board case 400 of the present embodiment, two crimping fastening portions are provided (crimping fastening portions 450A and 450B).

An upper fastening piece 455 is provided along the edge of the upper case piece 410 , and a through fastening hole 456 is provided in the upper fastening piece 455 .
A lower fastening piece 455 protrudes from a portion corresponding to the upper fastening piece 455 on the inner surface of the lower case piece 420 . A fastening hole 457 is formed in the lower fastening piece 455 .
When the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are engaged using the hook pieces 412 and 423 and the insertion groove portion 422, the through fastening hole 456 of the upper fastening piece 455 and the fastening hole 457 of the lower fastening piece communicate with each other. By driving a crimping member into the communicating fastening holes (crimping fastening holes), the engagement between the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 cannot be released.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the payout control board 60z housed inside the payout board case.
Only one caulking fastening portion is used to fasten the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 once. After the crimping member is removed and the fastening is adjusted (after the delivery board case 400 is opened), the crimping member is driven into the remaining crimping fastening hole to fasten again when fastening is performed again. That is, the dispensing board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.
A position display portion similar to that of the main substrate case 200z is provided at the lower left and lower center of the front surface of the upper case piece 410. As shown in FIG.
A seal portion (error display seal) 1565 indicating the content of error display is attached to the lower left position display portion, and a seal portion (opener display seal) 1566 is attached to the lower center position display portion for entering the person who opened the dispensed substrate case and the date and time of opening.

As shown in FIG. 247, the position display portion and seal portions 1565 and 1566 are formed and attached to the outer surface of the upper case piece 410, but they may be formed and attached to the inner surface of the upper case piece 410.
This is the same as the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 of the main board case 200z.
The position display section may also be provided on the outer surface side or the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410 as described with reference to FIGS.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark surrounding the entire periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached, and an L-shaped mark on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided on the rear surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the rear surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .

The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround predetermined corners of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same plane as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided so as to surround predetermined corners of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion and concave portion provided so as to surround predetermined corners on the back surfaces of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark which is neither a projection nor a recess provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .

In FIGS. 246 to 248, the position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided on the same surface as the seal (front side of the upper case piece), but it is not limited to this and can take any of the above modes.
The seal portion 1565 is attached near the error indicator 610 of the payout control board 60z housed in the payout board case 400, and indicates the content of the error display displayed on the error indicator 610. FIG.
The error indicator 610 displays the number of the error shown on the seal portion 1565 .
When multiple errors occur, only the most serious error among the errors occurring is displayed on the error indicator 610 . Alternatively, all of the multiple errors that have occurred are sequentially displayed on the error indicator 610 .
Alternatively, a plurality of LEDs each associated with an error number may be arranged as the error indicator 610, and an error may be notified by causing the LED corresponding to the error that has occurred to emit light.
Here, for example, beside the plurality of error numbers displayed on the seal portion 1565, the corresponding LEDs are arranged vertically.
For example, when a "dispensing quantity abnormal error" corresponding to error number 0 occurs, the LED arranged next to error number "0" on the seal part 1565 is lit, and when a "main control disconnection error" corresponding to error number 1 occurs, the LED arranged next to error number "1" on the seal part 1565 is lit.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material. For example, an error display number and the content of the error indicated by the number are printed in white within a frame printed in white.
The transparent material is exposed except for the display of the frame, number, and error content, and the electronic parts on the payout control board 60z can be confirmed through the transparent material.
That is, the error indicator 610 can visually recognize the transparent material of the seal portion 1566 . Alternatively, the seal portion 1566 is attached to the dispensing board case 400 that does not overlap the error indicator 610 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the error indicator 610 is always visible.
The seal portion 1565 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60z can be visually recognized from all angles through a transparent material.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), the seal portion 1565 (error display description seal) describes, for example, the following contents corresponding to errors detected by the main control board and various sensors.
i.e.
0 Dispensing number error 1 Main control disconnection error 2 Dispensing switch abnormality detection error 1
3 Dispensing switch abnormality detection error 2
4 Payout case error 5 Main control case error 6 Full tank error 7 Out of ball error 8 Game ball lending device unconnected seller 9 Game ball lending device communication error.

In addition, the error indicator 610 displays one of the following: "full plate error", "counter case error", "counting switch error", "overpayment error", "game ball lending device disconnection error", "game ball lending device communication error", "door open error", "abnormal winning error 1", "abnormal winning error 2", "ejection error", "magnet detection error", "abnormal prize frequency error", and "abnormal door opening error", and the corresponding error display. may be displayed on the sticker portion 1565 (error display explanation sticker).
A "dish full error" is an error that occurs when the tray is full due to the payout of prize balls or when the tray is full due to ball lending.
A "counter case error" is an error that occurs due to ball clogging between the tank and dispensing mechanism.
"Counter switch error" is an error that occurs when the wiring that connects the payout control board and the dispensing device relay terminal board or the wiring that connects the dispensing device relay terminal board and parts in the dispensing mechanism is not correctly connected.

"Excess payout error", an error that occurs when more than the requested number of payouts is made.
"Payout command error" is an error that occurs when the signal sent from the main control board to the payout control board is not normal.
"Game ball lending device unconnected error" is an error that occurs because the game ball lending device is not connected to the gaming machine.
"Game ball lending device communication error" is an error that occurs when the payout control board detects that the signal from the game ball lending device is incorrect.
"Door open error" is an error that occurs because the upper decoration is opened.
A "switch unconnected error" is an error that occurs when disconnection or poor connection of switches on the game board such as gates and prize-winning ports is detected.

"Abnormal winning error 1" is an error generated by detecting 5 or more winnings in the right start opening between the end of the operation of the normal electric role and the start of the next operation, or 1 or more winnings during the period from turning on the power until the start of operation of the normal electric role.
"Abnormal Winning Error 2" is an error that occurs because the switch in each winning hole detects a game ball for a remarkably long time.
A "discharge error" is an error that occurs when the error between the number of game balls that have passed through the switch in each winning hole and the number of game balls that have passed through the out switch exceeds 49.
"Magnet detection error" is an error that occurs when a magnetic force is detected near the left windmill, near the upper left winning opening, near the middle left winning opening, near the lower left winning opening, near the middle starting opening, or at the lower right part of the game board surface.
The ``abnormal winning frequency error'' is an error that occurs when an abnormal winning number is detected in any of the middle starting opening, the lower left winning opening, the left middle winning opening, the upper left winning opening, or the right winning opening when a fixed number of shot balls is reached.
"Abnormal door open error" is an error that occurs when the inner frame is opened when the upper decoration is closed.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), the seal portion 1566 (opener display seal/delivery board management seal) has an entry area 1567 for entering the person who opened the delivery board case 400 and the date of opening.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material and is not subjected to processing such as watermarking. For example, three entry areas 1567 are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "payout control board".
A writing area 1567 is a white background formed on a transparent material and which can be written with a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1567, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
The transparent material is exposed except for each print and entry area 1567 (white background), and the electronic components on the payout control board 60z can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60z can be visually recognized from all angles through a transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is provided so that the three entry areas 1567 are positioned so as not to overlap the integrated payout ROM 601 from all angles.

In addition, in the seal portion 1566 shown in FIG. 246(c), the entry area 1567 is integrated with the columns for entering "opener" and "opening date". 233 and 237, it is also possible to separate columns for entering the opening person and the date of opening, and to provide a viewing portion made of a transparent material between them. By doing so, confirmation of the electronic components on the payout control board 60z through the seal portion 1566 becomes even easier.

As described above, similarly to the main board case 200z, the payout board case 400 of this embodiment has a crimped portion.
Two crimped portions are provided in the dispensing board case 400 . On the other hand, there are three writing areas 1567 provided on the seal portion 1566 .
In the dispensing board case 400, the number of crimped portions does not match the number of times the person who opened the seal portion 1566 can write (the number of writing areas 1567).
The number of crimped portions provided in the delivered board case 400 is equal to or smaller than the number of entry fields for the opening person and opening date provided in the delivered board management seal (seal portion 1566). By providing more entry fields than the actual number of openings, it is possible to deal with errors and other errors, and it is possible to deal more flexibly than when the number of crimped parts and the entry fields are the same.

Especially the upper case piece 410 of the payout board case 400 does not have a ventilation hole.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the payout ROM 60bz (payout chip) 601 .
As described above, the seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
The seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 may have the same color as the seal portion 1562 having the same contents attached to the main ROM of the main control board 50, or may have a different color.

The number of times that information such as the opening person can be written in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 differs between the dispensing board case 400 and the main board case 200z. Alternatively, the sizes of the writable areas in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 are different.
In the description of FIG. 246, the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are different seal portions, but the seal portions 1565 and 1566 may be integrated.
That is, one seal including the descriptions of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 may be attached.

<Production control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the effect control board protection case in this embodiment will be described.
First, the substrate structure of the image control substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 and 250. FIG.
249A and 249B are views for explaining the structure of the image control board, FIG. 249A is a view showing the configuration of the component side (front side) of the image control board, and FIG. 249B is a view showing the configuration of the solder side (back side) of the image control board.
FIG. 250 is a view showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used for the image control board, FIG. 250(a) is a view showing the configuration of the component surface (front surface) of the printed circuit board, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, the image control board 70z is mounted with many electronic components including a VDP.
The image control board 70z uses a printed wiring board 801 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the present embodiment, the printed wiring board 801 is used as the image control board 70z. However, this is only an example, and the image control board 70z may be a multilayer printed wiring board having wiring patterns formed on both sides and inner layer surfaces of the printed board.
As a mounting method for mounting electronic components on the printed wiring board 801, a surface mounting method is adopted in which various surface-mounted electronic components, connectors, etc. are mounted on connection electrodes (lands) 802 formed on both sides (component surface 801a and solder surface 801b) of the printed wiring board 801. In other words, the image control board 70z is configured using a printed wiring board 801 of a surface mounting type.

As described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 50 is composed of the printed wiring board 701 having through holes into which the leads of the insertion mounting electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "insertion mounting components") can be inserted, and the boards other than the main control board 50 are composed of the printed wiring boards 801 having connection electrodes connectable to the connection terminals of the surface mounting electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "surface mounting components").

FIG. 251 is an enlarged view of a part of the printed wiring board used for the image control board.
As shown in FIG. 251, on a printed wiring board 801, land groups 811 and 812 are formed by lands 802 that are connected to connection terminals of one surface-mounted component.
For example, if the surface-mounted component is an IC 850 shown in FIG. In this specification, a plurality of lands 802 each connected to a plurality of lead terminals of one surface mount component are referred to as a land group.
Similarly, if the surface-mounted component is a connector 851 shown in FIG.
A plurality of lands 802 constituting these land groups 811 and 812 are composed of first lands 802a and second lands 802b having a different shape from the first lands 802a.
Specifically, among the plurality of lands 802 forming each of the land groups 811 and 812, the four corner lands 802b are made larger than the other lands 802a (for example, about 1.5 times larger).

FIG. 252 is a front view explaining the configuration of the effect control board protection case.
253 and 254 are exploded perspective views of the effect control board case.
As shown in FIGS. 252 to 254, the image control board 70z in the effect control board case (effect board case) 700 is mounted with many electronic components including a host CPU, VDP and image ROM.
As described above, in the printed wiring board of the image control board 70z, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a double-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted on both the component surface and the solder surface of the printed wiring board is adopted.

The effect board case 700 includes a lower case piece 710 and an upper case piece 720. - 特許庁
An effect control board and an image control board 70z are housed in an encapsulating part constituted by a control board housing part 711 provided in the lower case piece 710 and a control board housing part 721 provided in the upper case piece 720 .
The effect board case 700, particularly the upper case piece 720, is provided with a ventilation hole 725 unlike the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400 described above.
Further, seal parts 1560 and 1566 for entering the opening person and opening date pasted on the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400 are not pasted on the upper case piece 720 of the performance board case 700. - 特許庁
Therefore, the effect board case 700 is not provided with a crimped portion for sealing the effect board case 700, which is provided in the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400. - 特許庁

On the other hand, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, an opaque seal portion 1580 describing an explanation relating to volume setting is attached near the volume changeover switch 36z.
Correspondingly, a position display portion 541 is provided on the rear surface of the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700 .
As described above, the image control board 70z is a double-sided mounting board, and the electronic components mounted on the front side (game board side) cannot be directly visually inspected for inspection.
Further, the image control board 70z has a function of simply outputting an effect image and an effect sound, so unlike the main control board 50 and the payout control board 60z, there is a low risk of the ROM chip or the like being illegally replaced.
Therefore, since it is less necessary to visually recognize the board surface through the seal, the opaque seal portion 1580 can be attached to the presentation board case 700 .
Also, for the same reason, a crimping portion (sealing portion) for sealing the effect board case 700 is not provided.
As a result, the seal portion 1566 having the entry area 1567 for entering the person who opened the effect board case 700 and the date of opening is not attached.

The position display portion 541 may be provided on the front side of the upper case piece 720 .
In the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion 1580, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark that surrounds the entire circumference of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case to which the seal portion 1580 is attached, or an L-shaped mark on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case to which the seal portion 1580 is attached.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 1580 .
Position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround seal portion 1580 on the same plane as seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580 .
Position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided to surround seal portion 1580 on the back surface of seal portion 1580 .

The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580 on the same plane as the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear concave portion provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface as the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion and concave portion provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark provided to surround the seal portion 1580 and is neither a protrusion nor a recess.

The seal portion 1561 provided on the surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, the seal portion 1560 as the main board control number seal, and the QR code (registered trademark) of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 have different distances from the virtual plane on which the main control board 50 is extended. The distance of the QR code (registered trademark) of the unsealing prohibition sticker 250 from the virtual plane (main control board 50) is shorter (closer).
This is because, as shown in FIG. 241 and the like, the QR code (registered trademark) 253 of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is positioned lower than the upper surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

In the board case of the gaming machine including the main board case 200z, the payout board case 400, and the performance board case 700, there are, as information displays, case seals, ROM seals, lead resistor color codes, network resistor identification codes, IC model code, capacitor model code, performance display monitor, setting display monitor display information, and the like.
These pieces of information are different in distance from each control board housed in the board case (main board case 200z, payout board case 400, effect board case 700). Also, the distance from the top surface of the board case is different. As explained above, the top surface of the board case is the place where the seal portion is affixed, and is the highest point in the board case.
The seal part of the board case part is pasted on the highest part of the board case, the ROM seal is pasted on the ROM mounted on the board in the case, and the display information of the performance display monitor and the setting display monitor are displayed on the performance display monitor and the setting display monitor provided on the board. It is natural that the height of these pieces of information is different on the basis of the control board.

Further, in this embodiment, a seal portion is attached to the top surface of the board case so that the ROM legs of the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z) housed in the board case are visible and are not hidden by the seal. Even a part of the ROM leg is not hidden by the sealing portion when the substrate case is viewed from above.
In this embodiment, the electronic parts including the ROM may be hidden when viewed from above, but can be seen from the viewing section when viewed from a different angle.
A transparent connector is installed as a connection part of the ROM to the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z) so that it can be seen at a glance that the ROM leg has not been tampered with.
The identification information provided on the case piece of the board case has indications of different distances to the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z). For example, the identification information displayed on the upper case piece, the lower case piece, and (in the case of the main board case) the cap differs in distance based on the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z), and the positional relationship is also different in the front and back. Also, in the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z), the color of the area where the electronic components are installed is different from the color of the area where the manufacturer name is displayed.

<Board structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board accommodated in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to those described above, such as FIG.
FIG. 255 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board is the same as in FIGS. 235 and 236, but in the example shown in FIG. The main control board 50 also has a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680 .

The performance display monitor 600 displays the base value of the gaming machine.
The base value is a numerical value that indicates the performance of the gaming machine, that is, how much payout is in the normal state (low probability, no short working hours) excluding special states such as jackpots, variable probability gaming states, and short working hours gaming states.
For example, if there are 50 prize balls when the player hits 100 game balls in a low-probability, short-time, no-time period, the base value is "50".
The number of game balls hit by a player is called the number of outs, and the game machine 1 calculates a base value for low-probability, time-saving and non-time-out for each total number of outs (usually 60,000) in all game states including a big hit, a variable probability game state, and a time-saving game state, and displays it on a performance display monitor 600.例文帳に追加
The base value at the time of low probability of short working hours is represented by (the number of payouts at the time of low probability of short working hours / the number of outs of the time of low probability of short working hours).

The performance display monitor 600 will be explained. The performance display monitor 600 has a display and a circuit section on the main control board 50 . A display in which the display section and the circuit section are unitized may be mounted on the main control board 50 .
The display displays four digits side by side. A dot point is provided below the number. Of the 4-digit number, the left two digits are the identification seg and the right two digits are the ratio seg.

FIG. 255(b) is a diagram for explaining the display of the performance display monitor, and the performance display monitor 600 sequentially and repeatedly displays the following four types of information.
As shown in (b-1) to (b-4), the identification segment displays the values of "bL.", "b1.", "b2."
The display switching time of "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." is about 5.0 seconds.
For example, "bL.xx" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b1.yy" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b2.zz" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b3.ww" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, and "bL.xx" is displayed again for 5.0 seconds.
"bL." Shown in (b-1) indicates the base value for each 60,000 total out numbers, which is a real-time value during measurement.
"b1." Shown in (b-2) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in the total number of outs 60,000 one time before.
"b2." Shown in (b-3) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in the total out number 60,000 two times before.
"b3." Shown in (b-4) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in 60,000 total out number three times before.

Here, performance display processing by the main control board 50 will be described.
The main CPU 50az starts counting the number of outs (total number of outs) in all gaming states from the first power-on (RWM all clear).
In (b-1), the main CPU 50az causes the identification segment to blink "bL." and the ratio segment to display "--" until the total number of outs reaches an arbitrary number less than 300.
In (b-2), "b1." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.

After that, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts without short working hours (low-probability payout number), and the number of outs with no low-probability short working hours (low-probability out number), and starts the first measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
When the low probability out number is 0 to 5,999, "bL." is flashed, and when the low probability out number is 6,000 or more, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Then, the main CPU 50az stores the final ratio segment value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the second measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the low probability out number is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the second measurement as BB.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the third measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the low probability out number is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In addition, in (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the stored BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is caused to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the second measurement as BB.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the third measurement as CC.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the fourth measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the fourth time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the low probability out number is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved CC is displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, in (b-3), "b2." is lit in the identification segment, and the stored BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 next time, the main CPU 50az repeats the fifth and subsequent measurements in the same manner as described above.

The board case 200z of the present embodiment may be used to accommodate the main control board of the reel game machine (pachi-slot machine), and in that case, the game information display provided on the main control board displays information such as the role ratio of the reel game machine (pachi-slot machine).
The performance display monitor 600 described above is a kind of game information display device that indicates the game information of the game machine, and the game information of the game machine includes information such as the role ratio of the pachislot machine in addition to the base value information of the pachinko game machine.
A game information display that displays information such as the role ratio of a pachislot machine is called a role ratio monitor.
The role ratio monitor is
(1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio (2) Consecutive role ratio every 6,000 games (3) Role ratio every 6,000 games (4) Cumulative consecutive role ratio (5) Cumulative role ratio is displayed.
Here, the advantageous interval ratio is the ratio of the number of advantageous interval games to the total number of games. Also, the advantageous section is a section in which it is possible to give an instruction such as push order navigation.
The role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are ratios of the number of payouts of accessories (so-called bonuses) to the total number of payouts.
The role ratio is calculated with respect to all the roles, and the continuous role ratio is calculated with respect to the operation of the consecutively operating device.
The game information display device that shows the game information of the game machine can also include such a role ratio monitor, but in this embodiment, the monitor for displaying the base value of the pachinko game machine will be described in detail, and the detailed explanation of the role ratio monitor will be omitted.

Next, the setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 displays setting values of the gaming machine 1 .
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can change the probability of winning the jackpot by changing the settings (Fig. 199(a)).
The setting display monitor 650 is mounted in the main control board case 200z, has a one-digit display as shown in FIG. 255(c), and can display one of the setting values shown in FIG. 199(a).
These setting values may be displayed on the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 may not be provided.

The setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 is installed for the purpose of clearly indicating to the player that the setting changing device is installed, to clearly indicating the operation method to the staff of the game arcade, and to prevent illegality related to the setting.
Numeric or non-numeric symbols can be used to indicate settings. When a numerical value is used, any one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", and "4" is used to display the setting according to the setting value. If the set value is from "1" to "6", one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" is used according to the set value.

For the setting operation, for example, the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670 described above are used.
The setting key switch 660 is a switch that triggers transition to the "setting change state" and the "setting confirmation state". It is operated using a key (key).
The setting key switch 660 can take two states of OFF/ON and maintain each state. Also, the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state.
The setting key switch 660 is mounted inside the main control board case 200z.
The setting switch 670 is a switch for switching settings in a setting change state, and is mounted at an arbitrary position that cannot be operated by the player.
The setting switch 670 can also be used as the RWM clear switch 680 and the like.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned ON, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a "setting change state" for changing settings.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned OFF, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a "setting confirmation state" for confirming the settings.

Setting change processing by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off. (2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operation of a setting person such as an amusement store staff. The setting display monitor 650 is still turned off.
(3) When the RWM clear switch 680 is turned ON by the operation of the setting person and the game machine is powered on in this state, the main CPU 50az shifts the game machine 1 to the "setting change state". The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state. (4) In this state, when the setting switch 670 (or the RWM clear switch 680) is pressed, the main CPU 50az sequentially changes the setting values and causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the changed (under setting) setting values.
(5) When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operator, the main CPU 50az confirms the setting value and turns off the setting display monitor 650 .
When the performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650 , the main CPU 50 az displays the setting values in the “setting change state” on any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600 .
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operator to confirm the setting value, the main CPU 50az starts the above-described performance display on the performance display monitor 600 .

A setting confirmation process by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the setting display monitor 650 is off.
(2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operator's operation. The setting display monitor 650 is still off.
(3) In this state, when the gaming machine is powered on without turning on the RWM clear switch 680, the main CPU 50az shifts the gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation state. The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operation of the setting person, the main CPU 50az terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display monitor 650 .
When the performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650 , the main CPU 50 az displays the setting values in the “setting confirmation state” using any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600 .
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operator to end the setting confirmation state, the main CPU 50az starts the above-described performance display on the performance display monitor 600 .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 has connectors 771 to 776 on its component surface.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50 .
Although not shown in FIG. 256 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, similar to those shown in FIG.
Both the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the component side of the main control board 50 are provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50 .
That is, the connectors 771 to 776, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at opposite positions on the main control board 50. FIG.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not obstruct the visual recognition of the inspector who checks the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 .
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at the upper end part sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, cables and harnesses hanging down from the connectors do not interfere with the field of view of the inspector who tries to view the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650.例文帳に追加

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in FIG. 255 is the same as in FIG. 235(b).
236(a) and 236(b), the main control board 50 of FIG. 255 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

256 is a view showing the main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board described in FIG. 255 is housed, (a) showing a perspective view of the assembly, and (b) showing a front view of the assembly. 257 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 255. FIG.
In the description of FIGS. 256 and 257, members having the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiment (in particular, FIGS. 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
199 to 234 and 237 to 238, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z.
Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having optical transparency, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). In FIG. 256, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

The seal portion 1560 will be described.
The seal portion 1560 is a seal for main board management.
In this example, a seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for anti-counterfeiting. That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal obtained by watermarking the seal portion main body 1560A.
A “watermark” is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle.
However, the seal member main body 1560A is transparent even though it is subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), and at least has high translucency to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The seal portion 1560 includes a blank entry area (entry column) 1570, a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 within a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number" on the seal portion main body 1560A.
The entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display accompanying these areas, which will be described later, are non-translucent parts with low translucency because the transparent material of the seal main body 1560A is not exposed.
The seal portion 1560 has a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions, and through these non-light-transmitting portions, it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 50 inside the main board case 200z.
The code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 as the non-light-transmitting portion are provided on the seal portion main body 1560A so as not to overlap the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650. FIG.

On the other hand, areas other than the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the text display accompanying these areas in the seal part main body 1560A are translucent parts 1574 that expose the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A and have high translucency.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is the above-described viewing portion that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200z to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200z, the main control board 50 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, regardless of whether or not there is a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 can be viewed from all angles.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and non-translucent portion, the seal portion 1560 is provided so that the entire seal portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the seal portion 1560 is provided so that the entire seal portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.

In FIG. 256, it cannot be said that the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are positioned close to each other. 0 may be located close to each other. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be at the position indicated by the dashed line above the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 256(b).
In this case, the inspector can simultaneously check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance.

The contents displayed on the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200z and the date of opening.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction for a total of six entry areas 1570, in which three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, above the entry area 1570 on the upper left, "opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right side. It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code portion 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”).
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. Information displayed on the information portable terminal as a result of accessing the other device includes information such as the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the game machine 1 has been discarded. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 50 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

A translucent portion (peeping portion) 1574 included in the sealing portion 1560 will be described.
Translucent portion 1574 is an area other than entry region 1570, code portion 1572, information display portion 1573, notation of “main board control number”, frame, opening person, date of opening, and circles 1 to 3 in seal body 1560A.
The translucent part 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction that exists between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side and the upper two entry areas 1570 .
The translucent part 1574 is also an area extending vertically between the writing areas 1570 in two rows in the horizontal direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 255(a)) through the translucent portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The seal portion 1561 will be described.
The seal portion 1561 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
Descriptions of the sealing portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . Since the sealing portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 233 and 237, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 256 and 257 is equipped with a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680 .
The RWM clear switch 680 will be explained.
As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200z is provided with a recess 688 inside, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688 .
As can be seen from FIGS. 256(b) and 257, the operating member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680, and when the staff or the like presses the operating member 685, the pressed operating member 685 presses the RWM clear switch 680. This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported in the recess 688 between a first position where the operating member 685 is closed and disabled and a second position where the operating member 685 is opened and operable.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 680 can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide an opening 687 large enough to insert the operation member 685 in the substrate case 200z. Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access into the board case 200z can be prevented.
RWM clear switch 680 may have an end exposed through opening 687 so that it can be operated directly without being operated using operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50 .
An end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is exposed from an opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case 200z.
A staff or the like can operate the setting key switch 660 by inserting a key into the keyhole.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is slightly lower than the surface of the substrate case 200z.

FIG. 258 is a diagram for explaining still another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board 50 is the same as that of FIG. 255, but in the example shown in FIG.
The function of the setting display monitor 650 is shared by the performance display monitor 600, and an independent setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
Alternatively, the main control board 50 shown in FIG. 258 is the main control board of a gaming machine that does not have the setting change function.
Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 has connectors 771 to 776 on its component surface.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50 .

Although not shown in FIG. 256 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, similar to those shown in FIG.
A performance display monitor 600 , which is provided on the component side of the main control board 50 and can also serve as the setting display monitor 650 , is provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50 .
That is, the connectors 771 to 776 and the performance display monitor 600 are provided on the main control board 50 at opposite positions.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not obstruct the visual recognition of the inspector who checks the performance display monitor 600 .
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 is provided at the upper end portion sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, cables and harnesses hanging from the connectors do not interfere with the field of view of the inspector who attempts to view the performance display monitor 600.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in FIG. 258 is the same as in FIG. 235(b).
236(a) and 236(b), the main control board 50 of FIG. 258 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

259 is a view showing the main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board described in FIG. 258 is accommodated, (a) showing a perspective view of the assembly, and (b) showing a front view of the assembly. 260 is an exploded perspective view including the base of the main board case shown in FIG. 259. FIG.
In the description of FIGS. 258 and 259, members having the same configurations as those of the above embodiments (especially, FIGS. 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
199 to 234 and 237 to 238, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z.

Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). In FIG. 256, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.
In this example, a watermark for anti-counterfeiting is provided on the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 .
The configuration of the seal portion 1560, which is a processed seal, is the same as in FIGS. 237 and 256, so detailed description thereof is omitted.

Except for the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 (white background), the transparent material of the seal portion main body 1560A is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
In the main board case 200z, the main control board 50 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, regardless of whether or not there is a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 can be viewed from all angles.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and non-translucent portion, the seal portion 1560 is provided so that the entire seal portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the entire seal portion 1560, including the entry area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 from any angle, regardless of whether or not there is a translucent portion or non-translucent portion.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 can be viewed through the main board case 200z.

In FIG. 259, it cannot be said that the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are positioned close to each other. , may be located near each other. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be in the position indicated by the dashed line above the seal portion 1560 in FIG.
At this time, the inspector can simultaneously check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance.

Descriptions of the seal portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG. 237, and thus description thereof is omitted.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 .
The seal portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 233 and 237, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

As described above, the main control board 50 is mounted with the integrated main ROM 502 that controls the game, the performance display monitor 600 that displays the performance of the game machine, and other board components 595 different from these. A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 50 .
As a result, other board components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent seal portion 1560 and the main board case 200z. Also, the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200z.
Duplication of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented by watermarking the transparent portion of the predetermined seal portion 1560, which has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions and which needs to be affixed to the main substrate case 200z.
Also, by attaching the seal part 1560 to a position where it does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, and the performance display monitor 600, which must be read accurately, can be reliably secured without being affected by watermarking or a plurality of non-transparent parts.
The status of the board component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, can be confirmed through watermark processing through the gaps between the non-transparent portions and the surrounding transparent portion (peek portion 1574). Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions.
Further, the non-transparent portion can display predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as identifying the integrated main ROM 502 . Different information can be displayed or written in the plurality of non-transparent portions.

In addition, when the main control board 50 is separately provided with the setting display monitor 650, by attaching the seal portion 1560 to a position that does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650, the visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, the performance display monitor 600 that needs to be read accurately, and the setting display monitor 650 can be reliably ensured without being affected by watermarking or multiple non-transparent portions.
The status of the board component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650, can be checked through gaps between the non-transparent portions and the surrounding transparent portion (peek portion 1574) through watermarking. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions.

The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the lower end side of the main control board 50 instead of the upper end side. In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged on the upper end side opposite to the performance display monitor 600 (opposite).
The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 50 . In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged at the opposite (opposite) ends to the performance display monitor 600 .
Also, as described above, the performance display monitor 600 may be arranged inside the main control board 50 instead of at the end. Even in that case, they must be arranged at positions that do not overlap the cables, harnesses, and sealing portion 1560 extending from the connectors 771 to 776 .
In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 680 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but is not limited to that and may be provided on the payout control board 60z.
Also, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 660 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but it is not limited to this.
The setting key switch 660 can be arranged at another position separated from the main control board 50 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
The RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 may be used together.

FIG. 261 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when the RWM is cleared.
In the following description, the configurations of the performance display section and the setting display section conform to the configurations shown in FIGS. 255(b) and 255(c).
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When performing RWM clear, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned off and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
When the RWM clearing process is finished, in (3), a message such as "RWM clearing finished" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the RWM clearing is finished.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (4) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values as described in FIG. 255(b). In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display section when the settings are changed in the case where the gaming machine has the performance display section that also serves as the setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

At (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment among the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in another segment. The setting value is displayed with a dot, regardless of which digit it appears in.
On the image display device 31z, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The voice output device 34 also outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being changed.

When the setting person operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that doubles as the setting switch 670, in (4), the performance display monitor 600 displays the set value for each change operation. The change operation can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time the operation is performed.
As described above, according to the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 which also serves as the setting switch 670, the value increases by one step from "1" to "2" and so on, and returns to "1" when the setting reaches "6". No dots are displayed with the set value during the change operation.
During this time, the image display device 31z continues to display a message such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The audio output device 34 also continues to output the audio notifying that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z also continue to emit light.
A setting change history may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to an operation using the cross key 40z, effect button 8z, or the like during the setting change.

When the setting person turns off the setting key switch 660, in (5), the setting value currently displayed on the performance display monitor 600 is determined. The performance display monitor 600 displays any set value with a dot.
At this time, the display and sound to notify that the setting is being changed may be continued or terminated. The image display device 31z and the voice output device 34 may display or output a message such as "The setting change is completed" to notify that the setting change is completed, instead of the display and voice for notifying that the setting change is in progress.

After that, in (6), the image display device 31z displays a message such as "RWM clearing completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "RWM clearing has been completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values in (7). In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed in the case where the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.
It is a major premise that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

At (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with a dot.
On the image display device 31z, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being changed.
The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

When the setting person operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, in (4), the setting display monitor 650 displays the set value for each change operation. The change operation can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time the operation is performed.
As described above, according to the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 which also serves as the setting switch 670, the value increases by one step from "1" to "2" and so on, and returns to "1" when the setting reaches "6". No dots are displayed with the set value during the change operation.
During this time, the image display device 31z continues to display a message such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
A setting change history may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to an operation using the cross key 40z, effect button 8z, or the like during the setting change.

When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the setting person, the setting change ends, and in (5), the setting value currently displayed on the setting display monitor 650 is confirmed. After that, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and sound to notify that the setting is being changed may be continued or ended. The image display device 31z and the voice output device 34 may display or output a message such as "The setting change is completed" to notify that the setting change is completed, instead of the display and voice for notifying that the setting change is in progress.
After that, in (6), the image display device 31z displays a message such as "RWM clearing is finished" to notify that the RWM clearing is finished.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "RWM clearing has been completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values in (7). In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine is provided with the performance display unit that also serves as the setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

At (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment among the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in another segment. The setting value is displayed with a dot, regardless of which digit it appears in.
On the image display device 31z, a message such as "Confirming settings" is displayed to notify that the settings are being confirmed. Also, a voice such as "Confirming settings" is output to notify that the settings are being confirmed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being checked.
During confirmation of the settings, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, and the like.

When the configurator turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the voice and display ends.
At this time, the display and sound announcing that the setting confirmation is in progress may be continued or terminated. The image display device 31z and the voice output device 34 may display or output a message such as "setting confirmation is completed" to notify that the setting confirmation is completed, instead of the display and voice for notifying that the setting confirmation is in progress.
After that, in (4), the image display device 31z displays a message such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (5) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values. In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

At (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with a dot.
On the image display device 31z, a message such as "Confirming settings" is displayed to notify that the settings are being confirmed. In addition, the voice output device 34 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed.
The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being checked. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
During confirmation of the settings, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, and the like.

When the configurator turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the voice and display ends. The setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and sound announcing that the setting confirmation is in progress may be continued or terminated. The image display device 31z and the voice output device 34 may display or output a message such as "setting confirmation is completed" to notify that the setting confirmation is completed, instead of the display and voice for notifying that the setting confirmation is in progress.
After that, in (4), the image display device 31z displays a message such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (5) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values. In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A main control unit for controlling a game, an information display unit for displaying game information, a substrate on which a substrate component other than the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a substrate case for housing the substrate, and a watermarked processed seal, wherein the processed seal has a highly translucent translucent portion and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency. , the other board component can be seen through the light-transmitting part between the plurality of non-light-transmitting parts and the board case, the main control part can be seen through the board case, and the information display part can be seen through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board mounted with a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, other board parts different from the main control section and the information display section, a board case for housing the board, and a watermarked processed seal, wherein the processed seal has a highly translucent part and a plurality of non-translucent parts, and the processed seal is attached on the board case at a position not overlapping the information display part. The game machine is characterized in that the other board component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting part and the board case between the plurality of non-light-transmitting parts, and the information display part can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a substrate case that houses the substrate, and a processed seal that is subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal has a highly translucent translucent portion and a plurality of non-translucent portions that have low translucency, the processed seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and is attached to the substrate case via the substrate case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control section can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for housing the substrate, and a processing seal subjected to watermark processing, wherein the processing seal has a highly translucent translucent portion and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency; , a gaming machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game, an information display unit for displaying game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a watermarked processed seal, wherein the processed seal has a highly translucent part and a non-translucent part with low translucency, and the processed seal is mounted on the board case and connected to the main control unit and the information display unit. The game machine is characterized in that it is attached at a non-overlapping position, the other board component is visible through the light transmitting section and the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked, the processed seal has a highly translucent part and a non-translucent part that is low in translucency, and the processed seal is attached to the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display part, The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component can be visually recognized through the light transmitting section and the board case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with watermarking, wherein the processed seal has a highly translucent part and a non-light-transmitting part, the processed seal is attached on the board case at a position not overlapping the main control part and the information display part, and through the board case, the main control part is provided. The gaming machine is characterized in that a part can be visually recognized and the information display part can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. a substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted; a substrate case for housing the substrate; Characterized by technique.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section that controls a game, an information display section that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, a board case that houses the board, a translucent section that is highly translucent, and a plurality of entry fields that can be filled in by an administrator. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component is visible through the light transmitting section and the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section that controls a game, an information display section that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, a board case that houses the board, a highly translucent translucent section, and a plurality of entry fields that can be filled in by an administrator. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component can be visually recognized through the board case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted; a board case for housing the board; and a seal having a light-transmitting section with high translucency and a plurality of entry fields that can be filled in by an administrator. The gaming machine is characterized in that the display section can be visually recognized.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A gaming machine comprising: a substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game; an information display unit for displaying game information; a substrate case for housing the substrate; a sticker having a highly translucent part;

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section that controls a game, an information display section that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted; a board case that houses the board; The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component is visible through the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted; a board case for housing the board; It is characterized by a game machine that can visually recognize the.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A game machine comprising: a substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game; an information display unit for displaying game information; a substrate case for housing the substrate; a seal having a transparent portion with high translucency;

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section that controls a game, an information display section that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, a board case that houses the board, a light-transmitting section that has high translucency, and an information writing section in which predetermined information is written. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component is visible through the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, a seal having a board case for housing the board, a light-transmitting section having high translucency, and an information writing section in which predetermined information is written, wherein the seal is pasted on the board case at a position not overlapping the information display section, and the other board is passed through the light-transmitting section and the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the parts can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. a board on which a main control section for controlling a game and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted; a board case for housing the board; a sticker having a highly translucent part; and an information writing section for writing predetermined information. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A gaming machine comprising: a board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted; a board case for housing the board; a sticker having a highly translucent part;

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A main control unit for controlling a game, an information display unit for displaying game information, a substrate on which a substrate component other than the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a substrate case for housing the substrate, and a watermarked processed seal, wherein the processed seal has a highly translucent translucent portion and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency. , the other board component can be seen through the light-transmitting part between the plurality of non-light-transmitting parts and the board case, the main control part can be seen through the board case, and the information display part can be seen through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board mounted with a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, other board parts different from the main control section and the information display section, a board case for housing the board, and a watermarked processed seal, wherein the processed seal has a highly translucent part and a plurality of non-translucent parts, and the processed seal is attached on the board case at a position not overlapping the information display part. The game machine is characterized in that the other board component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting part and the board case between the plurality of non-light-transmitting parts, and the information display part can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a substrate case that houses the substrate, and a processed seal that is subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal has a highly translucent translucent portion and a plurality of low translucent non-translucent portions, the processed seal is attached to the substrate case at a position that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and is attached to the substrate case via the substrate case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control section can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for housing the substrate, and a processing seal subjected to watermark processing, wherein the processing seal has a highly translucent translucent portion and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency; , a gaming machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board mounted with a main control unit for controlling a game, an information display unit for displaying game information, other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with watermarking, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting part with high translucency and a non-light-transmitting part with low translucency; The gaming machine is characterized in that it is attached at a non-overlapping position, the other board component is visible through the translucent section and the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked, the processed seal has a highly translucent part and a non-translucent part that is low in translucency, and the processed seal is attached to the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display part, The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component can be visually recognized through the light transmitting section and the board case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with watermarking, wherein the processed seal has a highly translucent part and a non-light-transmitting part, the processed seal is attached on the board case at a position not overlapping the main control part and the information display part, and through the board case, the main control part is provided. The gaming machine is characterized in that a part can be visually recognized and the information display part can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. a substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted; a substrate case for housing the substrate; Characterized by technique.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section that controls a game, an information display section that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, a board case that houses the board, a translucent section that is highly translucent, and a plurality of entry fields that can be filled in by an administrator. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component is visible through the light transmitting section and the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section that controls a game, an information display section that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, a board case that houses the board, a highly translucent translucent section, and a plurality of entry fields that can be filled in by an administrator. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component can be visually recognized through the board case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. a substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted; a substrate case for housing the substrate; The gaming machine is characterized in that the display section can be visually recognized.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A gaming machine comprising: a substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game; an information display unit for displaying game information; a substrate case for housing the substrate; a sticker having a highly translucent part;

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section that controls a game, an information display section that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted; a board case that houses the board; The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component is visible through the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted; a board case that houses the board; The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted; a board case for housing the board; It is characterized by a game machine that can visually recognize the.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A gaming machine comprising: a substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game; an information display unit for displaying game information; a substrate case for housing the substrate; a seal having a transparent portion with high translucency;

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section that controls a game, an information display section that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, a board case that houses the board, a light-transmitting section that has high translucency, and an information writing section in which predetermined information is written. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component is visible through the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, a seal having a board case for housing the board, a light-transmitting section having high translucency, and an information writing section in which predetermined information is written, wherein the seal is pasted on the board case at a position not overlapping the information display section, and the other board is passed through the light-transmitting section and the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the parts can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. a board on which a main control section for controlling a game and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted; a board case for housing the board; a sticker having a highly translucent part; and an information writing section for writing predetermined information. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A game machine comprising: a board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted; a board case for housing the board; a sticker having a transparent part with high translucency;

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and can also be used for reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 game machine 45 first start port 47 second start port 70 first image display device (display means)
70a Production design (design)
110 main control board (main control means)
110m main control unit (main control means)
130 production control board (production control means)
130m production control section (production control means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing a determination based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executing a special game advantageous to a player when the variable display of symbols to be executed on the first display means based on the determination results in a predetermined special result,
It has a normal game state as a game state and a specific game state more advantageous than the normal game state,
Based on the establishment of the first starting condition for the first starting means, or based on the establishment of the second starting condition for the second starting means, the second display means different from the first display means can perform a variable effect of the production pattern,
A first specific notification that suggests that it is in the specific gaming state, and a second specific notification that is performed in addition to the first specific notification based on the establishment of the first start condition when executing the first specific notification.
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that is executed over one or more of the variable effects that makes the execution of the special game expected,
During the variable production based on the first starting condition in the specific game state, in which the second specific notification can be executed , the execution of the predetermined production can be restricted ,
The variable effect can be executed with the effect symbol of the first mode and the effect symbol of the second mode displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable effect, and the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the normal game state is easier to display than the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific game state.
The game machine is characterized in that the variable performance based on the first starting condition in the normal game state facilitates execution of the linked performance performed in conjunction with the appearance of the performance symbol of the second mode than the variable performance based on the first starting condition in the specific game state.

Images